Autodesk Inventor

Topics in this section

Fundamentals

Work Environment

Parts

Assemblies

Drawings

Collaboration and Visualization

Design Optimization

System Performance

Glossary

Autodesk Inventor >

Fundamentals

Topics in this section

Getting started

Basic 3D Workflow

Transition from 2D

Transition from SolidWorks

About Help

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals >

Getting started

Topics in this section

Getting Started tab

Environments

User Interface

Tools in the Application Window

The Ribbon

Enhanced Tooltips

InfoCenter

Navigation tools

Navigation Bar

Views of models

Browser Icon Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Getting Started tab

Access learning components of the Inventor Help system, such as the

Ribbon Introduction (video), Command Locator, Ribbon Tutorial, Show Me

animations, New Feature Workshop and others, directly from the Getting

started tab on the ribbon. The Getting Started tab is available at all times

within Autodesk Inventor.

Tip If you are familiar with the location of commands in previous versions of

Autodesk Inventor, use the Command Locator to find the new location of the

command in the ribbon. Click on the Getting Started tab and select Command

Locator. In the Command Locator click the command you are trying to locate.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Environments

To access, work in, and exit environments

To access Environments within an Assembly file

To access Environments within a Part file

To access Environments within a Drawing file

Work in Environments

Once you enter an environment, all commands that enable you to work within

that environment are available for you. Each specialized environment has a

unique tab, called a contextual tab, with commands specific to that environment.

For example, when you enter the Studio environment, a new tab labeled Renter is

displayed.

Example of the Studio contextual tab

The Render tab is specific to Studio. Tabs specific to an environment have a

unique color to indicate you are working in a specialized environment.

To exit Environments

To exit an environment accessed from the Environments tab or the Sketch

environment and return to the general working environment, click Finish on the

Exit panel, which is located on the ribbon to the far right.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

User Interface

Return

Access: On the Quick Access toolbar, click the arrow on the Return

button, and select an option.

Use Return to quit in-place editing and quickly return to the desired

environment. The destination depends on which modeling environment you

are working in.

Return (to

previous)

Returns to the previous editing state. For example,

Return (to previous) in the sketch environment returns to

the part that contains the sketch.

Return to

Parent

Returns to the parent component in the browser. For

example, when editing a part in a subassembly, Return to

Parent changes the edit target to the subassembly. When

editing a sketch, Return to Parent changes the edit target

to the part that owns the sketch.

Return to Top Returns to the top model in the browser, regardless of

how deep the edit target is in the browser hierarchy.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Tools in the Application Window

Customize the Quick Access toolbar

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Application Menu

To toggle between Recent Documents and Open Documents

To toggle between Recent Documents and Open Documents

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application

Window > Application Menu >

Search for Commands

In the Application Menu, perform a real-time search for all commands

located on the ribbon.

The Search field displays at the top of the Application Menu. Search results can

include menu commands, basic tooltips, and command prompt text strings. You

can enter a search term in any language.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application

Window > Application Menu >

Access Common Tools

Print models and drawings

Prints or plots all or any portion of a model or drawing.

Access: Click Print.

Print Model

Print Drawing

You can print or plot all or any portion of a model or drawing.

To print a model

To print a drawing

To print a note

Concept Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application

Window > Application Menu >

Recent Documents

To toggle between Recent Documents and Open Documents

You can view the list of recent documents, or open documents from the right

pane of the Application Menu when no first level item is selected:

Click Open

Documents

to view open

documents.

Click Recent

Documents

to view

recent

documents.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application

Window > Application Menu >

Currently Open Documents

To toggle between Recent Documents and Open Documents

You can view the list of recent documents, or open documents from the right

pane of the Application Menu when no first level item is selected:

Click Open

Documents

to view open

documents.

Click Recent

Documents

to view

recent

documents.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application

Window > Application Menu >

Preview Documents

View a thumbnail of files in the Recent Documents and Open Documents

lists.

When you hover over a file in either of the lists, a preview of the file is displayed

along with the following information:

Path where the file is stored

Date the file was last modified

Version of the product used to create the file

Name of the person who last saved the file

Name of the person who is currently editing the file

You can also include a thumbnail of the file next to the files in the list. To change

the file icon to a thumbnail preview, click the drop-down list at the top of the

Recent Documents or Open Documents lists and choose a small, medium, or large

thumbnail.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Quick Access Toolbar

Customize the Quick Access toolbar

To add and remove commands to the Quick Access toolbar

1. On Quick Access toolbar, click the drop-down arrow.

2. On the Customize menu, click the command name you want to display

on the Quick Access toolbar.

A check mark next to a command name indicates it is displayed on the

Quick Access toolbar.

To add commands to the Customize Quick Access toolbar menu

1. On the Ribbon, right-click on the command you want to add, and

select Add to the Quick Access toolbar.

To move the Quick Access toolbar menu above or below the ribbon

1. On Quick Access toolbar, click the drop-down arrow.

2. On the Customize menu, click Show Above the Ribbon to display the

Quick Access toolbar above the ribbon, or Show Below the Ribbon to

display the Quick Access toolbar below the ribbon.

A check mark next to a command name indicates it is displayed on the

Quick Access toolbar.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Status Bar

Capacity Meter

The Capacity Meter provides several pieces of information with regards to memory

consumption. The meter has three indicators: total number of occurrences in the

active document, total number of files open in the session, and amount of

memory used by the session.

The meter can be used in Inventor Only: Restricts the display to just the

Autodesk Inventor process. The color changes from green to yellow when

more than 60% of the allotted space is used, then red once 80% has been

used.

When hovering over the Capacity Meter, the tooltip displays details of used and

available memory.

Note The Capacity Meter is not available in 64-bit operating systems.

Concept Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Document tab

Capacity Meter

The Capacity Meter provides several pieces of information with regards to memory

consumption. The meter has three indicators: total number of occurrences in the

active document, total number of files open in the session, and amount of

memory used by the session.

The meter can be used in Inventor Only: Restricts the display to just the

Autodesk Inventor process. The color changes from green to yellow when

more than 60% of the allotted space is used, then red once 80% has been

used. The capacity meter is not available in 64 bit operating systems..

When hovering over the Capacity Meter, the tooltip displays details of used and

available memory.

Concept Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Keytips

Use the keyboard to access the Application Menu, Quick Access toolbar,

and ribbon.

Press the Alt key or F10 to display shortcut keys for common tools in the

application window. Keytips allow you to perform tasks without using your mouse.

When you select a keytip, more keytips are displayed for that tool. Keytips

appear as underlined characters to indicate which key or combination of keys on

the keyboard must be pressed to activate a command.

Keytips allow you to navigate in the Application Menu and in the ribbon using

only the keyboard. Use the keyboard arrows to navigate to commands on the

ribbon and Application Menu

Note Keytips are not customizable.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Glossary

application button

The button that is displayed in the top-left corner of the application. If you

click the application button, the Application Menu is displayed.

Application Menu

The menu that is displayed when you click the application button. The

Application Menu contains common tools for creating, saving, and publishing

a file.

push pin

A push pin-shaped button used on the ribbon and in the Application Menu.

On the ribbon, push pins are used to keep a ribbon panel expanded. In the

Application Menu, push pins keep an item in the list of recently opened

items.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

The Ribbon

To minimize the ribbon

To toggle the visiblity of all controls

To change the ribbon appearance

To move a command on the ribbon to the expanded panel

To move a command on a main panel on the ribbon to the expanded panel

To move a command from the expanded panel to the main panel on the ribbon

To ungroup commands from a drop-menu

To display or hide a ribbon panel

To show or hide text labels on ribbon panels

To change the docking position of the ribbon

To create and add a command to the User Commands panel

To remove a command from the User Commands panel

To export a .xml file containing command from the User Commands panel

To import a command from the User Commands panel

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon >

Display and Organize the Ribbon

To minimize the ribbon

1. Click the ribbon minimize button to the right of the ribbon tabs.

2. The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options:

Minimize to Tabs: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab titles

are displayed.

Minimize to Panels: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab

and panel titles are displayed.

Show Full Ribbon: Displays tabs and full panels, including

controls.

Note Minimize behavior is available only for the horizontal ribbon.

Shortcut menu: Right-click the ribbon tab bar, click Minimize, and then click one

of the minimize options.

Pointing device: Double-click the name of the active ribbon tab.

To toggle the visiblity of all controls

On the ribbon, click View tab Windows panel Clean Screen.

To change the ribbon appearance

Right-click the ribbon tab bar and select Ribbon Appearance and make a

selection.

To move a command on the ribbon to the expanded panel

Right-click on a command and select Move to expanded panel.

To move a command on a main panel on the ribbon to the expanded panel

Right-click on a command and select Move to expanded panel.

To move a command from the expanded panel to the main panel on the

Concept Procedure

ribbon

Right-click on a command in an expanded panel and select Move to

main panel.

To ungroup commands from a drop-menu

Right-click on a command that has a drop-down arrow and select

Ungroup from drop-down menu.

Note To return commands to the drop-down menu, right-click on the command

and select Return commands to drop-down menu.

To display or hide a ribbon panel

Right-click anywhere inside the ribbon. Under Panels, click or clear the

name of a panel.

To show or hide text labels on ribbon panels

Right-click the ribbon tab bar and click Show Panel Titles.

To change the docking position of the ribbon

Right-click the ribbon tab bar, click Ribbon Docking and make a

selection.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon >

Customize the Ribbon

Customize User Commands

On the ribbon, you can create one custom panel within each tab to display

commands you want to be available from that tab in Autodesk Inventor. Creating

user-defined commands creates the User Command panel.

Access: Right-click on the ribbon, and select Customize User

Commands

Important The User Commands panel is created when you specify one or more

commands in the Customize User Commands dialog box. You can create a unique

User Commands panel for each tab. The User Commands are only for the active

Tab. If commands are not available for the active environment, they are disabled.

Choose

commands

from

Controls the display of the list of commands. Click the

drop-down arrow to narrow the selection.

Commands A display mode where all points of a model are projected

along parallel lines to the screen.

Add Adds specified commands to the User Commands panels

in the active tab.

Remove Removes specified commands to from the User

Commands panels in the active tab.

Import Imports the user-defined panel settings from an .xml

file. Click Import to display the Open dialog box.

Navigate to the desired file, and then click Open.

Export Saves the current user-defined settings in an .xml file.

Click Export to display the Save Copy As dialog box.

Select a file location, enter a file name, and then click

Save.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon >

Color Themes

You can control the color of the icons in the ribbon using the Application

Options dialog box, Colors tab, Color Theme settings. Click the Amber Icon

Color Theme icon to display the ribbon icons for the amber icon color

theme. To use the cobalt icon color theme, click the Cobalt Icon Color

Theme icon.

Cobalt Color Icon Theme

Amber Color Icon Theme

The cobalt color icon theme closely matches the icon colors in other Autodesk

products. The amber icon color theme is similar to Autodesk Inventor 2009.

Note In addition to changing the icon color, you can control the color of the

Applicaton frame in the Colors tab in the Aplication Options dialog box using the

Application Frame setting.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon >

Glossary

contextual ribbon tab

A ribbon tab that is displayed only when a particular type of object, such as

a hatch or table, is included in a selection. Toolbars can be changed to

contextual tabs in the CUI.

expanded panel

An area on the ribbon associated with a ribbon panel. An expanded panel

contains additional tools and controls. See also ribbon panel and ribbon.

floating panel

A ribbon panel that is not attached to the rest of the ribbon or application

frame.

horizontal ribbon

The ribbon, when it is oriented across the top of the file window.

push pin

A push pin-shaped button used on the ribbon and in the Application Menu.

On the ribbon, pins keep panels expanded. In the Application Menu, pins

keep an item in the list of recently viewed items.

ribbon

A palette that displays buttons and controls used for both 2D drawing and

annotation and 3D modeling, viewing, and rendering. See also ribbon tab

and ribbon panel and slide-out panel. (RIBBON)

ribbon panel

A labeled control in the ribbon. Ribbon panels contain buttons or other

controls. Multiple ribbon panels form a ribbon tab.

ribbon tab

The most general control on the ribbon. Ribbon tabs contain ribbon panels,

which contain buttons or other controls.

vertical ribbon

The ribbon when it is oriented vertically, usually on the left or right of the

file window.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Enhanced Tooltips

To turn tooltips on or off

1. On the ribbon, click Tools tab Options panel Application Options.

2. In the Application Options dialog box, General tab, under Tooltip

Appearance, click Show Tooltips.

3. Click OK.

To control the display of the second-level tooltip

1. On the ribbon, click Tools tab Options panel Application Options.

2. In the Application Options dialog box, General tab, under Tooltip

Appearance, click arrows to specify the seconds to delay the display of

the second-level tooltip.

3. Click OK.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

InfoCenter

Topics in this section

Find Information Using InfoCenter

Glossary

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter >

Find Information Using InfoCenter

To browse search results

To rearrange the topics displayed on a panel

To search multiple sources for information

To search a single location for information

To add a location to search

To access the Subscription Center in the program

To display the InfoCenter Favorites panel

To save a link in InfoCenter as a favorite

To remove a favorite link from the InfoCenter Favorites panel

To specify locations to search for information

To add a new location to search for information

To remove a search location

To specify the CAD Manager Channel location and name

To specify the channels to display in the Communication Center panel

To specify InfoCenter balloon notification settings

To add an RSS feed to Communication Center

To remove an RSS feed from Communication Center

To display topics in Help

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using

InfoCenter >

Overview of InfoCenter

To rearrange the topics displayed on a panel

1. Display a panel by doing one of the following:

In the InfoCenter box, enter a keyword or phrase. Then press

ENTER or click the Search button.

In the InfoCenter box, click the Communication Center button.

In the InfoCenter box, click the Favorites button.

2. Click and drag a category or group header to the desired position.

Note You can rearrange categories within a group, but you cannot move them

into other groups.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using

InfoCenter >

Search For Information

To add a location to search

1. In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

2. Click Add Search Location.

3. In the Add Search Location dialog box, specify a document or a file

location to search.

4. Click Add.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using

InfoCenter >

Access Subscription Center

To access the Subscription Center in the program

1. In the InfoCenter box, click the Subscription Center button.

2. On the Subscription Center panel, under Subscription Center, click the

subscription resource you want to access.

Note Subscription Center is not available to all product users. If subscription

resources are not available in your product, your product is not entitled to

subscription benefits.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using

InfoCenter >

Receive Product Updates andAnnouncements

You can click the Communication Center button to display links to

information about product updates and announcements, and may include

links to RSS feeds.

Topics in this section

Overview of Communication Center

Receive New Information Notifications

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using

InfoCenter > Receive Product Updates and Announcements >

Overview of Communication Center

To open Communication Center, click the Communication Center button in

the InfoCenter box.

Communication Center provides the following types of announcements:

Autodesk Channels: Receive support information, product updates, and

other announcements (including articles and tips).

CAD Manager Channel. Receive information (RSS feeds) published by

your CAD manager.

RSS Feeds. Receive information from RSS feeds to which you subscribe.

RSS feeds generally notify you when new content is posted. You are

automatically subscribed to several default RSS feeds when you install

the program.

You can customize the items that display in the Communication Center panel.

Communication Center Online Policy

Communication Center is an interactive feature that must be connected to the

Internet in order to deliver content and information. Each time Communication

Center is connected, it sends your information to Autodesk so that you receive

the correct information. All information is sent anonymously to Autodesk to

maintain your privacy.

Communication Center sends the following information to Autodesk:

Product name (in which you are using Communication Center)

Product release number

Product language

Country/region (specified in the Communication Center settings)

Your unique Customer Involvement Program (CIP) ID if you are

participating in the CIP program

Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent from Communication

Center to monitor how it is being used and how it can be improved. Autodesk

maintains information provided by or collected from you in accordance with the

company's published privacy policy, which is available at

http://www.autodesk.com/privacy.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using

InfoCenter > Receive Product Updates and Announcements >

Receive New Information Notifications

Whenever new information is available, Communication Center notifies you

by displaying a balloon message below the Communication Center button

on the InfoCenter box.

Click the link in the balloon message to open the article or announcement.

If you don’t want to receive Communication Center notifications, in the InfoCenter

Settings dialog box, turn off Balloon Notification.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using

InfoCenter >

Save and Access Favorite Topics

To remove a favorite link from the InfoCenter Favorites panel

1. In the InfoCenter box, click the Favorites button to display the

Favorites panel.

2. Click the star icon that is displayed next to the link that you want to

remove from the Favorites panel.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using

InfoCenter >

Specify InfoCenter Settings

To remove an RSS feed from Communication Center

1. In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

2. Click Search Settings.

3. In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, in the left pane, click RSS Feeds.

4. In the right pane, do one of the following:

Click Remove.

Right-click an RSS feed. Click Remove.

5. In the InfoCenter - Remove RSS Feed dialog box, click Yes.

6. Click OK.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using

InfoCenter >

Search Topics in Help

To display topics in Help

In the InfoCenter box, click the Help button.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter >

Glossary

Communication Center

Displays links to information about product updates and product

announcements.

InfoCenter

You can use InfoCenter to search a variety of information sources with one

query. You can also easily access product updates and announcements.

RSS feed

Information published by a website to which you subscribe. Usually allows

users to receive notifications when new content is posted, such as articles,

etc. RSS stands for Rich Site Summary (or Really Simple Syndication).

Subscription Center

Provides access to information about subscription services such as product

enhancements, web support from Autodesk technical experts, and self-

paced e-Learning.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Navigation tools

Navigation tools change the orientation and view of your model.

The display of a model can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the

magnification at which objects are displayed, rotating the model among other

ways of changing the orientation of the model using the tools on SteeringWheels.

You can create a view that defines an area of a model as the Home view and use

preset views to restore known viewpoints of a model with the Autodesk®

ViewCube® navigation tool.

Topics in this section

View Cube

SteeringWheels

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools >

View Cube

To control the position of ViewCube

To control the size of ViewCube

To control the inactive opacity of ViewCube

To display the compass below ViewCube

To display the ViewCube menu

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube >

Overview of the ViewCube

ViewCube Options

Sets the preferences for working with the ViewCube.

Access: Select Tools tab Options panel Application Options

Display tab, and then click ViewCube.

Right-click on the ViewCube and select Options.

Application Options

Display

When Dragging on the ViewCube

When clicking on the ViewCube

Default ViewCube Orientation

Document Settings

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube >

ViewCube Menu

To display the ViewCube menu

To display the ViewCube menu, do one of the following:

Right-click on the compass, Home icon, or the main area of the

ViewCube.

Click the context menu button located near the ViewCube.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube >

Reorient the View of a Model with theViewCube

To reorient the current view to a preset orientation

To view an adjacent face

To interactively reorient the view

To use animated transitions when reorienting a view to a preset orientation

To automatically fit the model after a view orientation

To roll a face view

To define the Front view

To restore the Front view

To change the view projection mode

To define the Home view

To reorient the model to the Home view

To lock to the current selection

To examine an individual object with the ViewCube

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient

the View of a Model with the ViewCube >

Reorient the Current View

To restore the Front view

Right-click on the ViewCube, and click Reset Front.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient

the View of a Model with the ViewCube >

Set the View Projection Mode

To change the view projection mode

1. Right-click on the ViewCube, and click one of the following options:

Orthographic

Perspective

Perspective with Ortho Faces

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient

the View of a Model with the ViewCube >

Home View

To reorient the model to the Home view

Use one of the following methods:

Click the Home button ( ) located near the ViewCube.

Right-click the ViewCube, and click Go Home.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient

the View of a Model with the ViewCube >

Examine Individual Objects with theViewCube

To examine an individual object with the ViewCube

1. In the model, select one or more objects to define the center point of

the view.

2. Click one of the preset locations on the ViewCube, or click and drag

the ViewCube to reorient the view of the model.

The ViewCube reorients the view of the model based on the center

point of the selected objects.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube >

Glossary

3D view

Any view where the UCS icon appears in rendered colored form: current

visual style is not 2D Wireframe.

compass

A visual aid that indicates the directions North, South, East, and West in

the current model.

Home view

A special view saved with the drawing that is controlled through the

ViewCube. The Home view is similar in concept to the default, initial view

presented when a drawing is first opened.

roll arrows

Curved arrows located above the ViewCube with which you can rotate the

current view 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise.

selection sensitivity

The ability to define the pivot point for reorienting a model based on the

current selection.

ViewCube

User interface element that displays the current orientation of a model. You

can interactively rotate the current view or restore a preset view.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools >

SteeringWheels

To display a Wheel

To close a wheel

To change the size of a wheel

To change the opacity of a wheel

To enable tooltips for a wheel

To enable tools messages for a wheel

To display the Wheel menu

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels >

Overview of SteeringWheels

SteeringWheels Options

Access:

Click Tools tab Options panel Application Options

Display tab

Right-click the wheel in the graphics window and select Options

Show Tool Messages

Show Tool Tips

Display

Navigation Options

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels >

Wheel Menu

To display the Wheel menu

Click the down arrow in the lower-right corner of the wheel or right-click

on the wheel.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels >

Navigation Wheels

To switch to the big View Objects wheel

To switch to the mini View Objects wheel

To switch to the big Tour Building wheel

To switch to the mini Tour Building wheel

To switch to the big Full Navigation wheel

To switch to the mini Full Navigation wheel

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels >

2D Navigation Wheel

With this wheel, you can access basic 2D navigation tools; it is particularly useful

when you do not have a pointing device with a scroll wheel. The wheel includes

the Pan and Zoom tools.

The 2D Navigation wheel wedges have the following options:

Pan. Repositions the current view by panning.

Zoom. Adjusts the magnification of the current view.

Rewind. Restores the most recent view orientation. You can move

backward or forward by clicking and dragging left or right.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels >

View Object Wheels

To switch to the mini View Objects wheel

Right-click the wheel, and click Mini View Object Wheel.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels >

Tour Building Wheels

To switch to the mini Tour Building wheel

Right-click the wheel, and click Mini Tour Building Wheel.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels >

Full Navigation Wheels

To switch to the mini Full Navigation wheel

Right-click the wheel, and click Mini Full Navigation Wheel.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels >

Navigation Tools

To specify a point on a model as the center of a view

To specify the target point for the Zoom and Orbit tools

To reorient a view by moving towards or away from the model

To look around a view with the Look tool

To look around and walk through a model with the Look tool

To invert the vertical axis for the Look tool

To orbit a model with the Orbit tool

To orbit around an object with the Orbit tool

To turn on selection sensitivity for the Orbit tool

To start the Orbit tool with the middle mouse button

To pan the view with the Pan tool

To start the Pan tool with the middle button

To restore the previous view

To restore a previous view with the Rewind History panel

To change the elevation of a view

To use the Walk tool to move through the model

To change the movement speed for the Walk tool

To constrain the Walk tool to the ground plane

To adjust the height of the current view from the Walk tool

To zoom the view with a single click

To zoom a view in and out by dragging

To zoom in to an area of the model by specifying window

Concept Procedure

To zoom in and out by scrolling the mouse wheel when a SteeringWheel is

displayed

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Center Tool

To specify the target point for the Zoom and Orbit tools

1. Display one of the Full Navigation wheels or the big View Object wheel.

2. Click and hold down the Center wedge.

3. Drag the cursor over the desired location of the model.

4. Release the button on your pointing device when the sphere is

displayed.

The model is panned until the sphere is centered.

5. Use the Zoom or Orbit tool to reorient the view of the model.

If you are using one of the Full Navigation wheels, hold down the CTRL

key before using the Zoom tool.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Forward Tool

To reorient a view by moving towards or away from the model

1. Display the big Tour Building wheel.

2. Click and hold down the Forward wedge within the scope of the model.

The Drag Distance indicator is displayed.

Note If you click the Forward wedge once, the model moves forward

50% of the distance between the current location and the pivot point.

3. Drag the cursor up or down to change the distance from which you

view the model.

4. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Look Tool

To invert the vertical axis for the Look tool

1. Display a wheel.

2. Right-click the wheel, and click Options.

3. In the SteeringWheels Options dialog box, select Invert Vertical Axis for

Look Tool.

Dragging downward and upward lowers and raises the target point of

the current view.

4. Click OK.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Orbit Tool

To start the Orbit tool with the middle mouse button

1. Display one of the wheels other than the big View Object or Tour

Building wheels.

2. Press and hold down the SHIFT key.

3. Press and hold down the scroll wheel or middle button on your pointing

device and drag to orbit the model.

4. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Pan Tool

To start the Pan tool with the middle button

1. Display the 2D Navigation wheel, the Full Navigation wheel, or one of

the mini wheels.

2. Press and hold down the scroll wheel or middle button.

The cursor changes to the Pan cursor.

3. Drag to reposition the model.

4. Release the wheel or button on your pointing device to return to the

wheel.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Rewind Tool

To restore a previous view with the Rewind History panel

1. Display a wheel.

2. Click and hold the Rewind wedge.

The Rewind History panel is displayed.

3. While holding down the button on your pointing device, drag to the left

or to the right to restore a previous view.

Dragging to the left restores an older previous view. Dragging to the

right restores a view that is newer than the one you are currently

viewing. You must have previously used the Rewind tool to see views

available on the right. The current position in the navigation history is

indicated by the orange box dragged along the Rewind History panel.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Up/Down Tool

To change the elevation of a view

1. Display one of the Full Navigation wheels or the Tour Building wheels.

2. Click and hold down the Up/Down wedge.

The Vertical Distance indicator is displayed.

3. Drag up or down to change the elevation of the view.

4. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Walk Tool

To adjust the height of the current view from the Walk tool

1. Display one of the Full Navigation wheels or the mini Tour Building

wheel.

2. Click and hold down the Walk wedge.

The cursor changes to the Walk cursor and the Center Circle icon is

displayed.

3. Do one of the following:

Press and hold down the SHIFT key to enable the Up/Down

tool; drag up or down.

Press and hold down the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key.

4. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation

tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Zoom Tool

To zoom in and out by scrolling the mouse wheel when a SteeringWheel is

displayed

1. Display one of the wheels other than the big Tour Building wheel.

2. Scroll the wheel forward or backward to zoom in or out.

3. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels >

Glossary

basic wheels

A reference to the View Object wheel and Tour Building wheel.

big wheels

The large version of the SteeringWheels. Labels are displayed on each

wheel wedge and they are larger than the size of the cursor.

First Contact balloon

The interactive graphical tooltip that is displayed when the SteeringWheel is

pinned during startup.

heads-up display (HUD)

The process of transparently displaying user interface elements on top of or

over the drawing area without obscuring the view of the objects drawn on

the drawing area.

mini wheels

The small version of SteeringWheels. No labels are displayed on any of the

wedges, and they are often the size of the cursor.

rewind

Restores the previous view or movement path created by the Autodesk®

ViewCube® navigation tool, SteeringWheels, and other navigation tools.

selection sensitivity

The ability to define the pivot point to reorienting a model based on the

current selection.

SteeringWheels

Tool set that provides access to 2D and 3D navigation tools.

tool message

A small instructional message that appears over the drawing window and is

specific to the active navigation tool from a SteeringWheel.

tracking menu

A cluster of buttons that follows the cursor as you move it over the window.

wheel

A reference to one of the individual user interface elements that make up

SteeringWheels. See also SteeringWheels.

wheel surface

Area of a SteeringWheel that is used to organize wedges and other buttons.

wheel wedge

A section on the surface of a SteeringWheel that is designated for a specific

navigation or orientation tool.

wheels

A reference to more than one of the individual user interface elements that

make up SteeringWheels. See also SteeringWheels.

wrap around

Behavior in which the cursor wraps around the window and appears on the

opposite side to allow the continuation of a drag operation instead of

stopping at the edge of the drawing area.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Navigation Bar

Use the navigation bar

View faces of models from selected planes

Pan views

Rotate views with the Free Orbit and Constrained Orbit command

Zoom views in or out

Zoom to view all

Zoom views of selected features

Zoom views of areas

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation Bar >

Access Navigation Tools from theNavigation Bar

Viewing commands

The viewing commands manipulate the view in the graphics window of the active

part, assembly or drawing, or a view in the Engineer's Notebook. You can use

viewing commands to manipulate the view while performing other operations. For

example, rotating a part during a fillet operation so that you can select edges that

are otherwise hidden.

In a part or assembly, zooms the view so that all elements in

the model fit in the graphics window. In a drawing, zooms the

view so that all active sheet fits in the graphics window.

Changes the cursor into cross hairs that are used to define a

frame for the view. The elements within the frame zoom to fill

the graphics window.

Turns the cursor to an arrow that is used to zoom the view in

or out.

Changes the cursor to a four-directional arrow used to drag the

view in the graphics window.

In a part or assembly, zooms the selected edge, feature, line,

or other element to fill the graphics window. You can select the

element either before or after clicking Zoom. Not used in

drawings.

In a part or assembly, adds a rotate symbol and cursor to the

view. You can rotate the view planar to the screen around the

center mark, around a horizontal or vertical axis, or around the

X and Y axes. Not used in drawings.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

In a part or assembly, zooms and rotates the model to display

the selected element planar to the screen or a selected edge or

line horizontal to the screen. Not used in drawings.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation Bar >

Glossary

navigation bar

Interface element from which you can access both unified and product-

specific navigation tools from a centralized location.

unified navigation tools

Navigation tools that are common across multiple Autodesk programs. The

unified navigation tools include Autodesk® ViewCube® and SteeringWheels

navigation tools.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Views of models

Display shadows

Navigating a model in 3D

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Views of models >

Orthographic views

Display shadows

To present a model more realistically and provide orientation when viewing a

model, you can cast a shadow on the plane beneath the model. If visibility of any

geometry such as a feature or surface is turned off, no shadow is cast. Work

features, annotations, and sketch geometry are not visible in shadows.

On the View tab, Appearance panel, click the down arrow on the Shadow

command.

Choose one:

No Shadow The default setting displays the model without a

shadow.

Ground Shadow Casts a shadow on the plane below the

model.

X-Ray Shadow Same as Ground Shadow, except that details

of individual components are visible.

Concept Quick ReferenceProcedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Views of models >

Perspective views

Navigating a model in 3D

In Perspective Camera mode, use the Zoom

and Pan commands in conjunction with key

combinations to navigate through a model in

3D.

Set the model view to Perspective Camera

mode by selecting the Perspective Camera in

the Appearance panel of the View tab. Then,

position the model so that you are sighting

down the axis of your intended initial motion.

1. Use the key combination SHIFT+F3. Click and hold

the left mouse button and drag the mouse while the

Zoom command is active. This moves the camera

and the camera target point along your current line

of sight.

2. Use key F3. Click and hold the left mouse button

and drag the mouse while the Zoom command is

active. This moves the camera and the camera

target point along your current line of sight.

Concept Procedure

2. Use the key combination SHIFT+F2. Click and hold

the left mouse button and drag the mouse while the

Pan command is active. This action pivots the

camera to change the line of sight.

Show Me how to navigate through a model in 3D.

Tip You can adjust camera position and lens focal length simultaneously to set

the amount of perspective distortion. For instance, for a given view or view path,

you may need a wider angle lens. Use SHIFT+CTRL+F3.

Note The term "camera mode" indicates only the particular view method used for

models in the graphics window. It is not meant to indicate that you can record

actions that take place in the graphics window by choosing either Perspective

Camera mode or Orthographic Camera mode.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Browser Icon Reference

Topics in this section

Sketch

Construction

Model

Sheet Metal

Assembly

Weldments

Drawing

Presentation

State

Substitute

Analysis

Notebook

Application

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Sketch

2D Sketch displays geometry in associated 2D sketch.

Shared 2D

Sketch

displays geometry in shared 2D sketch.

Helical Curve displays geometry associated with a helical

curve in a 3D sketch.

Project to

Surface Along

Vector

displays 3D sketch geometry created by

projection of a curve onto a surface along a

vector.

Project Cut Edges displays cut model edges projected onto the

sketch plane.

Project to

Surface at

Closest Point

displays 3D sketch geometry created by

projection of a curve onto a surface at the

closest points. Projection directions are

defined by the surface normals.

Wrap Projected

Curves to

Surface

displays 3D sketch geometry created by

wrapping projected curves about a surface.

3D Sketch displays geometry in associated 3D sketch.

Shared 3D

Sketch

displays geometry in shared 3D sketch.

Sketch Image displays associated sketch image.

Project Loop displays 2D sketch geometry created by

projection of a loop onto the sketch plane.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Construction

Construction

Group

displays geometry group in the construction

environment.

Construction

Solid

displays solid geometry in the construction

environment.

Construction

Surface

displays surface geometry in the

construction environment.

Construction Wire displays wire geometry in the construction

environment.

Data Checked

with Errors

indicates geometry was checked with the

Quality Check tool and errors exist.

Data Checked no

Errors

indicates geometry was checked with the

Quality Check tool and no errors exist.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Model

Angle iMate displays iMate defined with angle constraint.

Surface Part displays surface part model.

Shared Surface

Part

displays shared surface part model.

Part displays the solid part model.

Blocks contains sketch block definitions.

Block Instance displays the associated sketch block

instance.

Bend displays the part bend feature.

Boundary Patch displays the associated surface boundary

patch.

Shared Boundary

Patch

displays the surface boundary patch shared

by different features.

Chamfer displays the associated chamfer feature.

Circular Pattern

of Part

displays the associated circular pattern of

the solid part and contains the pattern

occurrences.

Circular Pattern displays the associated circular pattern of

the feature and contains the pattern

occurrences.

Coil Surface displays the associated coil surface.

Shared Coil

Surface

displays the coil surface shared by different

features.

Coil displays the associated solid coil feature.

Composite displays the associated composite feature.

Shared

Composite

displays the composite shared by different

features.

Composite iMate displays iMate composed of multiple iMates.

End of Part

Marker

bounds the features that are processed

(above the marker) from those that are not

(below the marker).

Decal indicates a decal has been placed on a

model face.

model face.

Delete Face displays the delete face feature created with

the Delete Face command.

Broken Link indicates the link between the derived and

base components is broken.

Derived Part displays the associated derived part and

contains the included parts and features.

Derived Surface displays the associated surface for the

derived part.

Shared Derived

Surface

displays the derived surface shared by

different features.

Emboss displays the associated emboss feature.

Extend Surface displays the associated extended surface

feature.

Extrusion Surface displays surface extrusion feature.

Shared Extrusion

Surface

displays surface extrusion feature shared by

different features.

Extrusion displays solid extrusion feature.

Face Draft displays the associated face draft feature.

Face Loop displays the associated face loop feature.

Fillet displays the associated fillet feature.

Flush iMate displays iMate defined with flush constraint.

Hole displays the associated hole feature.

Insert iMate displays iMate defined with insert constraint.

3D Intersection displays 3D curve created at geometry

intersection.

iPart displays associated iPart.

Disabled iPart displays iPart that is not enabled.

Disabled

Grounded iPart

displays grounded iPart that is not enabled.

Grounded iPart displays grounded iPart.

Stitch Surface displays the associated stitch surface

feature.

Shared Stitch

Surface

displays stitch surface feature shared by

different features.

Loft Surface displays surface loft feature.

Shared Loft

Surface

displays surface loft feature shared by

different features.

Loft displays solid loft feature.

Mate iMate displays iMate defined with mate constraint.

Mirror displays the mirrored part or features and

contains the mirror occurrences.

Move Face displays the associated moved face feature.

Derived Box displays a bounding box body representative

of the derived component.

Derived Cut indicates the component was subtracted

from the derived part.

Derived Intersect displays the solid created from the

intersection of the associated component

and the other solid components.

Derived Include displays the section of the associated

component included in the derived part.

Origin Plane displays the associated model origin plane.

Origin Point displays the model origin point.

Part displays part.

Disabled Part displays part that is not enabled.

Disabled

Grounded Part

displays grounded part that is not enabled.

Grounded Part displays part with all degrees of freedom

removed.

Pattern

Occurrence

displays feature or part occurrence in the

pattern.

Pattern

Occurrence

Independent

indicates the pattern occurrence is set to

independent relative to the pattern.

Rectangular

Pattern of Part

displays the associated rectangular pattern

of the solid part and contains the pattern

occurrences.

Rectangular

Pattern

displays the associated rectangular pattern

of the feature and contains the pattern

occurrences.

Replace Face displays the associated replace face feature.

Revolve Surface displays surface revolve feature.

Shared Revolve

Surface

displays surface revolve feature shared by

different features.

Surface different features.

Revolve displays solid revolve feature.

Rib displays the associated rib feature.

Rotation iMate displays iMate defined with rotation motion

constraint.

Rotation-

Translation iMate

displays iMate defined with rotation-

translation motion constraint.

Sculpt displays the

Shell displays the associated shell feature.

Split displays the associated split feature.

Sweep Surface displays surface sweep feature.

Shared Sweep

Surface

displays surface sweep feature shared by

different features.

Sweep displays solid sweep feature.

Table Folder organizes iPart or iAssembly members in the

browser based on the keys chosen in the

author tables. Icons are shown when List by

Keys is selected in the context menu.

Table Item activates the iPart or iAssembly member.

The active member is shown with a check

mark.

Table accesses iPartor iAssembly authors.

Tangent iMate displays iMate defined with tangent

constraint.

Thicken Surface displays surface thicken feature.

Shared Thicken

Surface

displays surface thicken feature shared by

different features.

Thicken displays solid thicken feature.

Thread displays the associated thread feature.

Trim Surface displays the surface created with the trim

surface command.

iFeature displays the associated iFeature.

Grounded Work

Axis

displays a work axis with all degrees of

freedom removed.

Shared Grounded

Work Axis

displays a grounded work axis shared by

different features.

Work Axis displays a construction geometry axis used

to facilitate the creation of part features.

to facilitate the creation of part features.

Shared Work Axis displays a work axis shared by different

features.

Grounded Work

Plane

displays a work plane with all degrees of

freedom removed.

Shared Grounded

Work Plane

displays a grounded work plane shared by

different features.

Work Plane displays a construction geometry plane used

to facilitate the creation of part features.

Shared Work

Plane

displays a work plane shared by different

features.

Grounded Work

Point

displays a work point with all degrees of

freedom removed.

Shared Grounded

Work Point

displays a grounded work point shared by

different features.

Work Point displays a construction geometry point used

to facilitate the creation of part features.

Shared Work

Point

displays a work point shared by different

features.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Sheet Metal

Corner Chamfer displays sheet metal corner chamfer.

Contour Flange displays sheet metal contour flange.

Corner Seam displays seam between two sheet metal

faces.

Cut displays sheet metal cut feature.

Part displays sheet metal part.

Disabled

Grounded Part

displays grounded sheet metal part that is

not enabled.

Disabled Part displays sheet metal part that is not

enabled.

Invisible

Grounded Part

indicates presence of grounded sheet metal

part with visibility turned off.

Invisible Part indicates presence of sheet metal part with

visibility turned off.

Grounded Part displays sheet metal part with all degrees of

freedom removed.

Face displays sheet metal face.

Corner Round displays sheet metal corner round.

Flange displays sheet metal flange.

Flat Pattern displays sheet metal flat pattern when

active.

Folded Model displays sheet metal folded model when

active.

Fold displays sheet metal fold.

Hem displays sheet metal hem.

Punch displays cut or shape punched in a sheet

metal face.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Assembly

Angle Constraint displays components engaged in an angle

constraint.

Angle iMate

Result

displays components engaged in an angle

iMate.

Composite iMate

Result

displays components engaged in a

composite iMate.

Layout Constraint displays components engaged in a layout

constraint.

Private Design

View

activates the associated private design view.

Design View activates the associated design view.

Locked Design

View

indicates the design view is locked and

cannot be affected by changes to the

assembly model.

Assembly displays assembly.

Disabled

Assembly

displays assembly that is not enabled.

Disabled

Grounded

Assembly

displays grounded assembly that is not

enabled.

Grounded

Assembly

displays assembly with all degrees of

freedom removed.

Flush Constraint displays components engaged in a flush

constraint.

Flush iMate

Result

displays components engaged in a flush

iMate.

iAssembly

Factory

indicates model is an iAssembly Factory

Disabled

iAssembly

Factory

displays iAssembly Factory that is not

enabled.

Disabled

Grounded

iAssembly

Factory

displays grounded iAssembly Factory that is

not enabled.

Grounded

iAssembly

Factory

displays a grounded iAssembly Factory.

iAssembly

Member

displays component that is a member of an

iAssembly Factory.

Disabled

iAssembly

Member

displays component that is a member of an

iAssembly Factory and that is not enabled.

Disabled

Grounded

iAssembly

Member

displays grounded component that is a

member of an iAssembly Factory and that is

not enabled.

Grounded

iAssembly

Member

displays grounded component that is a

member of an iAssembly Factory.

Insert Constraint displays components engaged in an insert

constraint.

Insert iMate

Result

displays components engaged in an insert

iMate.

Level of Detail

Representation

Folder

contains the Level of Detail representations

for the assembly.

Level of Detail

Representation

activates the associated Level of Detail

representation.

Level of Detail

Representation

Excluded

indicates Level of Detail browser entry is set

to exclude.

Substitute Level

of Detail

Representation

activates the associated substitute Level of

Detail representation.

Disabled

Grounded

Substitute Level

of Detail

displays the associated grounded substitute

Level of Detail in the assembly that is not

enabled.

Invisible Level of

Detail Substitute

indicates presence of a substitute Level of

Detail with visibility turned off.

Invisible

Grounded Level

of Detail

Substitute

indicates presence of a grounded substitute

Level of Detail with visibility turned off.

Substitute Level

of Detail (LOD)

displays the associated substitute Level of

Detail (LOD) in the assembly.

Grounded

Substitute Level

of Detail

displays the associated grounded substitute

Level of Detail in the assembly.

Mate Constraint displays components engaged in a mate

constraint.

Axial Mate

Constraint

displays components engaged in a mate

constraint that includes at least one axis

Mate iMate

Result

displays components engaged in a mate

iMate.

Participant displays an assembly component that is

affected by an assembly feature.

Positional

Representation

Folder

contains the positional representations for

the assembly.

Positional

Representation

activates the associated positional

representation.

Representations

Folder

contains the view, positional, and Level of

Detail representations for an assembly.

User-defined

Folder

groups assembly nodes for better browser

organization.

Rotation

Constraint

displays components engaged in a rotational

motion constraint.

Rotation iMate

Result

displays components engaged in a rotation

iMate.

Rotation-

Translation

Constraint

displays components engaged in a

rotational-translational motion constraint.

Rotation-

Translation iMate

displays components engaged in a rotation-

translation iMate.

Translation iMate

Result

translation iMate.

Tangent

Constraint

displays components engaged in a tangent

constraint.

Tangent iMate

Result

displays components engaged in a tangent

iMate.

Translational

Constraint

displays components engaged in a

translational motion constraint.

Virtual

Component

indicates presence of virtual component.

Disabled Virtual

Component

indicates presence of virtual component that

is not enabled.

Disabled

Grounded Virtual

Component

indicates presence of grounded virtual

component that is not enabled.

Grounded Virtual

Component

indicates presence of virtual component with

all degrees of freedom removed.

Circular

Component

Pattern

displays the associated circular pattern of

the component and contains the pattern

elements.

Element displays component as an element in the

pattern.

Rectangular

Component

Pattern

displays the associated rectangular pattern

of the component and contains the pattern

elements.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Weldments

Cosmetic Weld displays graphical element representative of

a cosmetic weld.

Cosmetic Weld

with Symbol

displays graphical element representative of

a cosmetic weld with associated weld

symbol.

Weldment displays the weldment assembly. The

assembly is enabled and can be edited in-

place.

Weldment not

Enabled

displays the weldment assembly in the

background. The assembly is not enabled

and cannot be edited in-place.

Grounded

Weldment not

Enabled

displays the grounded weldment assembly in

the background. The assembly is not

enabled and cannot be edited in-place.

Grounded

Weldment

displays the grounded weldment assembly.

The assembly is enabled and can be edited

in-place

Fillet Weld displays the assembly features that

represent a fillet weld

Fillet Weld with

Symbol

displays the assembly features that

represent a fillet weld with associated weld

symbol.

Groove Weld displays the assembly features that

represent a groove weld

Groove Weld with

Symbol

displays the assembly features that

represent a groove weld with associated

weld symbol.

Machining displays assembly features that represent

the post-weld machining and finishing. Valid

assembly features for machining include

chamfers, extrude cuts, and holes.

Preparations displays assembly features (chamfers,

extrude cut, and holes) used to remove

extrude cut, and holes) used to remove

material to prepare the model for welding.

Weld Symbol displays the weld and associated symbol.

Welds displays assembly features that represent

the actual weld. Assembly weld bead

features can be cosmetic welds or solid fillet

or groove welds and can only reside in the

Welds feature group. The Beads folder is

located in the Welds feature group. It

contains all consumed and unconsumed

weld bead features. Right-click to select

options to sort beads by All Beads,

Consumed Beads Only, or Unconsumed

Beads Only.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Drawing

AutoCAD Block

Folder

contains the AutoCAD blocks.

AutoCAD Block displays the AutoCAD block instance.

AutoCAD Model contains the model definition for the

AutoCAD DWG file opened in Inventor.

Assembly displays and provides access to the

assembly in the drawing view.

Auxiliary View

Shortcut

indicates auxiliary view placed on a sheet

different than the parent view. Use the

shortcut and go to the auxiliary view sheet.

Auxiliary View indicates a view projected from an edge or a

line in a base view.

Border Folder contains border formats.

Border provides access to format and insert a sheet

border.

Sheet Border provides access to delete the current sheet

border.

Break Out indicates material was removed from an

existing view to expose obscured parts or

features.

Crop View displays view cropped from another view.

Detail View

Shortcut

indicates detail view placed on a sheet

different than the parent view. Use the

shortcut and go to the detail view sheet.

Detail View indicates a detail of a specified portion of a

base view. The view is created without an

alignment to the base view, but can be

attached to the base view.

AutoCAD Drawing indicates the drawing is an AutoCAD DWG

file. View, plot and measure the file

contents in Inventor.

Drawing displays drawing file.

Draft View displays a view that contains one or more

associated sketches. The draft view does not

contain a representation of a 3D model.

Drawing

Resources

contains resources that are used to add and

set up new drawing sheets.

User-defined

Symbols Folder

groups symbols for better browser

organization.

Field Text provides access to drawing property fields.

General Table displays and provides access to the

associated general table.

Hole Table displays and provides access to the

associated hole table.

Sketch Symbol displays the associated non-static sketch

symbol on the drawing sheet.

Overlay View uses a positional representation to show an

assembly in different positions in a single

view.

Parts List displays and provides access to the

associated parts list.

Part displays and provides access to the part in

the drawing view.

Projected View

Shortcut

indicates projected view placed on a sheet

different than the parent view. Use the

shortcut and go to the projected view sheet.

Projected View indicates a first-angle or third-angle

projection of a base view, depending on the

drafting standard.

Revision Table displays and provides access to the

associated revision table.

Section View

Shortcut

indicates section view placed on a sheet

different than the parent view. Use the

shortcut and go to the section view sheet.

Section View indicates a full, half, offset, partial, or

aligned section view from a specified base

view.

Sheet Format

Folder

contains sheet formats.

Sheet displays and provides access to edit the

associated sheet.

Sheet Sketch displays and provides access to the

associated sheet sketch.

Sketched Symbol

Folder

contains sketch symbols.

Sketch Symbol

Template

provides access to associated sketch symbol

definition.

Slice indicates a zero-depth section or "slice"

from an existing view.

Static Sketched

Symbol

displays the associated static sketched

symbol on the drawing sheet.

Title Block Folder contains title block formats.

Title Block provides access to edit the associated title

block.

Shortcut to Base

View

indicates the views were created as

dependent views on a different sheet. Use

the shortcut and go to the parent view

sheet.

Independent

View

indicates the first placed view in a new

drawing or a view independent of existing

drawing views.

"Drawing Attached indicates a detail view pinned to another

view.

Updates Deferred indicates the drawing file is in a deferred

state.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Presentation

Presentation denotes top node of a presentation file.

Part displays a part.

Sequence displays tweaks and associated components.

Task contains one or more sequences.

Tweak Rotation displays rotational tweaks and associated

components.

Tweak

Translation

displays translational tweaks and associated

components.

Explosion contains presentation features for the active

view.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

State

Adaptive Error indicates a cross-part projection failure.

Adaptive Warning indicates a minor problem with the adaptive

relationship.

Analysis Invisible indicates that the analysis visibility is off.

Active indicates that the associated item is active.

Examples include active analysis, active

design view, and active positional

representation.

Contact Set indicates component is included in the

contact set.

Contact Set Error indicates a serious problem with the contact

set.

Contact Set

Warning

indicates a minor problem with the contact

set.

Adaptive indicates an adaptive part or feature.

Excluded indicates associated component has been set

to exclude.

Healthy indicates no errors are present relative to

the associated browser entry.

Unresolved File indicates that a file link is unresolved.

Update Required indicates associated entry in the browser is

outdated.

Warning indicates a minor problem. Hover over the

icon for additional information.

Error indicates a serious problem. Hover over the

icon for additional information.

Flexible indicates a flexible assembly or sketch

block.

Automatic Solve indicates a design accelerator component is

in automatic update mode.

Positional

Variation Sick

indicates the positional variation is unable to

resolve.

Manual Mode

Updated

indicates a design accelerator component is

in manual update mode and is up-to-date.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Substitute

Substitute Part displays part designated as a substitute.

Manual update of part required to reflect

changes made to external references.

Substitute Sheet

Metal Part

displays sheet metal part designated as a

substitute. Manual update of part required

to reflect changes made to external

references.

Substitute

Surface Part

displays surface part designated as a

substitute. Manual update of part required

to reflect changes made to external

references.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Analysis

Cross Section

Analysis

indicates a cross section analysis has been

performed. Activate the analysis to view the

results.

Curvature

Analysis

indicates a curvature analysis has been

performed. Activate the analysis to view the

results.

Draft Analysis indicates a draft analysis has been

performed. Activate the analysis to view the

results.

Surface Analysis indicates a Gaussian curvature analysis has

been performed. Activate the analysis to

view the results.

Zebra Analysis indicates a surface continuity analysis has

been performed. Activate the analysis to

view the results.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Notebook

Notebook View displays a view associated with a note in the

engineer's notebook.

Engineer's

Notebook

indicates presence of an engineer's

notebook associated with the part.

Note contains comments and views in the

engineer's notebook.

Comment displays a comment associated with a note

in the engineer's notebook.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Application

OLE Folder contains files linked or embedded in an

Inventor model or drawing.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals >

Basic 3D Workflow

Topics in this section

3D modeling concepts

DWG geometry workflow

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Basic 3D Workflow >

3D modeling concepts

3D Animation

You can develop, play, and record animations of exploded views to show the

order and path of tweaks in a complex assembly. Use it to show a detailed

presentation of the prototype or the finished product being designed.

Show Me how to animate a presentation view

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Basic 3D Workflow >

DWG geometry workflow

Using DWG Geometry Workflow

When starting a design using existing DWG geometry, the workflow is as follows:

1. Create a part.

2. Create a drawing of the part.

3. Put parts together into an assembly.

4. Create an assembly drawing.

To create a part using DWG geometry, first import your DWG geometry into an

Autodesk Inventor part sketch. The following tutorials each start with the same

DWG file to create part features. The final tutorial creates a part within an

assembly, and then shows how to place the previously created parts into position

in the assembly.

1. Create a part.

2. Create a drawing of the part.

What is the workflow for using DWG geometry?

Using DWG Tutorial 1 - Create a panel for an electrical box

Using DWG Tutorial 2 - Create a door for an electrical box

Using DWG Tutorial 3 - Create a box and assemble with the panel and

door

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals >

Transition from 2D

Topics in this section

Basic foundations

Use your AutoCAD geometry

AutoCAD terms

More concepts

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D >

Basic foundations

Topics in this section

2D to 3D Comparison

Keystroke Reference

Autodesk Inventor file types

Dimension Commands

Geometry Creation Commands

Geometry Editing Commands

Insert commands

View Commands

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

2D to 3D Comparison

Geometry driven vs. dimension driven design

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor

You create geometry and then

place dimensions. When you

change existing geometry,

associated dimensions update.

You sketch a part and then

control the exact size and shape

by changing the dimension

values. To change the length or

height, you change the dimension

values. You manage change

within that sketch by modifying

the dimension values rather than

modifying the geometry.

UCS icon vs. 3D indicator

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor

The UCS icon helps you visualize

the orientation of the drawing

plane. It provides a movable

coordinate system for coordinate

entry, planes of operation, and

viewing. Most AutoCAD geometric

editing commands are dependent

on the location and orientation of

the UCS. Objects are drawn on

the XY plane of the current UCS.

A 3D indicator represents the X,

Y, and Z axes. The red arrow

indicates the X direction; green

indicates Y; and blue indicates Z.

However, you do not need to rely

on the 3D Indicator much, and

you do not need to define snap

and grid settings or origin points.

You do not need to use

coordinates when you draw.

Constraints

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor

You do not use constraints or

create relationships between

primitives-based models.

Changing one primitive has no

impact on another primitive.

When you have components to

assemble, you place constraints

or "rules" on those components

to restrict their movement.

Autodesk Inventor has six

impact on another primitive. Autodesk Inventor has six

different 3D assembly constraints

that determine how components

in your assembly fit together and

how they move: Mate, Angle,

Tangent, Insert, Rotation, and

Rotation-translation.

File types

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor

You work with one file type:

DWG. This DWG file contains

paper space, model space, 2D,

and 3D. You cannot separate

your model from your drawing,

or work separately in 3D. All

components of your work exist in

the same file.

You work with a minimum of four

file types. Multiple file types are

advantageous because you can

work separately on a part, an

assembly, or in a drawing file.

Multiple users can work on the

same design at the same time.

Any changes associate and

update in all other files.

Dimensions

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor

To dimension in AutoCAD, you

add measurement annotations to

a drawing. You place these

dimensions on a layer. Basic

dimensions in AutoCAD include

linear, radial, angular, ordinate,

and arc length. You can also

create dimensions that are

associative, nonassociative, or

exploded.

You can place dimensions on

layers when used with drawings.

There are four basic dimension

types that are used differently as

you design: model dimensions,

reference dimensions, sketch

dimensions, and drawing

dimensions.

Views

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor

For each drawing, create each

individual view of your model. It

can be tedious if you have more

You can automatically generate

all the projected views for a

model, including section,

than one view. auxiliary, and broken views.

Boolean operations

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor

You have specific commands to

create Boolean operations

between different solids (union,

subtract, intersect).

You place the parts in an

assembly, and then derive the

assembly into a single part, while

applying the Boolean operation of

your choice.

Reuse of data and external files

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor

To avoid file bloat and reuse

recurring data like library

elements or standard parts, you

typically use blocks. Write them

out to a file (WBLOCK), and

reuse them as external

references (XREFS).

You typically set up a project file

with a library path and place

existing part files and standard

files in an assembly. Autodesk

Inventor assemblies, by design,

store little data into the assembly

file. Most of the data is stored in

the external part files.

Scale and mirror

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor

There are specific scale and

mirror commands that work on

both 2D and 3D geometry.

The scale and mirror commands

work on 2D geometry. To scale

or mirror a single 3D part, you

derive the part. You can also

mirror individual features or the

entire 3D part without using the

Derive command.

Selection and grips

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor

You can window select both

2D/3D geometry and use grips to

stretch, move, rotate, mirror,

and scale.

You can window select 2D

geometry and select vertices and

segments to move and stretch

geometry. To select 3D geometry

and scale. geometry. To select 3D geometry

you use the "Component

selection" command. Because

Autodesk Inventor has a model

browser, alternatively, you can

select parts in the browser. For

operations like rotate, use the

dedicated command.

Styles and layers

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor

You have access to layers, text

styles, and dimension styles

throughout the product.

Text styles, dimension styles,

and layers are available in the

drawing environment. Color and

light styles are available in parts,

assemblies, and presentations.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

Keystroke Reference

Note The following applies only when default multi-character Command Aliasesare loaded. See Customize - Keyboard tab for information on how to enable ordisable default multi-character Command Aliases.

Autodesk Inventor has many predefined shortcut keys and command aliases. Youcan also define your own custom shortcut keys and command aliases. A commandalias is an alphanumeric character or character sequence that can be used tostart a command. A shortcut can be defined using any of the following keys orkey combinations:

A punctuation key (including ` - = [ ] \ ; ' , . /), or one of the followingkeys: Home, End, Page Up, Page Down, Up Arrow, Down Arrow.

A combination of the Shift key along with a numeric key (0-9),punctuation key, or one of the following keys: Home, End, Page Up,Page Down, Up Arrow, Down Arrow.

Any combination of Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys along with an alphanumericcharacter.

Other keys, including function can have reserved shortcuts assigned to them, butthese keys are not user-definable.

Using the defined key, combination of keys, or character sequence, you can starta command like an AutoCAD command alias. The following table represents asubset of the more shortcut keys and command aliases which are predefined inAutodesk Inventor 2010. You can see all predefined shortcut keys and commandaliases by selecting Tools tab Options panel Customize and clicking theKeyboard tab.

Warning: The following table does not apply if other definitions are imported, orthe Autodesk Inventor 2010 definitions are edited.

Note Some shortcut keys and command aliases are only active in specificenvironments.

Key Name Function Category

F1 Help Help for the

active

command or

dialog box.

Global

F2 Pan Pans the

graphics

window.

Global

F3 Zoom Zooms in or

out in the

graphics

window.

Global

F4 Rotate Rotates

objects in the

graphics

window.

Global

F5 Previous View Returns to

the previous

view.

Global

F6 Isometric

View

Display the

isometric

view of the

model.

Global

F7 Slice Graphics Partially slice

away the

model to

reveal the

sketch plane.

Sketch

F8 Show All

Constraints

Display all

constraints.

Sketch

F9 Hide All

Constraints

Hide All

Constraints.

Sketch

Esc Quit Quits a

command.

Global

Delete Delete Deletes

selected

objects.

Global

Alt + drag

mouse

In

assemblies,

applies a

mate

constraint. In

a sketch,

moves spline

shape points.

Assembly

Ctrl + Y Redo Activates

Redo

(revokes the

last Undo).

Global

Ctrl + Z Undo In the active

Line

command,

removes the

last sketched

segment.

Global

Shift + right

mouse click

Activates the

Select

command

menu.

Global

Shift +

Rotate

Automatically

rotates model

in graphics

window. Click

to quit.

Global

B Balloon Activates the

Balloon

command.

Drawing

BDA Baseline

Dimension

Set

Activates the

Baseline

Dimension

Set

command.

Drawing

C Center point

circle

To draw a

circle.

Sketch

C Constraint Activates the

Constraint

command.

Assembly

CH Chamfer Create a

chamfer

Part /Assembly

CP Circular

Pattern

Creates

circular

pattern of

sketch

geometry.

2D Sketch

D General

Dimension

Activates the

General

Sketch / Drawing

Dimension General

Dimension

command.

D Face Draft Creates a

face draft /

taper.

Part

E Extrude Activates the

Extrude

command.

Part

F Fillet Creates a

fillet.

Part /Assembly

FC Feature

Control

Frame

Activates the

Feature

Control

Frame

command.

Drawing

H Hole Activates the

Hole

command.

Part /Assembly

L Line Activates the

Line

command

Sketch

LE Leader Text Creates a

leader text

Drawing

LO Loft Creates a loft

feature.

Part

M Move

Component

Activates the

Move

Component

command.

Assembly

MI Mirror Creates a

mirror

feature.

Part /Assembly

N Create

Component

Activates the

Create

Component

command.

Assembly

ODS Ordinate

Dimension

Set

Activates the

Ordinate

Dimension

Sketch

Set Dimension

Set

command.

P Place

Component

Activates the

Place

Component

command.

Assembly

Q Create iMate Activates the

Create iMate

command.

Assembly

R Revolve Activates the

Revolve

command.

Part /Assembly

RO Rotate

Component

Activates the

Rotate

Component

command.

Assembly

RP Rectangular

Pattern

Creates

rectangular

pattern of

feature or

sketch

geometry.

Part /2D Sketch

S 2D Sketch Activates the

2D Sketch

command.

2D

Sketch/Part/Assembly

S3 3D Sketch Activates the

3D Sketch

command.

Part

SW Sweep Creates a

sweep

feature.

Part /Assembly

T Text Activates the

Text

command.

Sketch/Drawing

T Tweak

Components

Activates the

Tweak

Components

command.

Presentation

TR Trim Activates the

Trim

command.

Sketch

] Work Plane Creates a

work plane.

Global

/ Work Axis Creates a

work axis.

Global

. Work Point Creates a

work point.

Global

; Grounded

Work Point

Creates a

grounded

work point.

Global

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

Autodesk Inventor file types

Unlike AutoCAD and Mechanical Desktop, which maintain one file with multiple

types of data, Autodesk Inventor maintains data in multiple associated files.

3D part model data is contained in a file with the extension .ipt.

3D assembly model data is contained in a file with the extension .iam.

2D drawing data is contained in a file with the extension .idw, .dwg.

Autodesk Inventor also maintains:

Presentation files (.ipn), that contain definitions for exploded assemblies

and specialized assembly views.

iFeature files (.ide) that contain iFeatures definitions

Related files are associated to each other. When you change a file, its dependent

files are updated. For example, when you change an assembly, drawing views and

presentations of that assembly update automatically.

You can translate the following file types (See Access files from other CAD

systems):

.prt, .asm, .g, .neu (Pro/ENGINEER)

.x_t, .x_b (Parasolid)

.prt, .sldprt, .asm, .sldasm (SolidWorks)

.prt (UGS NX)

.dwg (AutoCAD)

.dxf

.iges

.sat

.step

Note You can translate or open an AutoCAD DWG file. You can only open an

Autodesk Inventor DWG file (.dwg).

Note on opening DWG files

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

Dimension Commands

Many AutoCAD commands are equivalent to commands in Autodesk Inventor.

Autodesk Inventor has additional commands that have no equivalent in AutoCAD.

In AutoCAD, you create 2D geometries to the required dimensions. In Autodesk

Inventor, the dimensions drive the geometry parametrically.

Several commands in Autodesk Inventor combine the functionality of multiple

single commands in AutoCAD. The General Dimension command creates a linear

dimension when you select one or two elements, a diameter dimension when you

select a circle, and a radius dimension when you select an arc. This command

replaces several single-purpose AutoCAD commands.

This table shows AutoCAD Dimension commands and the corresponding Autodesk

Inventor Dimension commands in 2D Sketch environment.

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Linear Dimension General Dimension

Aligned Dimension General Dimension

Radius Dimension General Dimension

Diameter Dimension General Dimension

Angular Dimension General Dimension

Edit Dimension Double-click the

dimension

In addition, some AutoCAD Dimension commands have corresponding Autodesk

Inventor commands that can only be used when dimensioning in a drawing file

(IDW or DWG).

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Baseline Dimension Baseline Dimension

Continue Dimension General Dimension

Ordinate Dimension Ordinate Dimension

Quick Dimension Baseline Dimension Set

Ordinate Dimension Set

Quick Leader Leader Text

Tolerance Dimension Feature Control Frame

Center Mark Center Mark

Note on opening DWG files

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

Geometry Creation Commands

In AutoCAD, you usually create 2D geometry to the precise size required. While

creating sketches for part features in Autodesk Inventor, you often use 2D Sketch

commands to create geometry quickly (with no regard to size). You then control

the precise size and position by adding dimensional and geometric constraints.

This table compares AutoCAD Drawing commands to the corresponding Autodesk

Inventor Sketch commands.

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Line Line

Polyline Line

Polygon Polygon

Rectangle Two point rectangle

Arc Three point arc

Circle Center point circle

Spline Spline

Ellipse Ellipse

Point Point, Center Point

In addition, some AutoCAD Drawing commands have corresponding Autodesk

Inventor commands that can only be used when drawing a 2D sketch in a drawing

file (IDW or DWG).

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Hatch Fill, Hatch Sketch Region

Text Text

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

Geometry Editing Commands

Note on opening DWG files

You edit the 2D sketches in Autodesk Inventor using the 2D editing commands to

update their 3D parts. You can also find a group of 3D editing commands to

modify 3D parts.

This table compares AutoCAD Editing commands to their corresponding Autodesk

Inventor 2D Editing commands.

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Erase Delete key

Copy Ctrl+C

Mirror Mirror

Offset Offset

Array Circular pattern

Rectangular pattern

Move Move

Rotate Rotate

Trim Trim

Extend Extend

Chamfer Chamfer

Fillet Fillet

Edit spline Select a fit point and drag

Note Use the Move and Rotate commands in Autodesk Inventor to copy at the

same time.

In addition, some AutoCAD Editing commands have corresponding Autodesk

Inventor commands that can only be used when modifying a 2D sketch in a

drawing file (IDW).

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Edit Hatch Right-click and select

Modify Hatch

Edit Text Right-click and select Edit

text

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

Insert commands

The following file types can be imported into an open Autodesk Inventor file using

the appropriate Insert command:

1. 2D DWG and DXF files can be used in Autodesk Inventor sketches to

create features:

On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Insert panel ACAD

Note By default, geometry imported using the Insert AutoCAD File

command has the endpoint constrained. Disable this option as required.

2. 3D DWG and DXF files can be used in Autodesk Inventor 3D sketches

to create features:

In part (.ipt) files: On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Insert

panel ACAD.

Note By default, geometry imported using the Insert AutoCAD File

command has the endpoint constrained. Enabling this option slows

down performance.

3. From a Part file, click Manage tab Insert panel Import to import

SAT and IGES files into Autodesk Inventor files.

4. Image files can be imported into Autodesk Inventor files by clicking

Sketch tab Insert panel Image.

5. OLE Objects can be imported into Autodesk Inventor files by clicking

Manage tab Insert panel Insert Object.

This table compares AutoCAD Insert commands to the corresponding Autodesk

Inventor Insert commands.

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Attach Image Ribbon: Sketch tab

Insert panel Image

Import Ribbon: Manage tab

Insert panel Import

(.iges and .sat)

OLE Object Ribbon: Manage tab

Insert panel Insert

Object

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

View Commands

The mouse scroll direction for real-time zoom in AutoCAD is opposite to Autodesk

Inventor by default.

To reverse the mouse scroll direction to be the same as in Autodesk Inventor

when using real-time zoom in AutoCAD, set the system variable Zoomwheel to

the value 1 (default value: 0).

This table compares AutoCAD View commands to their corresponding Autodesk

Inventor View commands.

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Pan Real-time Pan

Zoom Real-time Zoom

Zoom Window Zoom Window

Zoom All Zoom All

Zoom Previous F5 key

Free Orbit Free Orbit

Continuous Orbit Shift + Free orbit

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D >

Use your AutoCAD geometry

File Open Options

When you select a .dwg file that does not contain Autodesk Inventor data in the

Open dialog box, you can:

Open the file directly in Autodesk Inventor

Import the file

Access: In the Open dialog box, select the .dwg file that does

not contain Autodesk Inventor data, and then click Options.

Note Once a .dwg file contains Autodesk Inventor data, you can no longer import

the file into Autodesk Inventor. The file can only be opened as an Autodesk

Inventor drawing (.dwg).

Drawing Settings

Open Opens the file with full visual fidelity. All

Autodesk Inventor data creation commands are

available.

Import Imports and translates AutoCAD data into

Autodesk Inventor.

Use the Application Options to specify a default value:

Click Tools tab Options panel Application Options and select the

Drawing Tab.

The Non-Autodesk Inventor DWG options control the default value for

the File Open Options dialog box. Select Open or Import.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D >

AutoCAD terms

Here is a list of common terms and command names used in AutoCAD with links

to the Help topic in Inventor.

AutoCAD term Inventor term Help topic link

Array (rectangular

and polar)

Pattern (sketch)

Pattern (feature)

Pattern

(component)

Pattern (sketch)

Pattern (feature)

Pattern (component)

Background Scene styles Scene styles

Block Sketch block Sketch blocks

Break Split Split

DesignCenter Content Center Content Center Environment

Dimension General Dimension

Drawing dimensions

Parametric dimensions

Dimensions in drawings

Distance Measure Measure

Erase Delete Delete a sketch

eTransmit Pack and Go Package files

Fields iProperties iProperties

Helix Coil Coil features

Layout Sheet Add or edit a sheet

LightList Lighting styles Lighting styles

Materials Color styles Color styles

Mleader Leader Add a note with a leader

Object snap Constraints Plan constraints

Options Application options

Document settings

Application options

Document settings

Orbit Free orbit Free orbit

Ortho mode Constraints Plan constraints

Page setup Edit sheet Edit sheet

Plan View face View face

Plot Print Print models and drawings

Publish Multi-sheet plot Plot multiple drawing sheets

Slice Split Split faces, trim and split

solids

Style Text style Text styles

Tolerance Feature Control

Frame

Feature control frame

Viewports Drawing views Drawing views

Visual style Display mode Change the display mode

Workspace Environment Environments

Zoom object Zoom selected Zoom selected

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D >

More concepts

Promote drawing dimensions

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

Where is my Command Line?

Autodesk Inventor does not have a specific area of the user interface that is an

exact parallel to the command line in AutoCAD. Autodesk Inventor does provide a

means of accessing product functionality through keyboard shortcuts and

command aliases.

Like most Microsoft Windows-based products, Autodesk Inventor provides

keyboard access to menus and command functions. These shortcuts are indicated

on menus with underlined or with a letter within brackets while a command

tooltip is displayed

User-defined command aliases provide a command line-like ability without an

area of the interface being dedicated to command entry. Type a command alias

at any time the command is valid. Autodesk Inventor provides a list of possible

commands that match the letters you type (until the command is unique or until

you select from the list). A set of predefined command aliases is delivered with

Autodesk Inventor and you can extend them with aliases more suited to your

particular workflow needs.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

What is the Difference BetweenDrawing and Modeling?

Modeling three-dimensional solid features often begins with creating a two-

dimensional sketch that defines a portion of the shape of your part. Sketching

involves the creation of lines, arcs, circles, and dimensions. They are familiar

steps to anyone who has created a drawing in a CAD product. Autodesk Inventor's

sketch commands look and feel like the two-dimensional geometry commands you

used previously. Autodesk Inventor sketch geometry captures relationship

information as it is being created. The key difference is that these relationships

(or constraints) make the inevitable editing process much easier and more

predictable when they are applied correctly.

In the 2D design world, it is possible to create geometry in any sequence because

you are responsible for tracking the meaning of the geometry. The 3D modeling

sequence resembles the creation of the physical part and the creation of one

feature usually depends on a previous feature. This feature hierarchy allows the

computer to track the meaning of the geometry. For example, when creating a

2D drawing, first create a circle that represents a hole followed by a rectangle

that represents the stock in which the hole is placed. This sequence does not

work while modeling in 3D because to place the hole, you must first have a model

into which you plan to place the hole.

Assembly designs are often started using a technique called top-down design (or

skeletal modeling). You can begin the solid modeling process using sketches that

represent some (or all) of the parts in your assembly. Individual part models are

then created using geometry from a single sketch in the context of the assembly

model. Assembly models are also frequently created using a bottom-up approach

in which previously created part models are placed together to represent the final

assembly.

When the addition of features (or components) to your model is complete, it is

time to create the traditional three view drawing. Views of your model are

arranged on your drawing sheet. Because you have a solid representation of your

model the system knows which edges to display as solid or dotted in each of your

drawing views. Dimensions in your drawing can be manually applied. You can also

import the dimensions you placed on your model sketches and use them in the

appropriate drawing view. Because the drawing uses placed views of your model

any changes that you make to your models are automatically reflected in your

updated drawings.

Other tools allow you to take advantage of the power of your computer while

assisting you with the functional aspects of your design. These tools allow you to

verify the engineering integrity of: bolted connections, shafts, gear train designs,

bearing life, springs, and structural loads all using three-dimensional models and

design parameters unique to your design.

Both the drawing and modeling approaches to design result in a familiar

engineering drawing. In the 2D approach, the drawing captures the physical

information needed to create the part. In the solid modeling approach, the

drawing is one of several uses for the created model.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

What are constraints?

The dictionary defines a constraint as being a restricted or confined state within

prescribed bounds. Autodesk Inventor uses constraints in two primary ways:

To control geometry within sketches.

To establish relationships between components placed within assembly

models.

The idea that geometry within Autodesk Inventor behaves differently depending

on the constraints that were applied is one that often hinders new users

transitioning from a 2D drawing application.

Within Autodesk Inventor's 2D sketch environment constraints are inferred

between lines, arcs and other geometry while the geometry is being created.

Constraints can also be manually applied to alter the relationships between

geometry after the sketch geometry exists. These geometric constraints allow the

subsequent editing of the sketch with predictable results. For example, dragging

the endpoint of a line that is constrained to be perpendicular to another line does

not change the perpendicularity.

Within Autodesk Inventor's assembly environment, features of one component can

have relationships to features on other components. These relationships

determine the position (and sometimes the size) of each component. For

example, mating the bottom of a box to the top of a table ensures that the

bottom face of the box remains in contact with the plane representing the top of

the table.

Show Me an introduction to constraints

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

What happens to AutoCAD layers inAutodesk Inventor?

AutoCAD Drawings (.dwg) imported into Autodesk Inventor

AutoCAD Drawings (.dwg) and Autodesk Inventor Drawings (.dwg)

opened in Autodesk Inventor

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

How do fonts and text work inAutodesk Inventor?

Autodesk Inventor uses the same Microsoft Windows and TrueType fonts used by

most Windows-based programs. When you translate 2D data from a DWG file,

you can map the fonts in the DWG file to the fonts used by Autodesk Inventor.

Note If you do not require AutoCAD objects translated into Autodesk Inventor

objects, you can directly open any AutoCAD DWG (.dwg) file in Autodesk

Inventor, and then view, plot, and measure the file contents. Objects display

exactly as they do in AutoCAD. In addition, all the AutoCAD data is selectable for

Copy/Paste so you can open an AutoCAD DWG file in Autodesk Inventor, and then

copy and paste AutoCAD entities into an Autodesk Inventor sketch.

Mapping fonts

Text styles

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

What happens to AutoCAD blocks inAutodesk Inventor?

AutoCAD Drawings (.dwg) imported into Autodesk Inventor

AutoCAD Drawings (.dwg) and Autodesk Inventor Drawings (.dwg)

opened in Autodesk Inventor

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

Decide which file type to use fortranslating DWG data

In Autodesk Inventor, data is stored in multiple files with different file types.

When you translate data from AutoCAD or Mechanical Desktop, choose the

destination file type based on the type of data you are translating and how you

use it.

To produce a manufacturing drawing without an associated 3D or model

file, translate the AutoCAD data to an Autodesk Inventor drawing file

(.idw). You can create a drawing file or add the data to a sketch in the

active drawing.

To use 2D data to build a part model, translate the AutoCAD file to an

Autodesk Inventor part model (.ipt). You can create a part file or add

the data to a sketch in the active part.

When you translate AutoCAD 3D solids, they become ShapeManager

solid bodies in an Autodesk Inventor model file. When there are multiple

solids, the translator creates an Autodesk Inventor part file (.ipt) for

each body and an assembly file (.iam) with references to each part.

To use AutoCAD title blocks, borders, or blocks to develop templates in

Autodesk Inventor, use the import settings to place the translated data

in a new drawing file (.idw).

Note on opening DWG files

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

How do Autodesk Inventor dimensionswork?

Promote drawing dimensions

When you import AutoCAD data into a drawing, dimensions are placed on the

drawing sheet as drawing dimensions. The geometry is placed on a sketch

associated to a draft view. You can promote the dimensions to the sketch and

use them to control the size of the geometry parametrically.

1. Click Open.

2. Select an AutoCAD file and click Open.

3. Click Options and select Next.

4. In the Layers and Objects Import Options dialog box, select Next.

5. In the Import Destination dialog box, select Promote Dimensions to

Sketch.

You can also promote the dimensions to sketch dimensions after importing an

AutoCAD file.

1. Select the dimensions to promote.

2. Right-click and select Promote to Sketch from the menu.

After a dimension is promoted, it behaves the same way as any sketch dimension.

You can edit it or change its format and display.

Note on opening DWG files

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

What happens to Mechanical Desktopmaterials?

When you translate 3D data in a Mechanical Desktop file to Autodesk Inventor

parts and assemblies, the material data for the translated parts is added to the

part files.

In Autodesk Inventor, material data is defined by the material format assigned to

the part. Usually, the template used to create parts contains multiple materials

formats and you select the material when creating a part.

You can specify a template to use when translating a Mechanical Desktop part.

If the part template you use contains a material format with the same

name as the Mechanical Desktop material, the Autodesk Inventor

material format is applied to the translated part.

If the part template does not contain a matching material format, the

translator adds a format to the translated part and uses the material

data from the Mechanical Desktop file to define the new material format.

After the file is translated, the material format can be edited and used in the

same way as a format created in Autodesk Inventor.

To change the definition of a material in Autodesk Inventor, use the

settings in the Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles

Editor dialog box.

To view the material assignment and other physical properties of the

part, click iProperties and select the Physical Properties tab.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

Numeric units in translated DWG data

Note on opening DWG files

Since AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor have different options for numeric formats,

some attributes are converted when dimensions are translated.

Unit styles Autodesk Inventor provides a decimal and a

fractional unit style. Scientific, decimal,

engineering, and Windows Desktop styles are

mapped to Autodesk Inventor decimal style.

Fraction and architectural are mapped to

Autodesk Inventor fractional style.

Rounding

precision

The greatest level of rounding precision in

Autodesk Inventor is 1/128. All AutoCAD data

with greater precision is converted to 1/128, and

a warning message is displayed.

Decimal

precision

If the precision of translated dimensions is

greater than available in Autodesk Inventor, the

dimensions are converted to the maximum

allowed precision, and a warning message is

displayed.

Zero

suppression

Autodesk Inventor has a single setting for leading

and trailing zeros in linear and angular

dimensions. If settings in the translated

dimensions are different, Autodesk Inventor uses

the setting for linear dimensions.

Decimal

separator

If translated dimensions use a space as the

decimal separator, the space is changed to a

decimal point.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

Open/Save DWG Data vs.Import/Export

The following options are available when you are working with DWG files:

You can directly open a DWG file, and the AutoCAD data remains

AutoCAD data in Autodesk Inventor.

You can save a file as an Autodesk Inventor drawing (.dwg) and the

AutoCAD data is saved as AutoCAD data.

You can import a .dwg file. The AutoCAD data is translated into

Autodesk Inventor data.

You can export a .dwg file. The Autodesk Inventor data is translated into

AutoCAD data.

Open/Save as Use the Open command to open AutoCAD (.dwg)

data directly in Autodesk Inventor. When you

open an AutoCAD DWG (.dwg) file in Autodesk

Inventor, AutoCAD data remains as AutoCAD

data. You can then view, plot, and measure the

file contents. Objects display exactly as they do

in AutoCAD. In addition, all the AutoCAD data is

selectable for copy and paste. You can open an

AutoCAD DWG file in Autodesk Inventor, and

then copy and paste AutoCAD entities into any

Autodesk Inventor sketch.

You can save an Autodesk Inventor drawings

natively in DWG format without translation.

Autodesk Inventor drawing data remains

associative to the model. When opening the file

in AutoCAD the Autodesk Inventor drawing data

looks just like it does in Autodesk Inventor. You

can view, plot, measure and minimally edit the

Autodesk Inventor drawing data in AutoCAD.

Portions of the Autodesk Inventor data are

reusable in AutoCAD as blocks.

Open AutoCAD DWG files directly to view, plot,

or measure native AutoCAD data in Autodesk

or measure native AutoCAD data in Autodesk

Inventor or when you want to translate

(copy/paste) AutoCAD data selectively into an

Autodesk Inventor sketch.

Use Autodesk Inventor's native DWG format if

you must have Autodesk Inventor drawing files

that can be viewed, plotted, or measured in

AutoCAD and remain associative to the Autodesk

Inventor model data.

Import/Export When you import an AutoCAD DWG file into

Autodesk Inventor the AutoCAD data is translated

into an Autodesk Inventor part or drawing file,

based on your import settings. The original

AutoCAD file is left intact and unchanged.

When you export an Autodesk Inventor file into

AutoCAD DWG, the Autodesk Inventor data is

translated into AutoCAD objects in a new DWG

file. Translated AutoCAD data is not associative

back to the Autodesk Inventor model, but the

AutoCAD data is fully editable in AutoCAD.

Use import or export if you need fully editable

data in AutoCAD or Autodesk Inventor.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

How does Autodesk Inventor handlemodel space and paper space?

To import an existing DWG file that contains information separated by AutoCAD in

both model and paper space, first determine how you plan to use that data in

Autodesk Inventor. There are options so you can directly open existing DWG files

within Autodesk Inventor and you can select geometry for import to use within an

Autodesk Inventor sketch.

AutoCAD Drawing (.dwg) and Autodesk Inventor Drawing (.dwg) files

Model space displays data exactly as it displays in AutoCAD. Model space is a

read-only environment in Autodesk Inventor and is accessed in the browser. You

can change the background color and perform all viewing functions, including

rotate. You can select objects in model space for use with copy/paste and the

measuring commands.

Paper space layouts are displayed as sheets in Autodesk Inventor. AutoCAD data

can be viewed, plotted, and measured, and is selectable for delete and

copy/paste. All Autodesk Inventor drawing commands are available in

sheets/layouts. You can place views and create annotations on a layout created in

AutoCAD and the Autodesk Inventor data coexists with the AutoCAD data.

While Autodesk Inventor drawing data and AutoCAD data can coexist in the same

file, some data is shared between both applications. Blocks, layers, and

sheets/layouts are editable by both AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor. Dimension

and text styles, while not equal, are synchronized such that supported changes

made in one application are duplicated in the other application.

For more information, see Working directly with DWG in Autodesk Inventor

Autodesk Inventor Part, (.ipt), Assembly (.iam) and Drawing (.idw) files

Autodesk Inventor requires separate file types for models and drawings.

Parts are .ipt files.

Assemblies are .iam files.

Drawings are .idw or .dwg files.

Exploded assembly views are saved as .ipn files and later used in a

drawing view in an IDW or DWG file.

Autodesk Inventor models are created full-scale. When creating a drawing of an

Autodesk Inventor part or assembly model, drawing views are created using a

scale factor appropriate to the drawing sheet size. It is like the AutoCAD

workflow, which uses model space to draw and paper space (layouts) to annotate

and plot.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

What about all my AutoLISP routines?

Since it was first introduced in 1986, AutoLISP has been a mainstay for users

working with AutoCAD. Autodesk Inventor utilizes Microsoft Visual Basic for

Applications (VBA) as its extensibility language. Because of the syntactical

differences between LISP and BASIC, and the database schemas and application

programming interface (API) differences between AutoCAD and Autodesk

Inventor, there is no reliable means of automatically converting AutoLISP to VBA

is practical.

Many AutoLISP routines are used to automate the creation and editing of

commonly used geometries. Autodesk Inventor provides built-in functionality for

automating the creation of features, parts, and assemblies that are used

repeatedly. While not intended to replace AutoLISP, consider the capabilities of

iFeatures, iParts, and iAssemblies in cases where they apply.

Like the AutoCAD User Community, Autodesk Inventor users have been actively

extending their productivity by creating and sharing VBA add-in applications. It is

possible that user-created solutions exist that can replace your regularly used

AutoLISP routines.

On-line Resource: Autodesk Inventor Customization message board

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals >

Transition from SolidWorks

Topics in this section

Transition from SolidWorks

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from SolidWorks >

Transition from SolidWorks

Welcome to Inventor. Here is a checklist of common terms used in SolidWorks

with links to the Help topic in Inventor.

SolidWorks term Inventor term Help topic link

Parts

Library features iParts

iAssemblies

iPart Fundamentals

iAssemblies

Library features iFeatures iFeature fundamentals

Surface

Knit trim

Sculpt Shape description

AutoLimits

Sensors

Autolimits AutoLimits

Equations Parameters Parameters in models

Properties iProperties

Physical properties

iProperties

Assemblies

Light-weight

assemblies

Speedpack

assemblies

Level of Detail

representations

Level of Detail representations

Assembly

constraints

Assembly

constraints

Assembly constraints

overview

Design Library Content Center Content Center Environment

Toolbox smart

fasteners

Bolted Connection Bolted Connection Component

Generator

Contact solver

Contact sets

Contact solver

Contact sets

Component collision and

contact

Animation

Animator

PhotoWorks

PhotoView 36

Inventor Studio Render and animate overview

Note To display the following Help topics, you must have Analysis or Routed

Systems.

Analysis

Dynamic Simulation Dynamic Simulation Frequently asked questions

(FAQ)

Stress Analysis

FEA

Stress Analysis

FEA

Stress Analysis overview

Routing

Tube & Pipe Tube & Pipe Tube and pipe fundamentals

Cable & Harness Cable & Harness Fundamentals

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals >

About Help

Topics in this section

Online Help: The Inside Track

Find the information you need

Join the Customer Involvement Program

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > About Help >

Online Help: The Inside Track

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > About Help >

Find the information you need

The Autodesk Inventor Help system is available from the Help menu, the Help

icon, or through context-sensitive links. If you are new to Inventor, use the Get

Started tab on the ribbon to learn about Inventor. Key features of the Help are:

Two Help home pages. Choose the one that fits for you. The default is

for new or experienced Inventor users. The other is for users

transitioning from AutoCAD or are new to using 3D software.

There is on-demand access from the context menu (right-click), F1

function key, menus, dialog boxes, browsers, and the menu bar.

Navigation tabs in each topic link to related procedures, references, and

concepts.

Show Me animations demonstrate how to complete a task or how to

understand a concept. Access related animations from within a Help

topic or access all the animations through the Visual Syllabus and the

Help home page.

The Help menu on the main application menu bar has many resources

to help new users learn Inventor and experienced learners to continue

learning.

What are ways to gain access to Help?

How is Help organized?

How do I get around in the Help system?

What options does Help offer?

How can I learn how to use Autodesk Inventor?

How can I use the AutoCAD-specific Help?

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > About Help >

Join the Customer InvolvementProgram

To turn the CIP on or off

1. On the InfoCenter toolbar, to the right of the Help button, click the

drop-down arrow.

2. Click Customer Involvement Program.

3. In the Customer Involvement Program dialog box, select a level of

participation.

4. Click OK.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor >

Work Environment

Topics in this section

Work environment in Autodesk Inventor

Styles and Style Libraries

Customize Autodesk Inventor

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment >

Work environment in AutodeskInventor

Topics in this section

Application Options settings

Measurement units

Components

Selection sets of components

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor >

Application Options settings

Line Weight Settings

Sets the line weight display in drawings.

Access: Choose Options. Then open the Drawing tab of the

Application Options dialog box, and click Settings.

Display true

line weights

Shows line weights on screen as they would appear

on paper. For example, regardless of

magnification, a line 0.5 inch thick is the same as

the height of 0.5-inch text.

Display line

weights by

range

(millimeter)

Shows line weights according to values you enter.

The line weight is independent from the zoom

magnification. Values range from smallest (left) to

largest (right).

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor >

Measurement units

Document Settings - Units tab

Sets the default units system and dimension precision for the active model file or

template.

Note To change the default units system applied when you create new files,

change the default units in the templates that you use to create files.

Access: Click Tools tab Options panel Document Settings

Units tab.

Units

Modeling Dimension Display

Default Parameter Input Display

Examples

Defined

Parameter

Display as value (in

edit box)

Display as

expression (in edit

box)

LENG = 1 mm + 2

mm

1 mm + 2 mm LENG = 1 mm + 2

mm

LENG = 3 mm 3 mm LENG = 3 mm

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor >

Components

Parts and subassemblies are created in part files or created in place in assembly

files. The features of components originate as sketches that can be fully or

partially dimensioned. Feature volume is specified using feature-creation

commands and supplying key values. Features can be resized by changing

dimension values or redefined by specifying different angles or termination

methods or relationships to other features.

When you edit an Autodesk Inventor component in an assembly, changes are

made to all occurrences of the component in its source file and in other

assemblies. To make a custom version of a component in only one assembly, save

the component in a part file with a new name.

In an assembly, components are positioned relative to one another with assembly

constraints. To fit components together easily, you can include work features

while creating components. For example, place a work axis on a cylinder center

and a hole center to align the components along their center axes as they will be

aligned when manufactured.

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor >

Selection sets of components

Select filters

Specifies the elements that can be selected when using the Select command filter

sets in drawings.

Access: On the Quick Access toolbar, click the arrow on the Select

command and then click Edit Select Filters.

Filter Set Specifies the Custom, Detail, or Layout, filter set to

change. Click the arrow and select the filter set from

the list.

Filters Lists the filters available for the selected filter type.

Selected filters can be selected in the drawing. Click

to add a filter or clear the check mark to omit the

filter from the set.

Select All selects the entire list and makes them

available in the drawing.

Select None clears the check mark from all filter

types.

Invert Selection toggles between selected and

unselected filters.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment >

Styles and Style Libraries

Topics in this section

Style Libraries

Transition legacy projects to a style library

Modify styles

Work with styles

Textures on parts

Styles in sheet metal parts

Styles in drawings

Dimension styles in drawings

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Style Libraries

Style Management Wizard

The Style Management Wizard is a tool for administrators to assist in batch-style

management for Autodesk Inventor files. Using the Style Management Wizard,

you can:

Harvest styles from Autodesk Inventor files and place them in a target

style library.

Purge styles from Autodesk Inventor files. Purging removes unused style

information and can be beneficial in large assemblies by reducing

required memory.

Use the Style Management Wizard when transitioning to using a style library with

your design project.

Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor

Tools Style Management Wizard.

All files must migrate to the latest version of Autodesk Inventor. Files that

are not migrated are skipped during batch processing, including assemblies

that are migrated but contain components that are not migrated.

Welcome page Describes the Harvest Styles and Purge Styles

processes.

Projects to

Manage page

Lists all defined projects by Name and Project Location.

The active project is indicated by a check mark. Its

settings for Style Library and path are summarized

below the window. Double-click to select a project and

make it active. The Style Management Wizard uses the

active project to resolve all file paths during processing.

Files to Process Selects files to process in a detailed view.

Add Specific Files button Browses to the folder that

contains the files to process. Selected files are listed by

file name, file type, and path.

Add All Files in Active Project button Lists all files by

file name, type, and path. Clear the check box to

exclude a file from processing.

Alternate methods of adding files to the list:

Drag and drop files from Microsoft Windows

Explorer. Drop them in the list to add them.

Get all files referenced by a specific file by

right-clicking the file in the process list, and

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

right-clicking the file in the process list, and

then selecting Get Referenced Files. Adds all

files that the selected file is dependent on to

the list.

Get all drawings or presentations that use

a specific file by right-clicking a file in the

process list. Select Drawings and

Presentations, and then Get All. Adds to the

process list all drawings and presentations in

the project search paths that use the specific

file.

Select

Management

Options page

Chooses a harvest or purge operation.

Harvest Styles into Target Style Library specifies the

target style library.

Use Source Project Style Library

Automatically selects the style library specified

in the project. Clear the check box of files you

want to exclude from processing.

Create a New Style Library Opens the New

Style Library dialog box. Specify to copy an

existing style library or create an empty library.

Browse to the folder where the library will be

stored, and if copying, the source style library

you are copying.

Select an Existing Style Library Lists the

Default Style Library and any project that uses

a style library. Use the Browse button to browse

to a specific library.

Purge All Unused Styles from Files automatically

deletes unused styles from selected documents. Styles

not saved to a styles library are permanently lost.

Begin Batch

Processing

Starts batch processing, using previously selected

options.

Press Pause to halt the processing temporarily or Cancel

to stop.

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Transition legacy projects to a stylelibrary

Transition to Style Libraries

By default, all pre-R9 projects migrated to Autodesk Inventor 9 or newer are set

to not use a Style Library. It insures that active projects can continue to progress

without requiring users to take Style Libraries into consideration. Most of the new

styles functionality is available without using a library.

Note While using a style library on new projects is simple, transitioning to style

libraries in the middle of a project requires careful consideration.

Use the following general procedure to create a Style Library and template set for

existing projects.

Step 1 - Collect Existing Styles

Step 2 - Optimize Styles from Legacy Versions of Autodesk Inventor

Step 3 - Create the New Style Library and Template Set

Step 4 - Set Up and Deploy the Style Library

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Modify styles

Update styles

Updates styles in the current document, and optionally, in referenced files (child

documents), to match the styles in the style library.

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Update

Click a column heading to sort contents. All columns resort to correspond with

the new order.

Document Name Shows file name in which the style is used.

Style Name Lists styles in the current document.

Type Identifies the style type.

Changed Indicates if a style was changed in the document or

library. If the style does not match the library, it is

marked Not in Library.

Update? Switches individual styles to update. If Yes, the style

in the document is updated to match the version in

the style library. If No, the current document style

definition remains in effect.

Click the Update Styles in all Child Documents check box to update styles in

referenced files. Child document file names are listed in the document name

column. Clear the check box to update styles in the parent document only. Not

available in part documents.

Click Yes to All to update all document styles to the library version or No to All

to preserve the changed styles in the current document.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Work with styles

Style and Standard Editor - Sheet Metal Unfold

Lists the sheet metal unfolding rules in the active document or global style library

(depending on the filter setting of Local or All Styles). Specifies unfolding method

(linear or bend table) as well as units, backup KFactor value and bend table

tolerances.

Access: Click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor

In the browser pane, click Sheet Metal Unfold, and then click

the sheet metal unfold style name to display the selections and

values used while unfolding in the right portion of the dialog.

Click the expand/collapse “+” to the left of the Sheet Metal Unfold entry in

the left-hand portion of the Style and Standard Editor dialog box to display the

list of existing rules. Select an existing sheet metal unfold rule to display its

option settings.

Back - return to the previously edited style. You are prompted to save the

previous edits.

New - create new styles. Select the Add to Standard check box to add to the

available styles list in the active standard style.

Save - save changes to an existing style in the current document.

Reset - return style values to the saved values.

Location Filter - show Local Styles or All Styles (from the library) in the

browser.

Unfold

Method

Dropdown selection specifies one of three unfold method

options. The option selected will determine the options,

attributes and controls that are displayed as described in

the following sections:

Linear

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Bend Table

Custom Equation

Import - use to import a material style exported from another document.

Done - after saving changes, click to dismiss the Styles and Standard Editor

dialog.

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Textures on parts

Assign custom textures to styles in shared environments

You can store custom texture .bmp files in

the Styles library. In a shared

environment, it is recommended that the

CAD administrator:

Create one Autodesk Inventor project file which allows styles to be

edited.

Create a second project file which provides a read-only Styles library.

Distribute the read-only Styles library project file to the users.

Note You can also store custom bump maps and reflection files in the surfaces

library in the Autodesk Inventor Studio environment. Refer to: Working with

custom bump maps and reflection files in a shared environment.

Example

Note The CAD administrator performs these tasks.

Step 1: Create a project file specifically for editing and defining styles.

1. Specify the location of the styles library on a shared network folder.

For example: [shared network folder]:\Inventor\Styles\.

Next, create a subfolder named Textures.

2. In the Project Editor, under Frequently Used Subfolders, add an entry

named Textures that points to [shared network

folder]:\Inventor\Styles\. It displays after editing the project editor

pane as: Textures - Workspace\Textures.

3. Copy the .bmp images to this folder.

Note All .bmp images in this folder display in the Choose Texture

dialog box, accessed from the Styles Editor.

Concept Procedure

4. Set the Folder Options, Styles Library path to .\.

5. Set Use Styles Library = Yes.

6. Save the project file.

Step 2: Assign a custom texture to a color style.

1. Open a new or existing .ipt part file.

2. On the ribbon, click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel

Styles Editor.

3. Click Color to display the current color styles.

4. Select the color style you want to assign a custom texture to. For this

example select Blue.

5. Click Choose to assign a custom texture to the Blue color style.

6. Select the Project Library option and select the textures folder.

7. Select a texture.

Note: Refer to steps 2 -3 in Step 1.

Note If you relocate the styles library folder, its subfolders and the

texture files come with it.

8. Right-click the edited color style (Blue) and select Save to Styles

Library. Repeat steps 5 - 9 to assign custom textures to other color

styles.

Step 3: Configure the read-only styles library project file for users.

1. Open the Project Editor and switch to the project file where the users

are going to work. Set the Folder Option Styles Library path to the

styles library location defined by the administrator. In the previous

example, the path specified is:[shared network

folder]:\Inventor\Styles\.

2. Under Libraries, add an entry named Styles that points to the same

folder as defined previously.

Note Enter the path in both places to provide access to the custom

textures.

3. Set the Use Styles Library = Read Only.

4. Create a Frequently Used Subfolder named Textures and set it to (for

example) [shared network folder] :Inventor\Styles\Textures. It displays

as Textures: Styles\Textures after you complete the edit step.)

5. Save and distribute the configured read-only project file to users.

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Styles in sheet metal parts

Style and Standard Editor - Sheet Metal Unfold

Lists the sheet metal unfolding rules in the active document or global style library

(depending on the filter setting of Local or All Styles). Specifies unfolding method

(linear or bend table) as well as units, backup KFactor value and bend table

tolerances.

Access: Click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor

In the browser pane, click Sheet Metal Unfold, and then click

the sheet metal unfold style name to display the selections and

values used while unfolding in the right portion of the dialog.

Click the expand/collapse “+” to the left of the Sheet Metal Unfold entry in

the left-hand portion of the Style and Standard Editor dialog box to display the

list of existing rules. Select an existing sheet metal unfold rule to display its

option settings.

Back - return to the previously edited style. You are prompted to save the

previous edits.

New - create new styles. Select the Add to Standard check box to add to the

available styles list in the active standard style.

Save - save changes to an existing style in the current document.

Reset - return style values to the saved values.

Location Filter - show Local Styles or All Styles (from the library) in the

browser.

Unfold

Method

Dropdown selection specifies one of three unfold method

options. The option selected will determine the options,

attributes and controls that are displayed as described in

the following sections:

Linear

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Bend Table

Custom Equation

Import - use to import a material style exported from another document.

Done - after saving changes, click to dismiss the Styles and Standard Editor

dialog.

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Styles in drawings

Load Line Type (LIN file)

Line Type

Definition File

Displays the location of the .lin file. Click the

browse button to locate and load a .lin file.

Available Line

Types

Displays the available line types associated with

the selected line type. Select the line type to add

or SHIFT-select to load multiple line types, and

then click OK.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Dimension styles in drawings

Precision and Tolerance

Sets the precision and tolerance attributes for hole, chamfer, or bend notes.

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles

Editor. In the Styles and Standards Editor, click to expand the

Dimension style in the browser. In the Dimension Style window,

click the Notes and Leaders tab, and then click Precision and

Tolerance. Click the More button to expand the dialog box.

To override precision and tolerance parameters for an existing

hole or chamfer note, right-click the note and then select Edit

Hole Note, Edit Chamfer Note, or Edit Bend Note. In the dialog

box, click Precision and Tolerance. Click More to expand the

dialog box.

Options depend on which note type is selected on the Units tab of the Dimension

style dialog box.

Hole notes

Chamfer notes

Bend notes

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment >

Customize Autodesk Inventor

Topics in this section

Customize work environments in Autodesk Inventor

Custom shortcut keys

Custom command aliases

Dynamic input and command alias behavior

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor >

Customize work environments inAutodesk Inventor

Document Settings - Sheet tab

Sets the default labels for sheets and sets the colors for elements on sheets in a

drawing or template.

Access: Ribbon: Tools tab Options panel Document Settings, and

then click the Sheet tab in the dialog box.

Default

Sheet

Label

Sets the default label assigned to new sheets in the drawing

browser. As a new sheet is added, the label is used with an

incremental number (for example, Sheet1, Sheet 2, Sheet3).

Click in the box and enter the label.

Colors Sets the display colors for elements of the sheet. Click a color

button to open the Color dialog box and select the color for the

associated element.

Sheet Sets the background color for the sheet. The

color of views, symbols, and other elements

does not change, so set a background color

that provides good contrast.

Sheet

Outline

Sets the outline color for the sheet.

Highlight Sets the color of highlighted elements (when

the cursor passes over them).

Selection Sets the color of selected elements.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor >

Custom shortcut keys

Customize - Keyboard tab

Add and modify custom command aliases and shortcuts.

Access: Ribbon: Tools tab Options panel Customize, and then click

the Keyboard tab.

Keyboard

Buttons

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor >

Custom command aliases

Create custom command aliases

Autodesk Inventor has many predefined command aliases, which you can use to

start commands from the keyboard. In addition to the predefined aliases, you can

assign new custom aliases or change the existing definitions.

Note Autodesk Inventor ships with a set of default multi-character command

aliases, which are not loaded by default. See Customize - Keyboard tab for

information on how to enable or disable default multi-character command aliases.

1. Select Tools tab Options panel Customize, and then click the

Keyboard tab.

2. In the Categories list, click the command category that you want.

3. In the filter list, select All, Assigned, or Unassigned, to see a list of

associated commands and aliases in the command box.

All

All commands are displayed in the command box.

Assigned

Only commands with assigned shortcuts or aliases are displayed in the

command box.

Unassigned

Only commands without assigned shortcuts or aliases are displayed in

the command box.

4. In the command box, click in the Keys column next to the associated

command. Enter the shortcut, using any of these methods:

Press any single letter or number key (A-Z, 0-9).

Press any combination of alphanumeric keys.

5. To discard the new alias, click Reject or press the Delete or

Backspace key.

Note To discard an existing alias, click in the Keys column next to the

Concept Procedure

associated command and press the Delete or Backspace key.

6. To assign the alias, click Accept or press Enter.

7. Continue to assign aliases or click Close to close the dialog box.

Tips for creating and using custom shortcut keys and command alias

character sequences

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor >

Dynamic input and command aliasbehavior

Shortcut/Alias Quick Reference

Execute, view, and customize command aliases and shortcuts.

Access:

Keys

List of assigned keys in use as command aliases and custom shortcuts, in the

active environment. Click an alias or shortcut in the list to execute the associated

command.

Command Name

List of command names associated with assigned aliases and shortcuts

Buttons

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor >

Parts

Topics in this section

2D sketches

3D sketches

Dimensions

Constraints

Work geometry and work features

Part modeling overview

Part features

Plastic Features

iFeatures and iParts

Part faces and bodies

Solid modeling

Part Analysis

Construction Environment and Importing Data

Sheet Metal Parts

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

2D sketches

Topics in this section

Sketch environment

Sketch coordinate system

Path sketches

Profile sketches

Projected geometry

Projected loops

Attach sketches to new planes (Redefine)

Slice graphics to reveal sketch planes

Plan and create sketches

Sketch blocks

Work with sketches

Linetype of sketch geometry

Sketch properties

Splines

Sketch points

Use text in part sketches

Images in sketches

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Sketch environment

All sketch geometry is created and edited in the sketch environment. All

operations on sketch geometry, such as dimensioning and constraining, take place

when the sketch environment is active.

Show Me about the difference between sketched and placed features

What is the sketch environment?

What is the significance of the Finish Sketch command?

Why are empty sketch icons placed in the browser?

How many ways can I make a sketch?

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Sketch coordinate system

Set the sketch grid

You can control the spacing and number of grid lines or turn off the sketch grid.

The sketch grid is aligned with the sketch plane for the coordinate system.

Moving or rotating the coordinate system origin reorients the sketch grid.

To set the spacing and number of grid lines

To display or hide the sketch grid

Tip When a sketch command like Line is active, right-click to turn Snap to Grid

on and off. Clear the check mark to sketch without grid snap or reselect to snap

to the specified grid settings.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Path sketches

Measure 2D open profiles

Use Measure distance to measure multiple segments

and add their lengths together by following a series

of repeated actions.

1. On the ribbon, click Tools tab Measure panel Distance in the

Sketch mode.

2. Select one line segment, click the drop-down menu in the Measure

distance dialog box, and then select Add to Accumulate.

3. Click the drop-down menu in the Measure distance dialog box again,

and select Restart.

4. Select the next line segment, click the drop-down menu on Measure

distance dialog box, and then select Add to Accumulate.

5. Click the drop-down menu on the Measure distance dialog box again,

and select Restart. Select the next line segment to measure, click the

drop-down menu again, and then select Add to Accumulate. Continue

this selection method for each line segment you want included in the

total.

6. When you are done making your selection and want to view the total

length of the selected line segments, click the drop-down menu on the

Measure distance dialog box, and select Display Accumulate.

Note Restart clears the current selection set so you can add to the

measured lengths.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Profile sketches

Create a profile sketch

Use any closed 2D sketch (including model edges) as

a profile for a feature. Profile sketches are required

to create Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, Loft, and Coil

features.

1. Sketch one or more loops.

2. On the Model tab, click a sketched feature command (Extrude,

Revolve, Sweep, or Loft).

3. Select one or more loops.

To remove a profile from the selection set, hold down Ctrl and click a

profile.

A profile may be a single loop, multiple loops, intersecting loops, or islands. You

can sketch on a planar face and select one or more loops as the profile. All loops

selected in a single operation are one profile.

Note To resize the profile sketch or redefine values in the feature, select the

feature in the browser. Right-click and choose Edit Sketch or Edit Feature from

the menu. When finished with changes, click Update.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Projected geometry

Projected geometry

Creates reference geometry by projecting model

geometry (edges and vertices), loops, work features,

or sketch geometry from another sketch onto the

active sketch plane. Reference geometry can be used

to constrain other sketch geometry or used directly

in a profile or path sketch.

In an assembly, project edges of a selected component cut by an assembly

section onto the sketch plane, when the edges would intersect the sketch plane.

The projected geometry is not associative and do not update if the parent

geometry moves or resizes.

As reference geometry, projected edges, loops, and vertices update when the

originating geometry changes. You can right-click on the reference geometry and

select Break Link to change the reference geometry to normal. When the

geometry is changed to normal, it no longer updates with the parent geometry

and can be edited independently.

Project geometry

Project cut edges

Project flat pattern

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Projected loops

Project loops onto the sketch plane

The Project Geometry command selects edges and loops or all loops on a face

and projects them onto a sketch plane. When there is more than one loop

selection possible, the Select Other tool cycles through and highlights each.

A projected loop places a Projected Loop entry in the browser under the Sketch

symbol.

1. Create a sketch on or offset from the geometry you want to project,

such as a part face.

2. On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Draw panel Project Geometry.

3. In the graphics window, click the loop you want to project. When the

Select Other tool displays, cycle through geometry until the loop

highlights, and then select it.

Note When the geometry is a closed spline, circle, or ellipse, a face

may be highlighted because there are several possible selections.

Continue to cycle through selections until the geometry you need is

highlighted.

A projected loop entry is nested below the sketch in the browser.

Note When creating a part in an assembly, you can project loops from an existing

part to the sketch of the new part. You can select edges, loops, or a face. The

projected geometry is associative to the parent part and a Reference symbol is

nested beneath the sketch symbol in the browser.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Attach sketches to new planes(Redefine)

Attach a sketch to a different plane (Redefine)

Use Redefine in a part or an assembly file to move

an existing sketch to a different planar face or work

plane than the one on which it originated, and then

use constraints and dimensions to position it and

modify its size as needed.

1. In the browser, select the sketch you want to attach to a face or plane.

2. Right-click and select Redefine.

3. Click the face or plane on which to attach the sketch.

Show Me how to move sketch geometry to a different face

If the sketch is constrained or dimensioned to the plane on which it originated,

the constrained geometry is included when the sketch is moved to a different

plane. You can delete extraneous geometry as needed.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Slice graphics to reveal sketch planes

Slice graphics

The plane you want to sketch on is often obscured

by geometry or hidden inside a part model. For an

active sketch, you can temporarily slice away the

portion of the model facing you to reveal the sketch

plane.

1. Rotate the model so that the portion you want to slice away faces you.

2. Click Model tab Sketch panel Create 2D Sketch and select a

planar face or work plane on which to sketch. To reactivate an existing

sketch, double-click a sketch icon in the browser.

3. Right-click and select Slice Graphics or press F7 (the shortcut key for

Slice Graphics). The model is sliced at the sketch plane. Its boundaries

are shown in wireframe.

4. Use sketch commands on the Sketch tab to create geometry on the

sketch plane.

5. To restore the sliced graphics, right-click and select Slice Graphics or

click Finish Sketch to end the sketch.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Plan and create sketches

Rectangles

Creates rectangles defined by diagonal corners or

three points.

Access: On the Sketch tab, Draw panel, click the down arrow below the

Rectangle command, then click the command for the Rectangle

type.

Two Point rectangle A rectangle created by clicking two points

(diagonal corners) to set length and width. Two Point rectangles

are aligned with the sketch coordinate system.

Three Point rectangle A rectangle whose length and width is

created by specifying three points. First and second points set

the length and direction of the first side. The third point sets

the length of the adjacent side. A three-point rectangle can

have any alignment.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Sketch blocks

Block properties

Modifies the sketch block Insert Point, name or description. Available when editing

a sketch block.

Access: The dialog is accessed when editing a sketch block.

1. Select a sketch block, right-click and choose Edit

Block.

2. Right-click and select Block Properties.

Note Geometry cannot be selected and you must right-click off

geometry to see the Block Properties option.

Insert

Point

Click Select to modify the sketch block insert point.

Select Visibility to display the insert point.

Block

Name

Input or modify the sketch block name.

Description Input or modify the sketch block description.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Work with sketches

Paste Options

Pastes copied AutoCAD data from the clipboard to an Autodesk Inventor 2D

sketch. Specifies preferences for units, endpoint constraints, geometric

constraints, and blocks.

Access: On the ribbon, click Model tab Sketch panel Create 2D

Sketch. Right-click in the sketch, and select Paste Options.

Paste Options is available only if AutoCAD data is on the

clipboard.

Import File

Units

Specifies if the copied data uses original units or

specified units.

Detected Units uses the units specified in the AutoCAD

file.

Specify Units changes the scale using new units. Click

the arrow to select from the list.

Constrain

End Points

Select the check box to apply endpoint constraints

automatically or clear the check box to constrain

endpoints manually.

Apply

geometric

constraints

Select the check box to fully constrain the sketch

automatically or clear the check box to constrain the

sketch manually.

AutoCAD

Blocks to

Inventor

Blocks

Select to paste AutoCAD block as an Inventor sketch

block. If not selected, AutoCAD block is pasted as

primitive geometry.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Linetype of sketch geometry

Change the linetypes of sketch geometry

Use the Construction command to change the

linetype of sketch geometry. Click the icon before or

after you create geometry.

Change linetype before creating sketch geometry

Change linetype after creating sketch geometry

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Sketch properties

Geometry Properties

The Geometry Properties dialog box displays or changes the line color, line type,

line type scale, and line weight of selected sketch geometry.

Access: Right-click selected geometry in the graphics area and select

Properties from the context menu.

Line

Color

Displays the line color of the selected sketch geometry and

provides a pull-down list of available color selections so that

you can change the setting. The default line color is the

color scheme set in the Applications Options dialog box,

Colors tab.

The Select option from the pull-down list opens the Color

dialog box , enabling you to choose another basic color or

create a custom color to add to the selection list.

Line

Type

Displays the line type of the selected geometry and

provides a pull-down list of available line type selections so

that you can change the setting. The default line type is

Continuous.

The Other option at the bottom of the pull-down list opens

the Select Line Type dialog box, enabling you to add other

line types to the selection list.

Note To load an AutoCAD .lin file, click Load at the bottom

of the Select Line Type dialog box. For more information,

see Load Line Type (LIN file).

Scale When the check box is selected, enables you to view or

change the line type scale. The smaller the scale, the more

repetitions of the pattern are generated per unit. For

example, with a setting of .05, two repetitions of the

pattern in the line type definition are displayed for each

unit. Short line segments that cannot display one full line

type pattern are displayed as continuous. You can use a

smaller line type scale for lines that are too short to display

even one dash sequence.

The default scale is 1.00.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Line

Weight

Displays the line weight of the selected geometry and

provides a pull-down list of available line thicknesses. The

default line weight is 0.010 in or 0.25 mm, whichever unit

is set in the Document Settings dialog box, Units tab.

The line weight value represents the actual thickness of the

line on paper. To specify how line weights display on the

screen, see Document settings - Sketch tab.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Splines

Curvature Settings

Provides a visual analysis of the curvature and overall smoothness. The curvature

comb plot shows curvature with a series of connected spines radiating outward

from the curve. The relative length of the curve is equal to the curvature of the

curve at the point where the spine originates. Longer spines indicate areas of

higher curvature, and shorter spines indicate lower curvature.

Access: Select one or more sketched curves (spline, circle, or ellipse) in

the graphics window that have curvature displayed, right-click

and select Setup Curvature Display from the context menu.

Definition

Sets appearance of analysis results along each curve and edge of the selected

geometry.

Comb Density Specifies the spacing between spines.

Comb Scale Specifies the scale (length) of the spines.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Sketch points

Import Points: File Open Options

Options to connect imported points can be set. Choose to import points without

connections, import points connected with lines, or import points connected with a

spline.

For 3D sketches in which the points are connected by lines, tangent corner bends

can be created automatically if Auto-bend with 3D line creation is selected on the

Tools tab Options panel Application Options Sketch tab.

Access: Ribbon: Sketch tab Insert panel Points . In the Open

dialog box, click Options.

Select the appropriate connectivity option and click OK. Click Cancel to exit

without saving the change.

Create

points

Import points only.

Create

lines

Import points and connect them with lines.

Create

spline

Import points and connect them with a spline.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Use text in part sketches

Geometry-Text

Use Geometry-Text to create and align text to sketch geometry.

Access: Ribbon: Sketch tab Draw panel Geometry Text

Geometry

Text Orientation and Format

Font attributes

Zoom buttons

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Images in sketches

Image properties

Rotates or mirrors artwork added to a sketch and sets transparency mask.

Access: Right-click an image, and then select Properties.

Orientation Rotates image left or right or mirrors image vertically or

horizontally.

Transparency Select Use Mask check box to make the image

transparent. Transparency color is the color of the lower

right pixel of the image. Clear the check box to make

the image opaque.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

3D sketches

Topics in this section

3D sketch environment

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 3D sketches >

3D sketch environment

Silhouette Curve

Creates an associative 3D curve along the outer boundary of a body as defined by

the direction vector. Visualize a beam of light cast on the object along the

direction vector. The silhouette curve is generated where the light drops off and

the shadow begins.

A primary use of the silhouette curve command is to determine a natural parting

line.

Access: Ribbon: 3D Sketch tab Draw panel

Silhouette Curve

Body Selects the solid body to receive the curve

geometry.

Direction Selects the work plane, planar face, edge, or axis

to define the vector direction.

Note To break the associativity, expand the 3d Sketch in the browser. Select the

Silhouette Curve nested under the sketch, and select Break Link from the context

menu.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Dimensions

Topics in this section

Parametric dimensions

Part dimension tolerances and properties

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Dimensions >

Parametric dimensions

Dimension properties - Document settings tab

Changes settings that originate on the Units tab and Default Tolerances tab of

the Document Settings dialog box. Settings affect all dimensions in the current

document.

Access: In the browser, right-click a feature and select Edit Sketch or

Show Dimensions. Right-click a dimension, select Dimension

Properties, and click the Document Settings tab.

Or, right-click in a sketch and select Dimension Display.

Modeling Dimension Display

Linear Dimension Display Precision

Angular Dimension Display Precision

Use Standard Tolerancing Values

Export Standard Tolerance Values

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Dimensions >

Part dimension tolerances andproperties

Dimension properties - Dimension settings tab

Overrides an individual dimension setting or tolerance type and immediately

updates the values on the screen.

Access: In the browser, right-click a feature and select Edit Sketch or

Show Dimensions. Right-click a dimension, select Dimension

Properties, and click the Dimension Settings tab.

Settings

Tolerance

Evaluated size

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Constraints

Topics in this section

Introducing constraints

Plan constraints

Constrain sketches

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Constraints >

Introducing constraints

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Constraints >

Plan constraints

Constraint Options

Selects constraints and reference geometry available for inference.

Access: In a sketch when no command is active, select Constraint

Options from the right-click context menu.

Selects the constraints to be inferred. Selects (scopes) the geometry to which

the constraints are inferred. The scoped geometry is shaded differently after

the dialog box is closed, unless all geometry is selected.

Selection for Constraint Inference

Select All Places a check mark in each active check box.

Clear All Removes all check marks. No constraints are inferred.

Horizontal. The horizontal constraint is inferred.

Vertical. The vertical constraint is inferred.

Parallel. The parallel constraint is inferred to scoped

geometry.

Perpendicular. The perpendicular constraint is inferred to

scoped geometry..

Intersection. The coincident constraint is inferred at the

intersection of scoped curves.

Midpoint. The coincident constraint is inferred at the midpoint

of scoped lines.

On Curve. The coincident constraint is inferred on scoped

curves.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Tangent. The tangent constraint is inferred to scoped

geometry.

Coincident. The coincident constraint is inferred to scoped

points.

Note The status of the Constraint Inference command overrides the selections

in the Constraint Options dialog box. If Constraint Inference is not selected,

all check boxes in the Options dialog box are unavailable.

Scope for Constraint Inference

All

Geometry

Infer constraints to all active sketch geometry.

Select Select the sketch geometry to which constraints are inferred.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Constraints >

Constrain sketches

Tangent constraint

The tangent constraint causes two curves to be

tangent to one another, even if they do not physically

share a point (in a 2D sketch). Tangency is

commonly used to constrain an arc to a line. A

tangent constraint is required to specify how to end a

spline that is tangent to other geometry.

In a 3D sketch, a tangent constraint can be applied

to a 3D spline that shares an endpoint with other

geometry in the 3D sketch, including a model edge.

Access: Ribbon: Sketch tab Constrain panel Tangent

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Work geometry and work features

Topics in this section

Work feature fundamentals

Work planes

Work axes

Work points

3D Move/Rotate command

Adaptive work features

Reference geometry

Reference planes

User Coordinate System (UCS)

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Work feature fundamentals

Set visibility of work features

Parts and assembly files contain a default set of work features (planes, axes, and

the origin center point) which can be displayed or hidden. In 3D sketch, part and

assembly files, you can define work plane, work axes and points.

When a part is used in an assembly, its visible work features are visible in the

assembly. To work in an uncluttered view, turn off all or some of the work

features.

To set visibility using the context menu

To set work feature visibility in the browser

To set visibility using the View menu

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Work planes

Work planes

In a part, a work plane is an infinite construction

plane that is parametrically attached to a feature. In

an assembly, a work plane is constrained relative to

an existing component.

Work planes can be placed at any orientation in space, offset from existing faces,

or rotated around an axis or edge. A work plane can be used as a sketch plane

and dimensioned or constrained to other features or components. In an assembly,

you can create a work plane between two planar faces on separate components.

Each work plane has its own internal coordinate system. The order in which

geometry is selected determines the origin and positive directions of the

coordinate system axes.

In a part, a work plane can be created in-line while you are using another work

feature command. The Work Plane command terminates as soon as the work

plane is created.

Note Optionally, resize a workplane. Right-click a workplane and clear the check

mark from Auto-resize, if necessary. Click a grip handle on one of the workplane

corners and drag to resize.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Work Features panel Plane

Tip To understand geometric dependencies, right-click a work feature in the

browser or the graphics window, and then select Show Inputs. For example, you

can right-click a work point to highlight the geometry from which it was created,

such as a work axis and a work plane.

3-point work plane

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Select: Any three points (endpoints, intersections,

midpoints, work points).

Result: Positive X axis is directed from first point

to second point. Positive Y axis is

perpendicular to the positive X axis

through the third point.

Work plane tangent to face through edge

Select: A curved face and a linear edge, in either

order.

Result: The X axis is defined by the line of

tangency to the face. The positive Y axis is

defined from the X axis to the edge.

Work plane normal to axis through point

Select: A linear edge or axis and a point, in either

order.

Result: The positive X axis is oriented from the

intersection of the plane and axis to the

point. Specify the direction of the positive

Y axis.

Work plane through two coplanar edges

Select: Two coplanar edges.

Result: The positive X axis is oriented along the

first selected edge.

Work plane offset from face

Select: A planar face. Click the edge of the face

and drag in the direction of the offset.

Enter a value in the edit box to specify the

offset distance.

Result: Creates a work plane parallel to the

selected face at the specified offset

distance.

Work plane at angle to face or plane

Select: A part face or plane and any edge or line

parallel to face.

Result: Creates a work plane angled 90 degrees

from the part face or plane. Enter the

angle in the edit box and click the check

mark to reset at the new angle.

Work plane parallel to plane through point

Select: A planar face or work plane and any point,

in either order.

Result: The work plane coordinate system is

derived from the plane selected.

Work plane tangent to curved face and parallel to

plane

plane

Select: A curved face and a planar face or work

plane, in either order.

Result: The new work plane coordinate system is

derived from the selected plane. This

method can also be used to create a work

plane tangent to a face or plane that is

normal to a plane.

Work plane tangent to a cylinder

Select: A construction line with ends coincident

with the cylinder axis and edge and the

tangent point on the cylinder edge.

Result: The new work plane is tangent to the

cylinder edge.

Work plane normal to a curve at a point on the curve

Select: A nonlinear edge or sketch curve (arc,

circle, ellipse, or spline) and a vertex, edge

midpoint, sketch point, or work point on

the curve.

Result: The new work plane is normal to the curve

and passes through the point.

Work plane bisecting two parallel planes

Select: Two parallel planar faces or work planes.

Result: The new work plane is oriented to the

coordinate system and has the same

outward normal of the first selected plane.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Work axes

Work axis

You can create a work axis on the following types of geometry:

A linear edge.

A sketch line.

A 3D sketch line.

A line and plane to create a work axis coincident with the line projected

onto the plane along the normal of the plane.

A work axis is a construction line of infinite length that

is parametrically attached to a part.

In an assembly, a work axis is constrained relative to

an existing component.

Note If appropriate, resize a work axis. Right-click a work axis and clear the

check mark from Auto-resize, if necessary. Click a grip handle on one of the work

axis ends and drag to resize.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Work Features panel Axis

In a part, a work axis can be created in-line while using another work feature

command. The Work Axis command terminates as soon as the work point is

created.

Tip To understand geometric dependencies, right-click a work feature in the

browser or the graphics window, and then select Show Inputs. For example, you

can right-click a work point to highlight the geometry from which it was created,

such as a work axis and a work plane.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Work axis through a revolved face or feature

Select: A revolved face or feature.

Result: The work axis created is coincident with

the face or feature axis.

Work axis through two points

Select: Two endpoints, intersections, midpoints, or

work points.

You cannot select midpoints in an

assembly.

Result: A work axis is created through the selected

points, with its positive direction oriented

in the direction from the first point to the

second point.

Work axis along two intersecting planes

Select: Two nonparallel work planes or planar

faces.

Result: A work axis is created coincident with the

intersection of the planes.

Work axis perpendicular to a plane through a point

Select: A planar face or work plane and a point.

Result: The work axis created is perpendicular to

the selected plane, through the point.

Work axis along a linear edge

Select: A linear edge.

Result: The work axis created is collinear with the

selected linear edge.

Work axis along a sketch line

Select: A sketch line.

Result: The work axis created is collinear with the

selected sketch line.

Work axis along a 3D sketch line

Select: A 3D sketch line.

Result: The work axis created is collinear with the

selected 3D sketch line.

Work axis coincident with the line endpoint projected

onto the plane along the normal to the plane

Select: A line projected onto a plane on the

normal to the plane.

Result: The work axis created is coincident with

the line endpoint projected onto the plane.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Work points

Work points

A work point is a parametric construction point that can be placed on part

geometry, construction geometry, or in 3D space. In an assembly, a work point

cannot be created on the midpoint of a line.

Work points can be placed on holes and cuts in part faces, model surfaces,

construction surfaces, and base surfaces. When Loop Select Mode is active, you

can place a work point on any closed loop.

Access: In a 3D sketch, click Model Work Features and then

click Point or Grounded Point.

In a part file, click Model Work Features and then

click Point or Grounded Point.

In an assembly file, click Model Work Features

Point.

In a part, an ungrounded work point can be created in-line while using another

work feature command. The Point command terminates as soon as the work point

is created.

Tip To understand geometric dependencies, right-click a work feature in the

browser or the graphics window, and then select Show Inputs. For example, you

can right-click a work point to highlight the geometry from which it was created,

such as a work axis and a work plane.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Work point at intersection of three planes

Select three work planes or planar faces.

Work point at the intersection of two lines

Select any combination of two lines including linear

edges, 2D or 3D sketch lines, and work axes.

Work point on a vertex

Select any endpoint of a line or edge.

Work point on a midpoint

Select a midpoint of an edge.

Work point on a 2D or 3D sketch point

Select a sketch point in either a 2D or 3D sketch.

Work point on intersection of a plane. work axis,

or line

Select a planar face or work plane and a work axis

or line.

Work point on intersection of a surface and line

Select a surface and a sketch line, straight edge, or

work axis.

Work point on intersection of a plane and curve

Select a planar face or work plane and a sketch

curve (arc, circle, ellipse, or spline).

Work point on a grounded work point

Select a grounded work point.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

3D Move/Rotate command

3D Move or Rotate

Interactively positions grounded work points by

dragging the triad in a planar move, axial move or

rotate, free movement, or entering values along X,

Y, or Z axes. Movement is controlled by the selected

area of the triad.

Access: On the ribbon, select Model tab Work Features panel

Grounded Point, and then click a vertex, edge midpoint, sketch

point, or work point. Click the triad to show dialog box.

In the Part browser, right-click a feature, and select Move

Feature. In the graphics window, right-click and select Triad

Move.

Select triad segment Values are relative to the selected geometry. Express

values as numeric values, parameters, or expressions.

Move along X,

Y, or Z axis

When a triad arrowhead is selected, drag or

enter a value in the corresponding axis area.

Rotate around

X, Y, or Z axis

When a triad axis is selected, drag or enter an

angle.

Unrestricted

movement

When the triad sphere is selected, drag in the

active view plane or enter values in X, Y, and Z

axes. After you enter coordinates in the dialog

box, you cannot drag the triad because it is not

in the active view plane.

Move in plane When a plane on the triad is selected, drag or

enter values in the selected plane.

Concept Quick Reference

Move triad only Select to move the triad only. The work point or

feature position is unchanged. Clear the check

mark to move the triad and the work point or

feature together.

Redefine alignment or position Activates the X, Y, and Z edit boxes. You can

enter new coordinates to redefine the triad alignment or position. The triad moves

to the newly entered coordinates.

Move the 3D triad:

Click a triad axis, and click an edge, work axis, or sketch line.

Click a triad plane, and click a face or work plane.

Click the triad sphere, and click a vertex, edge midpoint, work point, or

sketch point to reposition.

Apply places a grounded work point at the position of the triad, either by clicking

with the cursor or to apply entered coordinates. A grounded work point is placed

each time you click Apply.

Undo reverses the last placed point and moves the triad to the previous position.

Show Me how to create a grounded work point

Show Me how to redefine the alignment or position of the 3D Move/Rotate tool

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Adaptive work features

Create adaptive work features

Use adaptive work features to model relationships between geometric features

and assembly components. Use adaptive work features as construction geometry

(points, planes, and axes) to position a part created in-place in an assembly.

Convert a nonadaptive work feature to an adaptive work feature

Use geometry on another component as the origin of a work feature

Note Optionally, use these tips to create adaptive work features:

Hide work features when they are consumed by another work feature.

Click Options to access the Application Options dialog box.

Click the Part tab. Select the Auto-hide In-line Work Features option.

Create in-line work features. For example, click the Point command,

right-click, and then select Create Axis or Create Plane. Continue to

right-click and create work features until the work point is created.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Reference geometry

Reference geometry is sketch curves or points

created by projecting the model edges, vertices, or

work features of another sketch onto the active

sketch plane. Reference geometry refers to (is

associated with) previously created geometry.

You can use reference geometry in a profile or path sketch or to constrain other

sketch geometry. For example, you can use a reference edge as one segment of a

profile or as the termination point for other sketch curves.

How is reference geometry created?

What is the difference between sketched curves and reference

geometry?

What happens to reference geometry if the feature on which it depends

is edited or deleted?

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Reference planes

Display a reference plane

Each new file has default work planes that intersect

at the origin of the xyz coordinates. Display

reference planes to help you construct features with

precision.

To view reference planes, right-click in the graphics window and click Home View.

1. In the browser, click the plus sign beside Origin.

2. Select a reference plane to display, then right-click and select Visibility

from the menu.

3. Optionally, do one of the following:

To resize a reference plane, hover over a corner to show the

Resize symbol, then drag a corner.

To move a reference plane, hover over an edge to show the

Move symbol, then drag an edge.

Note Click the Sketch command, and then click a reference plane to set it as the

sketch plane.

A hidden center point exists at the intersection of the reference planes. To

position sketches relative to the part origin, click Sketch Draw and use the

Project Geometry command to project the center point onto the sketch plane.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

User Coordinate System (UCS)

UCS Settings

Set the UCS preferences such as UCS prefix in the browser or the UCS visibility in

the graphics window.

Settings apply to newly inserted UCS.

UCS (User Coordinate System) is a collection of work

features (three workplanes, three axes, and a center

point). But unlike Origin, there can be multiple UCS in

a document, and you can place and orient them

differently.

Access:

In a part or assembly document, click Tools Document

Settings Modeling tab in the dialog box. Click Settings in the

User Coordinate System area.

Naming prefix Sets the UCS prefix. UCS name is generated

from this prefix and a numeric index.

Default plane Select the default 2D sketch plane. Affects

behavior of 2D Sketch, and Look At commands,

when UCS triad is selected as an input.

Visibility Select the visibility of UCS objects.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Part modeling overview

Topics in this section

Part modeling environment

Multi-body parts

Part browser

Part templates

Work with parts

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview >

Part modeling environment

Rebuild all part geometry

To be certain you have incorporated edits to all geometry in a part file, use

Rebuild All. Autodesk Inventor regenerates the entire file, even if some geometry

did not require an update.

You must be working in a part file:

1. Open a part file.

2. On the ribbon, click Manage tab Update panel Rebuild All.

By contrast, the Update command regenerates only the geometry that has

significant edits held in memory. If the Defer Update option is selected (on

Assembly tab of the Application Options dialog box), you can continue working

without incorporating edits to geometry until you click Update.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview >

Multi-body parts

Create multi-body parts

A multi-body part is a top down workflow which allows you to create and position

multiple solid bodies within a single part document. This technique is especially

useful for designing plastic parts. A top down workflow eliminates the need for

complex file relationships and projecting edges between parts. You can control

visibility, define a separate color, and calculate the mass for each body. When you

complete the design, you can export the individual solid bodies as part files

directly into an assembly.

To create a multi-body part:

1. Create a model representing the exterior shape of the finished part or,

import a finished industrial design surface set and use stitch to create a

solid model.

2. Add features, such as fillets and shell, as required to complete the

exterior of the part.

Concept Procedure

3. Use work planes, 2D sketche geometry, or surfaces to split the part

into separate bodies.

4. Use sketch based modeling commands such as Extrude and Revolve to

create new bodies in place.

5. Use Derive to insert components into the part file as bodies.

6. Use Move Bodies to accurately position the bodies in the part file.

7. Use Combine to perform a Join, Cut, or Intersect operation between

solids.

8. Add additional features such as holes, grills, lips, and bosses to each

body as required.

9. Use the Make Part or Make Component command to save the

individual solids as derived part files linked to the master part design.

Note Different bodies can share the same feature such as a fillet or a hole.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview >

Part browser

Part browser

Shows and hides selected features, filters contents, manages access to feature

and sketch editing, and provides alternate access to functions in the context

menu.

Access: In a part file, click item to select, then right-click to display the

context menu.

Filters

Context menu options

Concept Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview >

Part templates

Create part templates

1. Create a part, using an existing template.

2. Set the default units of measurement.

3. If needed, change the grid setting and the sizes of the origin work

planes to accommodate the average part size.

4. Create any work features, sketches, or geometry to include in every

new part file.

5. Define commonly used parameters or link to a spreadsheet of

parameters.

6. Set the properties for the file.

7. Save the file in the Autodesk\Autodesk Inventor [version]\Templates

folder or a subfolder of Templates. A part file automatically becomes a

template when it is saved to the Templates folder.

Note The file standard.ipt in the Templates folder is the default part template. To

replace the default template, rename it to save the original file, and then save

the new file with the standard.ipt name.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview >

Work with parts

Use these tips to help create parts and troubleshoot design issues:

Copy one or more parts in an assembly

Replay the steps used to create a part

Create two parts from a split part

Select geometry in the browser to realign the model view

Create a thin part with a decal to span assembly components

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Part features

Topics in this section

Features and feature termination

Create features

Placed features

Adaptive features, parts, and subassemblies

Shared sketches and features

Deleted features

Mirrored features

Arrange features in patterns

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Features and feature termination

Feature properties

Controls the adaptive status of individual properties for sketched features and

overrides the part color for specified features.

Access: Click the feature in the browser, right-click, and select

Properties.

Extrude and Revolve features

Hole features

Feature Color

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Create features

Bend a part

Create a boundary patch feature

Create a chamfer feature

Create a coil feature

Create an extruded feature

Add draft to part faces

Create a fillet feature

Create a hole feature

Modify hole dimensions

Create a loft feature

Create a revolved feature

Create ribs and webs

Create a shell feature

Create a sweep feature

Measure 2D open paths in sweeps

Thread a hole or cylindrical shaft

Edit the thread data spreadsheet

Add a new thread type or clearance hole type

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Bend features

Bend Part

Use Bend Part to bend a portion of a part. After you define the tangency location

of the bend using a bend line, you can specify the side of the part to bend, the

direction of the bend, and its angle, radius, or arc length.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Bend Part

Bend Line The tangency line at which the existing part

transitions into the bend feature's deformation

area. The line about which the feature hinges or

folds.

The Bend Part feature is defined by using one of

three input combinations. Selecting one of the

available combinations from the drop-down list

alters the dialog box fields to allow appropriate

inputs.

Radius + Angle Allows creation of a Bend Part feature by

specifying a value for Angle and a value for

Radius. The Radius defines the size of the bend

curve between the two sides, and the angle

defines the position of the two sides.

Radius + Arc

Length

Allows creation of a Bend Part feature by

specifying a value for Arc Length and a value for

Radius. The Radius defines the size of the bend

curve between the two sides, and the Arc Length

defines the length of the curve.

Arc Length +

Angle

Allows creation of a Bend Part feature by

specifying a value for Arc Length and a value for

Angle. The Arc Length defines the length of the

curve, and the angle defines the position of the

two sides.

Side Flips the side of the part to bend.

Direction Flips the direction of the bend up or down.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Bend Minimum When the Bend Line intersects multiple portions

of the part body, use the Bend Minimum option

to specify which portions are to be bent.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Boundary patch features

Boundary Patch

Creates a boundary patch feature by generating a planar or 3D surface within the

specified boundary.

Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Boundary Patch

Boundary Specifies the boundary of the patch. Select a

closed 2D sketch, a chain of tangent continuous

edges, or a mixture of both to specify a closed

region. Once the boundary selection represents a

closed region, you can select the next boundary.

Condition Lists the name for the selected edge and the

number of edges in the selection set. It also

specifies the edge condition to apply to each

edge of the boundary patch. Click the arrow to

select an edge condition.

Note Because continuous edges must have the

same edge condition, all selected surface edges

that are tangent or continuous with the previous

item are merged.

Contact (G0)

Tangent (G1)

Note You cannot apply tangent boundary conditions to selected sketches or edges

that have two adjacent faces.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Chamfer features

Chamfer

Adds a chamfer on one or more part edges. You

specify the corner appearance and select edges

individually or as part of a chain. All chamfers

created in a single operation are one feature.

For chamfers created in the assembly environment,

the geometry selected can be from multiple parts.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Chamfer

Method

Edges and Faces

Distance and Angle

Edge Chain and Setback

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Coil features

Coil

Creates a helix-based feature or body. Used to create coil springs and threads on

cylindrical surfaces.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Coil

Coil shape

Coil size

Coil ends

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Extruded features

Extrude

Creates a feature or body by adding depth to a sketched profile. In assemblies,

extrusions are often used to cut through parts. Feature shape is controlled by

sketch shape, extrusion extent, and taper angle.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Extrude

Selection

Output

Operation

Extents

Match Shape

More tab

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Face draft features

Face draft

Applies draft to specified faces of a feature. The draft angle is calculated from a

fixed or tangent edge, a fixed face of an existing feature, or a work plane.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Draft

Draft Type selects Fixed Edge or Fixed Plane draft.

Fixed Edge creates draft about one or multiple tangent

contiguous fixed edges per face. Result creates additional faces.

Fixed Plane selects a planar face or a workplane and

determines the pull direction. The pull direction is normal to the

selected face or plane.

Creates draft about a fixed plane. The planar part face or work

plane determines which selected faces are drafted. Depending

on the position of the fixed plane, the draft can both add and

remove material.

Note Press Ctrl and click near the edge of a selected face or

edge to remove from the selection set.

Selections set pull direction or fixed plane and faces or edges to draft.

Pull Direction or Fixed Plane is set by the draft type.

Pull direction indicates direction in which a mold is

pulled from a part. As you move the cursor in the

graphics window, a vector displays normal to a

highlighted face or along a highlighted edge. When

the vector displays, click a planar face, work plane,

edge, or axis to select.

Fixed plane specifies the planar face or work plane

from which the selected faces are drafted and sets

the pull direction perpendicular to the plane. Click Flip

Direction to reverse pull direction. Select edges

separately to angle each separately.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Flip Direction reverses the pull-direction arrow.

Faces selects the faces or edges to which draft is applied. As

you move the cursor over a face, a symbol indicates the fixed

edge for the draft and how the draft is applied. Click the top

edge to fix it and move the bottom edge with the taper. Click

the bottom edge to fix it and move the top edge with the

taper. Click again to select an edge of a selected face.

Draft Angle Sets the angle of the draft. Enter a positive or

negative angle or choose a calculation method from the list.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Fillet features

Fillet feature

Adds fillets or rounds to one or more edges of a part,

between two face sets, or between three adjacent

face sets. For edge fillets, tangent (G1) or smooth

(G2) continuity can be applied to adjacent faces.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Fillet

Edge fillets Adds fillets or rounds to one or more edges of a

part. You can create constant-radius and variable-radius fillets,

fillets of different sizes, and fillets of different continuity

(Tangent or Smooth G2) in a single operation. All fillets and

rounds created in a single operation become a single feature.

Constant tab

Variable tab

Setbacks

Face fillets Adds fillets or rounds between two selected face

sets, which need not share an edge.

Face

Full round fillets Adds variable-radius fillets or rounds that are

tangent to three adjacent faces. The center face set is replaced

by the variable-radius fillet. Full round fillets can be used to cap

or round exterior part features, such as ribs.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Full round

(More)

Preview provides a preview of the fillet based on the current selections.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Hole features

Hole Dimensions

Displays and sets hole dimensions.

Access: Right-click the hole feature in the model browser and select

Show Dimensions. Double-click the dimension.

Hole Diameter Sets the value for the hole diameter. Key in the

value or click the arrow to do one of the

following:

Select a value.

Use the Measure command.

Show Dimensions.

Set tolerances in the Tolerance dialog

box.

Counterbore

Diameter

Sets the value for the counterbore or countersink

diameter.

Hole Depth Sets the value for the hole depth.

Counterbore

Depth

Sets the value for the counterbore or spot face

depth.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Loft features

Section Dimensions

Use the Section Dimensions dialog box to control the area/scale of placed and

selected sections, and the location of placed sections.

Access: On the Model tab, Create panel, click Loft. Double-click an

existing point created by the Area Loft command, or right-click

the point created by Area Loft, and select Edit from the context

menu.

Section Position Specifies the position of the placed section. After initial

section placement, the position can only be controlled

by editing the value in the dialog box.

Proportional

Distance

Dimensions are relative along

the length of the centerline.

Sections are placed with respect

to the length of centerline.

Absolute Distance Dimensions are placed along

the absolute distance of the

centerline. For example, if the

centerline is 16 inches, you can

place a dimension halfway (8

inches).

Driving Section Driving sections allow control of section position and

size.

Driven Section Driven sections provide feedback on section size,

without altering the area loft. Driven Sections allow

control only of position.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

control only of position.

Section Size Allows 2 methods of sizing placed sections

Area Scales section to match

specified area value.

Dimensions are relative along

the length of the centerline.

Scale Factor Scales section to match

specified scale factor.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Revolved features

Revolve

Creates a feature or body by revolving one or more sketched profiles around an

axis. Except for surfaces, profiles must be closed loops.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Revolve

Shape

Output

Operation

Extents

Match Shape

Infer iMate

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Ribs and webs

Ribs and webs

Creates ribs (closed, thin-walled support shapes) and webs (open, thin-walled

support shapes) using an open profile.

For ribs, the profile is projected to the next face. For webs, the profile is projected

a specified distance to define its depth. If appropriate, the profile can be extended

until it intersects geometry.

By selecting multiple intersecting or nonintersecting sketch geometry in a profile,

you can create a rib network.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Rib

Shape Specifies the profile geometry and sets the direction.

Profile In a single sketch, selects an open profile to define

the shape of a rib or web or selects multiple intersecting or

nonintersecting profiles to define a rib or web network.

Direction Controls the direction of the rib or web. Hover

the cursor over the profile to specify whether the rib

extends parallel or perpendicular to the sketch geometry.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Thickness Specifies the width of the rib or web.

Flip applies the thickness on either side of the profile or

extends equally on both sides of the profile.

Extents Specifies the termination for the rib or web.

To Next terminates the rib or web on the next face.

Finite sets a specific distance for the rib or web

termination. Enter a value in the box.

Options Specifies if the profile extends to a face.

Extend

profile

By default, the profile extends to intersect a face, if

necessary. Clear the check box to prevent the profile from

extending.

Taper Sets taper angle, or draft, for ribs and webs (normal to the sketch

plane). The taper extends equally in both directions. If taper angle is

specified, a symbol in the graphics window shows the fixed edge and direction

of taper.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Shell features

Shell

Removes material from a part interior, creating a

hollow cavity with walls of a specified thickness.

Selected faces can be removed to form a shell

opening.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Shell

Shell tab

More tab

(More)

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Sweep features

Sweep

Creates a feature or new solid body by sweeping one or more sketch profiles

along a selected path. If using multiple profiles, they must exist in the same

sketch. The path can be an open or closed loop, but must pierce the profile plane.

A sweep feature requires a minimum of two unconsumed sketches, a profile and a

path, on intersecting planes. An additional curve or surface can be selected as a

guide rail or guide surface to control profile scale and twist.

Note If multiple profiles in different sketches are required, use the Loft command.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Sweep

Shape

Profile Selects one or more profiles of a sketch to sweep

along the selected path. Use closed profiles to

create either solid or surface sweep features. Use

open profiles to create only surface sweep

features. Hold Ctrl to cancel the selection of

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

features. Hold Ctrl to cancel the selection of

profiles.

Path Selects the trajectory or path along which the

profile is swept. The path can be an open or

closed loop, but must pierce the profile plane.

Solids In a multi-body part file, selects the participating

solid bodies. Not available in a part file with only

one solid body.

Type

Specifies the type of sweep to create. In addition to the path, guide rail sweeps

require the selection of an additional curve or rail to control profile scale and

twist. Guide Surface sweeps require the additional selection of a surface to control

profile twist.

Path Creates a sweep feature by sweeping a profile

along a path.

Orientation

Path holds the swept profile constant to the

sweep path. All sweep sections maintain the

original profile relationship to the path.

Parallel holds the swept profile parallel to the

original profile.

Taper

Sets taper angle for sweeps normal to the sketch

plane (not available for Parallel). The taper is

shown in the solid sweep preview. Not available

for closed paths.

Positive Angle taper angle increases the section

area as the sweep moves away from the start

point.

Negative Angle taper angle decreases the

section area as the sweep moves away from the

start point.

Nested Profiles the sign (positive or negative )

of the taper angle is applied to the outer loop of

nested profiles; inner loops have the opposite

sign.

Path & Guide

Rail

Creates a sweep feature by sweeping a profile

along a path. The guide rail controls scale and

twist of the swept profile.

Guide Rail selects a guide curve or rail that

controls the scaling and twist of the swept

controls the scaling and twist of the swept

profile. The guide rail must pierce the profile

plane.

Profile Scaling specifies how the swept section

scales to meet the guide rail.

X & Y scales the profile in both the X and Y

directions as the sweep progresses.

X scales the profile in the X direction as the

sweep progresses.

None keeps the profile at a constant shape and

size as the sweep progresses. Using this option,

the rail controls only profile twist.

Path & Guide

Surface

Creates a sweep feature by sweeping a profile

along a path and guide surface. The guide

surface controls twist of the swept profile.

Guide Surface selects a surface whose normal

controls the twist of the swept profile about the

path. For best results, the path should be on or

near the guide surface.

Output

Specifies if the sweep feature is a solid or surface.

Solid Creates a solid feature from an open or closed

profile. Open profile is not available for base

features.

Surface Creates a surface feature from an open or closed

profile. Can be used as a construction surface on

which other features terminate or used as a split

tool to create a split part. Not available in the

assembly environment.

Operation

Specifies whether the sweep joins, cuts, or intersects with another feature or

creates a new solid body. Not available for base features, but required for all

other sweep features.

Join Adds the volume created by the sweep feature to another

feature or body. This option is not available in the assembly

environment.

Cut Removes the volume created by the sweep feature from another

feature or body.

Intersect Creates a new feature from the shared volume of the

sweep feature and another feature or body. Material not included in

the shared volume is deleted. Not available in the assembly

environment.

New solid Creates a new solid body. This is the default selection if

the sweep is the first solid feature in a part file. Select to create a

new body in a part file with existing solid bodies. Each body is an

independent collection of features separate from other bodies. A

body can share features with other bodies.

Optimize for Single Selection

Automatically advances to the next selector once a single selection is made. Clear

the check box when making multiple selections.

Preview

Provides a solid preview of the sweep based on the current selections. If Preview

is enabled and no preview appears in the graphics window, there is a good

chance the sweep feature was not created.

Tip To save computation time for complex sweeps, clear the Preview check box,

provide all the needed input in the dialog box, and then enable the Preview

again.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Thread features

Threads

Creates threads in holes or on shafts, studs,

or bolts. Specifies thread location, thread

length, offset, direction, type, nominal size,

class, and pitch. Thread data originates on a

spreadsheet that you can customize by adding

thread types and sizes.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Thread

Location

Specification

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Thread data spreadsheet

Add a new thread type or clearance hole type

The Thread.xls Microsoft Excel file, located in the Design Data

folder, provides data for hole and thread commands. The

Application Options and/or project settings can affect the

spreadsheet file's location. Each worksheet in the spreadsheet

corresponds to a different thread type. Thread types are

designated as either Parallel Thread Types or Taper Thread

Types.

The Clearance.xls Microsoft Excel file, located in the same

folder as the Thread.xls file, manages clearance data. The

Clearance.xls file has only one format.

Microsoft Excel is not required to create threaded or clearance

holes within Autodesk Inventor. However, Excel is required to

add a new thread or clearance type.

To add a thread type:

1. Close Autodesk Inventor, and open the Thread.xls file.

2. Copy an existing worksheet of the same type (parallel or taper).

3. Delete most or all of the data rows (row 4 and below), and add data

rows as required.

4. Rename the worksheet name (thread type name) and custom thread

type name (cell B1/C1).

5. Edit cells A1 and D1.

6. Save the file.

Note Changes to the Excel file are refreshed on startup.

To add a clearance type:

We recommend that you use similar rules to add a new clearance type in the

Clearance.xls file.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Placed features

Placed features are common engineering features that do not require a sketch

when you create them with Autodesk Inventor. When you create these features,

you usually provide only the location and a few dimensions. The standard placed

features are shell, fillet, chamfer, face draft, hole, and thread.

These are some of the commands for placed features, located on the Model tab:

Fillet: Places a fillet or round on selected edges.

Chamfer: Breaks sharp edges. Removes material from an

outside edge and can add material to an inside

edge.

Hole: Places a specified hole in a part, optionally with

thread.

Thread: Creates regular and tapered external and internal

threads on cylindrical or conical faces.

Shell: Produces a hollow part with a wall thickness you

define.

Rectangular

Pattern:

Creates a rectangular pattern of features.

Circular

Pattern:

Creates a circular pattern of features.

Mirror Feature: Creates a mirror image across a plane.

Dialog boxes define values for placed features, such as the Hole dialog box in the

following illustration.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Adaptive features, parts, andsubassemblies

Place adaptive components in assemblies

You can use an existing part or subassembly to satisfy assembly requirements.

Underconstrained features resize when you constrain them to a fixed assembly

component. In an assembly file, start by selecting a part or subassembly whose

features are set to be adaptive.

1. Click Assemble tab Component panel Place to

choose the component to place.

2. Browse to the folder that contains the component,

select it, and then click Open.

3. The selected component is attached to the cursor.

Select the location, and then click to place an

occurrence of the component.

4. Right-click, and then select Done.

5. Right-click again, and then select Adaptive.

6. Click the Constraint command to add assembly

constraints. Position the component relative to other

fixed assembly components.

As degrees of freedom are removed, the underconstrained features of the

adaptive part or subassembly resize to satisfy assembly constraints.

Note A component cannot be both adaptive and flexible at the same time. You

can need to see the same subassembly with its components in multiple positions

in an assembly. If so, turn off adaptive status and then turn on flexible status .

Right-click the adaptive subassembly in the assembly browser and clear the

check mark beside Adaptive. The Flexible option can now be selected.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Shared sketches and features

Control surface and work feature consumption

For parts, surface features and work features are automatically consumed by

default to communicate feature dependencies. Because automatic consumption

can result in unwanted deep nesting of browser nodes, you can change the

consumption behavior for all features or for individual features.

To change the default consumption behavior for all features, select the

Options to access the Application Options dialog box, Part tab

and clear the Auto-Consume Work Features & Surface Features check

box. This technique is helpful if you create several work planes, each

offset from the previous work plane (such as creating sketches for lofted

features).

To override automatic consumption on a per-feature basis, right-click

the feature in the browser, and then select Consume Inputs from the

context menu.

Note The end-of-part marker cannot be rolled back between consumed features

without sharing, such as between an extruded feature and its consumed sketch. If

you do not want work features and surface features to be consumed, clear the

check mark.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Deleted features

Delete feature

Deletes one or more selected features from the graphics window or the browser.

If applicable, you can also delete consumed sketches and work or surface

features, dependent 2D and 3D sketches, sketched features, or dependent work

features.

The following features are automatically deleted:

Dependent placed features (those features without sketches, such as

chamfers and fillets)

In-line work features when you delete a work feature

Nested work features when you delete a 3D sketch

Colors on the dialog box correspond to the highlight color of the selected

geometry in the graphics window.

Access: Right-click and select Delete. In the Additionally Delete box,

select one or more check boxes to delete geometry with the

feature.

Additionally Delete

Note If you do not delete the dependent sketches and features, the retained

sketches and features enter the sick state. An alert symbol is placed next to the

affected sketch and feature entries in the browser. Use Redefine to re-associate

the sketch to another planer face or work plane in the assembly.

consumed sketches and features

dependent sketches and features

dependent work features

Note Grounded work planes are automatically created when you retain a

dependent sketch. You can constrain the work planes in the part environment or

use the Reattach Sketch command to move the sketches onto other work planes.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Mirrored features

Mirrored features

Any work plane or planar face can serve as the plane of symmetry to mirror

selected features. A mirrored feature is a reverse copy of the selected feature. In

an assembly, only sketched features can be mirrored.

For parts, use the Mirror the Entire Solid option to mirror a body including

features which cannot be mirrored individually. The pattern of the body can also

include work features and surface features.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Pattern panel Mirror

Mirror individual features

Features Selects solid features, work features, and surface

features to mirror. If selected features have

dependent features, they are automatically

selected.

Note Certain exceptions exist: in assemblies, only

sketched features can be mirrored, assembly

work features cannot be mirrored, single sheet

metal flange and contour flange features defined

using multiple edges cannot be mirrored.

Features that operate on the entire body (all

fillets, all rounds, shell) cannot be mirrored.

Features based on the results of an intersect

operation cannot be mirrored.

Mirror Plane Selects a work plane or planar face across which

selected features are mirrored.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Solid In a multi-body part, selects the solid body to

receive the mirror. Not available in a single body

part file.

Mirror the entire solid

Include

Work\Surface

Features

In a part, selects one or more work or surface

features to mirror.

Mirror Plane Selects a work plane or planar face across which

selected work features, surface features, and the

solid are mirrored.

Not available in an assembly. Use Mirror

Component on the Assemble tab.

Remove

Original

Removes the original body. Only the mirrored

occurrence remains in the part file. You can use

this option to model a left-hand and right-hand

version of a part.

(More)

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Arrange features in patterns

Rectangular pattern

Duplicates one or more features or bodies and arranges the resulting occurrences

by a specific count and spacing in a rectangular pattern or along a linear path in

one or both directions. Rows and columns can be lines, arc, splines, or trimmed

ellipses.

All occurrences of a feature in a pattern are one feature, but individual

occurrences are listed under the pattern feature icon in the browser. All

occurrences of a new body in a pattern are individual bodies. The bodies are listed

under the pattern feature icon in the browser. You can suppress or restore all

occurrences or individual occurrences.

In an assembly, only sketched assembly features can be patterned, including their

dependent fillets and chamfers. Weld features cannot be patterned.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Pattern panel Rectangular

Pattern individual features Use this option to pattern

individual solid features, work features, and surface features.

Assembly work features cannot be patterned.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Features selects one or more solid features, work features,

and surface features to include in the pattern. Selecting

multiple features for duplication in a pattern increases

calculation time.

Finish features such as fillets and chamfers can be included in a

pattern only if their parent feature is also selected.

Solid is available if the part file contains more than one solid

body. Selects the solid body to receive the pattern.

Pattern a solid Use this option to pattern a solid body,

including features that you cannot pattern individually. The

pattern can also include work features and surface features.

Not available in an assembly.

Include Work/Surface Features selects one or more work or

surface features to pattern.

Solid If there are multiple solid bodies in the file, the Solid

selection arrow is available. Select the body to include in the

pattern. Only one body can be selected.

Join Attaches the pattern to the selected solid body. Use this

option to pattern the solid as a single unified body.

Create new bodies Creates a pattern consisting of multiple

individual solid bodies.

Direction 1

Direction 2

(More)

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Plastic Features

A multi-body part is a top-down workflow. You create and position multiple solid

bodies within a single part document. This technique is especially useful for

designing plastic parts. A top-down workflow eliminates the need for complex file

relationships and projecting edges between parts. You can control visibility, define

a separate color, and calculate the mass for each body. When you complete the

design, you can export the individual bodies as part files directly into an

assembly.

The plastic part commands in Inventor are rules-based tools designed to create

complex plastic part features automatically.

Note The plastic part commands are not exclusively for plastic parts. For

example, the Rule Fillet command can create fillets on any type of feature based

on specified design rules.

Topics in this section

Boss features

Lip features

Rest features

Grill features

Snap fit features

Rule-based fillet features

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features >

Boss features

Boss - Ribs tab

Stiffening ribs are optional. If the Stiffening Ribs check mark is on, all controls

to input the Ribs parameters become active.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Boss , and click

the Ribs tab.

Number of stiffening ribs indicates the number of ribs surrounding each

Boss.

Rib thickness

Rib draft

Shoulder length

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Shoulder top offset

Shoulder radius

Shoulder flare angle

Rib Fillet options

Rib fillet radius on the edges of the rib.

Rib blend radius at the intersection between the

ribs and the boss.

Start angle is the first rib inclination angle with respect

to the sketch X axis (when Placement is On Sketch).

When Placement is On Point, the rib start angle is

determined by a projected line on a plane that is normal

to the Boss direction.

Start Direction the selector is active when the

Placement is On Point. Use this selector to define the

reference direction of the first rib.

Flip is active when the Placement is On Point. Use to

reverse the direction of the first rib reference axis.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features >

Lip features

Lip

Creates a Lip or Groove feature on the thin wall of a part.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Lip

Lip/Groove toggle. Determines the type of feature to be

either Lip or Groove.

Shape

Lip

Groove

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features >

Rest features

Rest

Creates a Rest feature using a closed sketch. The Rest feature creates a thin-

walled face that cuts across a thin-walled target body. The face is then joined to

the body by walls of the same thickness.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Rest

Shape tab

More tab

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features >

Grill features

Grill

Creates a Grill feature using the various patterns included in one or more 2D

sketches.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Grill

Boundary

Island

Ribs

Spars

Draft

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features >

Snap fit features

Snap fit

Creates a Snap fit feature using points of 2D sketches or 3D work points and

direction elements.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Snap Fit

Style specification

Cantilever Snap Fit

Hook style

Cantilever Snap Fit

Loop style

Shape tab

Beam tab (Cantilever Snap Hook style)

Hook tab (Cantilever Snap Hook style)

Clip tab (Cantilever Snap Loop style)

Catch tab (Cantilever Snap Loop style)

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features >

Rule-based fillet features

Rule-based fillet

Creates constant radius fillets to the

edges matched by rules. The rules have a

source selection of entities (features and

faces). Identify edges based on interaction

statements. For example, “all the edges

that a given feature generates when

intersecting with the body” so such edges

are discovered at feature build/update

time.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Rule Fillet

The user interface is organized as a table, each row contains one rule and the

related source selection set.

Source

Selection indicator

Selection list

Radius

Rule

Convexity options

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

(More)

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

iFeatures and iParts

Topics in this section

iFeature environment

iFeature fundamentals

Sketches in iFeatures

Advanced iFeature placement

Add Placement Help to iFeatures

iPart Fundamentals

iParts in Assemblies

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

iFeature environment

Extract iFeature - Threads tab

The Extract iFeature command converts an iFeature to a table-driven iFeature.

Multiple versions are maintained in an embedded spreadsheet.

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Extract iFeature

For iFeatures that contain thread features or threaded holes, use the Threads tab

to specify the thread type in the table. Add the thread variables to the table that

you want to vary, and then set the specifications for each row. The specifications

correspond exactly to options in the Threads.xls spreadsheet and the Thread

feature dialog box.

Threads definition tree

Selected thread variables

iFeature table

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

iFeature fundamentals

Edit iFeatures

Edits parameter names, size, and instructions for placement of iFeatures. If the

selected feature has geometrically dependent features, they can be also edited.

Note Feature parameters can also be edited when the feature is placed.

Environment:

Part

Access: Ribbon: iFeature tab iFeature panel Edit iFeature

Selected Features

Size Parameters

Position Geometry

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

Sketches in iFeatures

An iFeature is a sketch or one or more features that

can be saved and reused in other designs.

Create an iFeature from a sketch, and then use the sketch points to position

geometry or use the sketch as a layout when creating other features.

You can position an iFeature when placing it in a part file by selecting any

sketched line or point.

How are iFeature sketches used to specify point position?

How are iFeature sketches used as layouts?

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

Advanced iFeature placement

Insert iFeatures

Places an iFeature in a part file on a work plane or a planar face. When you place

the iFeature, you can modify its orientation, position, and size, as needed.

Table-driven iFeatures are identified by a table icon in the left pane of the dialog

box. You can select from listed key parameters to specify a specific instance of

the iFeature.

Environment:

Part

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Insert panel Insert iFeature

Select

Position

Size

Precise position

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

Add Placement Help to iFeatures

Embed or link a document in an iFeature

You can link or embed a document in an iFeature to assist you in placing the

iFeature in a part The linked or embedded document, such as a Word document,

HTML file, or spreadsheet, is shown in the browser as an icon, nested under the

3rd Party icon. You select the document in the browser and designate it as

Placement Help.

If a document is associated with an iFeature, an Information button appears in

the Insert iFeature dialog box when you place the iFeature.

To add a document as placement help

To add a Web page as placement help

To use placement help when inserting an iFeature

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

iPart Fundamentals

Specify Range

Specifies a range of values for selected cells or columns when using the iPart

Author. When the iPart is placed, you can enter values within that range.

Environment:

Part

Access Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Create iPart

In the table, right-click a column, and then select Custom

Parameter Column. Right-click again, and then select Specify

Range for Column.

Sets minimum, default, and maximum values for a Custom Parameter column.

Minimum Click the arrow to select the limit (less than or equal,

or no lower bound). If less than or equal, enter a

value to represent the bottom end of the range. This

value must be less than the default or maximum.

Default Shows the current value of the parameter. This value

must be greater than the minimum and less than the

maximum.

Maximum Click the arrow to select the limit (less than or equal,

or no upper bound). If less than or equal, enter a

value to represent the top end of the range. This

value must be greater than the default or minimum.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

iParts in Assemblies

iPart and iAssembly Placement

Places a standard or custom iPart member or an iAssembly member in an

assembly.

Parts published from a Standard iPart Factory have predefined values.

Standard iParts cannot be modified.

Parts published from a Custom iPart Factory contain at least one

Custom Parameter. Custom iParts have designated parameters or

properties that have values specified at placement time. You can modify

a custom iPart by adding features.

iAssembly members can be parts, iParts, or assemblies.

Environment:

Parts and Assemblies

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Place

Browse to the folder where the iPart or iAssembly is located

and click Open.

In the dialog box, click the Table tab and select the version.

For Custom iParts, enter designated values. Click in the

graphics window to place the member. Click to continue to

place instances and then right-click and select Done.

Keys tab

Tree tab

Table tab

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Part faces and bodies

Topics in this section

Split faces, trim and split solids

Body properties

Combine solid bodies

Move Bodies

Replace part faces

Delete Face

Thicken faces and create offset surfaces

Finishes and decals on part faces

Shape description

Construction surfaces

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Split faces, trim and split solids

Split face or part

Splits part faces, trims the entire part and removes one of the resulting sides, or

splits a solid into two bodies. Split Face allows faces on both sides of the split to

have draft applied. Also allows selection of 3D curves to split faces.

Note The Trim Solid and Split Solid options are disabled upon selection of 3D

curve as a split tool.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Split

Method

Select

Faces

Remove

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Body properties

Surface body properties

Name: Displays the names of the selected bodies.

Body Color Style: Select the dropdown list to assign a unique color to the

selected bodies.

Strip Overrides: Select the check box to remove color overrides from individual

faces contained in the selection. Clear the check box to leave individual color

overrides intact.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Combine solid bodies

Combine solid bodies

Joins one or more solid bodies by combining their volume. A join adds the volume

of the toolbodies to the base. A cut removes the volume of the toolbodies from

the base. Intersect modifies the base solid from the shared volume of the

selected bodies.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Combine

Select

Operation

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Move Bodies

Moving bodies

Spatially moves solid bodies any direction in a multi-body part file. The bodies

may be imported derived components, or part bodies created using normal

modeling commands.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Move Bodies

Move type Selects Free Drag, Move along

ray, or Rotate function.

Bodies Selects the individual part bodies to

move.

Free Drag Enter the precise X, Y, or Z offset value.

Activate a value entry box and then select

the move preview to free drag the selection.

Move along ray Enter the linear offset value. Activate the

value entry box and then select the move

preview to free drag the selection.

DirectionSpecifies the edge or axis to define the linear

move direction.

Reverses the positive drag direction.

Rotate Enter the precise rotational value. Activate

the value entry box and then select the

rotational preview to free drag the selection.

Rotate Axis Specifies the rotational edge or axis.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Reverses the positive rotation direction.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Replace part faces

Replace faces

Replaces one or more part faces with a different face. The part must completely

intersect the new face.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Replace Face

Existing Faces Selects a single face, set of adjacent faces, or set

of nonadjacent faces to replace.

New Faces Selects a surface, a quilt, or one or more work

planes to replace existing faces. The part extends

to intersect the new faces. If necessary, the new

face is trimmed to match the part face.

Automatic Face

Chain

Automatically selects all faces that are

continuously tangent to the selected face. Clear

the check box to select individual faces.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Delete Face

Delete face or lump

Deletes a part face, lump, or void and automatically converts the part to a

surface. The operation replaces the part icon with a surface icon and adds a

Delete Face feature icon in the browser hierarchy.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Delete Face

Faces Selects one or more faces to delete, depending

on selection of individual face or lump.

Select

individual face

Specifies that one or more individual faces are to

be deleted.

Select lump Specifies all faces of the lump are to be deleted.

Heal When individual faces are deleted, attempts to

heal gaps by extending adjacent faces until they

intersect. Not available for a lump.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Thicken faces and create offsetsurfaces

Thicken faces and offset surfaces

Adds or removes thickness to faces of a part or a quilt, creates an offset surface

from a part face or surface, or creates a new solid.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Thicken/Offset

Thicken/Offset tab

More tab

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Finishes and decals on part faces

Emboss a part face

Change a face color

Use decals on part faces

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Finishes and decals on part faces >

Finishes on part faces

Face color

Specifies the color of selected part faces. Overrides

the part color and, if applicable, the feature color for

selected faces.

Access: Click one or more faces in the graphics window, right-click, and

then select Properties.

Face Color Style Sets color for the selected face. Click the down

arrow to list available colors.

Changed face color overrides only the base color

of features with an applied texture.

In an assembly with multiple instances of a part,

all instances update with a changed face color.

In a feature pattern, the face color is applied only

to the selected instance, not all instances of the

feature.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Finishes and decals on part faces >

Creating and using decals

Decal

Creates a decal feature by applying an image to a part face to represent

manufacturing requirements such as labels, brand name art, logos, and warranty

seals. The decal may be applied in a recessed area to provide clearance for

another component in an assembly or to prevent damage in packaging.

Images can be bitmaps, Word documents, or Excel spreadsheets.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Decal

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Image Selects an image in .bmp, .doc, or .xls format. In

.doc and .xls files, the printable area is selected

and retains its native formatting. Image may be

resized but retains its aspect ratio.

Use dimensions and constraints to position the

image on the sketch.

Face Selects a face on which to apply the decal.

Wrap to Face Specifies if the image is wrapped on one or more

curved faces. Clear the check box to project the

image onto one or more faces without wrapping.

Chain Faces Applies the decal to adjacent faces, such as over

an edge.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Shape description

Extend surface

Makes surfaces larger in one or more directions by specifying a distance or a

termination plane.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Extend

Edges selects and highlights each face edge of a

single surface or quilt for extension.

Note If the boundary of a selected face has additional

edges on update, those edges are not automatically

added to the extend feature.

Edge Chain Automatically extends a selected edge to include all

edges that are tangent continuous to the selected

edge. Edge chaining stops when an edge that is not

tangent continuous to the selected edge is detected.

Extents Determines the method for ending the extension and

sets its depth. Click the arrow to select an extent

method from the list.

Distance default method. Extends edges at a

specified distance. Enter a value or drag the direction

arrow to extend the surface dynamically.

To selects an ending face (of a solid or surface body)

or work plane on which to terminate the extension.

Optionally, once the termination face is selected,

clear the check box to terminate to the entire body

rather than just the selected face.

(More)

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Construction surfaces

Stitch surfaces (Part environment)

Stitches surfaces together to form a quilt or solid. Surface edges must be

adjacent to stitch successfully. The stitch command has a tolerance control that

provides an upper limit and helps Autodesk Inventor determine the proper edges

to be used for stitching.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Stitch

Selects parametric surfaces to stitch together into a quilt or solid body. Also

used to analyze whether surfaces are suitable for stitching. Creates a stitch

feature that can be edited later.

Stitch tab Surfaces. Selects individual or all surfaces to stitch together

into a quilt or analyze. Surfaces are highlighted in the graphics

window as they are selected.

Maximum Tolerance. Select or enter a value for the

maximum allowable tolerance between free edges.

Find Remaining Free Edges. Displays the free edges that

remain after stitching and the maximum gap between them.

Select a row item and right-click on it to display the

context menu.

Select Find in Window, to zoom in on the edge.

Select Set as Tolerance, to quickly change the

maximum tolerance used in stitching.

Free edge pairs display the value of the maximum

gap between them.

Free edge pairs which partially exceed the maximum

tolerance, display the minimum gap in Red (meaning

that the gap is within tolerance but not fixed).

Free edges without pairs display no gap value.

Maintain as surface. If not selected, a stitched surface with a

valid closed volume is solidified. If selected, the stitched

surface remains a surface.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

surface remains a surface.

Analyze

tab

Analyzes selected surfaces and marks surface edges with

condition to indicate suitability for stitching into a quilt.

Identifies surfaces that have gaps or tolerance errors.

Show Edge Conditions. When checked, this option identifies

surface edges by color to show results of analysis.

Black edges are stitched to an adjacent surface.

Red edges are free edges on a surface, and are not

stitched to an adjacent surface.

Show Near Tangent. When checked, this option shows near

tangent conditions.

Magenta edges have some discontinuity to the

adjacent surface (are nearly tangent). These edges

can cause failures in subsequent design operations

such as creating a shell.

Note This option has an impact on performance.

Maintain

as surface

Select to maintain closed volume as surfaces. If not selected, a

closed volume that results from the stitch operation becomes a

solid.

Apply Stitches selected surfaces into a quilt.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Solid modeling

Topics in this section

Solid modeling environment

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Solid modeling >

Solid modeling environment

Extend or contract body

In the solids environment, extends or contracts a base solid along an axis.

The base solid is resized perpendicular to a selected plane. Extending or

contracting a base solid does not add a new feature.

Access: Right-click the component in the browser, and select Edit Solid

to activate the solids environment. Then click Edit Base Solid

tab Modify panel Extend/Contract Body.

Plane

Extend or Contract

Distance

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Part Analysis

Topics in this section

Analyses

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part Analysis >

Analyses

Cross Section Analysis

Provides basic or detailed information about the interior of solid parts, and

analyzes whether the part exceeds the maximum wall thickness or is less than

the minimum wall thickness. A corresponding set of cross section graphics is

displayed in the graphics window.

Access: Ribbon: Inspect tab Analysis panel Section

Sets or modifies the name of the analysis. The first saved

analysis is named CrossSection1 by default.

Simple provides a cutaway view of the part at a single

section plane, similar to Slice Graphics in 2D sketches.

Advanced provides more detailed information about any

number of section planes, including wall thickness analysis

and area physical property calculations.

Simple

Advanced

Note If the referenced section plane or planes are moved in a future

computation, the analysis updates immediately if it is visible. If it is not visible,

the update occurs the next time the analysis is visible and active.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Construction Environment andImporting Data

Topics in this section

Overview of the Construction Environment

Import and use IGES data

Import and use STEP data

Quality Check of translated data

Data groups in the construction environment

Surfaces in the construction environment

Boundary patches in the construction environment

Trim boundaries

Stitched surfaces

Copy and Move geometry

Colors on Parts and Surfaces

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Overview of the ConstructionEnvironment

Construction environment browser

Use the construction environment browser to display information on imported

data in Autodesk Inventor.

Note To increase system performance in the Part modeling environment, turn off

the construction environment folder to prevent the data from being loaded into

memory.

Access: When surfaces and solids are copied to the construction

environment, the construction environment browser is displayed

in the model browser.

Construction

folder

You can check the quality of the data. Using

commands on the Construction tab, you can edit and

repair surfaces or solids (non-parametrically) for use

in part modeling.

Group Depending on the import option, generates either a

group for each layer or each group. If the IGES or

STEP data does not have a layer or group attribute,

the data is placed in the default group.

Note If the imported model does not include a

specific data type, an associated subgroup is not

created.

Composites are copied to a Group of the same

name.

Faces and base surfaces are copied to a new Group.

Surfaces Displays the number of surface entities.

Solids Displays the number of solid entities.

Wires Displays the number of wireframe entities.

Diagnostics Displays the number of surfaces or solids found by

the quality check command.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Note By default, Autodesk Inventor applies the part name (file name of the

inserted part) to browser file nodes, whereas other CAD systems may apply the

part number property. When a STEP file is imported into Autodesk Inventor, its

name may differ from the name of the CAD system which generated the STEP

file. To avoid confusion, use Rename Browser Nodes to specify the browser node

naming scheme.

See Assembly Tools for more information about Rename Browser Nodes.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Import and use IGES data

Import STEP or IGES Options

Specifies the import criteria for imported STEP or IGES files. Specifies the data

types to import and how data are grouped in Autodesk Inventor. A translation

report is generated that includes information on the imported data and its quality,

as well as a list of the parts and assemblies that were created in Autodesk

Inventor.

Access: To translate to a new Autodesk Inventor file, select

Open.

To import into an Autodesk Inventor part file, select Manage

tab Insert panel Import. This workflow is not available for

STEP files.

To place into an Autodesk Inventor assembly, select Assemble

tab Component panel Place.

1. Set the Files of type to IGES or STEP.

2. Select the IGES or STEP file.

3. Click Options.

Note If you choose to translate a file using the Import

command, some import options are not available. Unavailable

options are grayed out.

Save

Options

Save Components during Load. Select the check box to

save the assembly and part files in Autodesk Inventor

format during the import process. Choose where to save the

components from the drop down menu. If you choose to

Select Save Locations, the Component Destination

Folder and Place Top-level Assembly in Separate

Folder become available. This setting is not available when

the Import command is used.

Component Destination Folder. Sets the location for the

part and assembly files created from the import operation.

If Save in Workspace is selected, this folder is defined in

the Edit Projects panel.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Place Top-level Assembly in Separate Folder. Select to

save the top-level assembly file to a location different than

the part files. If Save in Workspace is selected, this folder

is defined in the Edit Projects panel.

Note Specify file destinations that are included in the active

project or add the paths to the project to assure that

referenced files resolve when you open a file.

Entity Types

to Import

Solids. Select to import solid bodies and water tight

stitched shells as individual solid bodies.

Surfaces. Select to import surface bodies. Water tight

stitched shells are imported as solid bodies.

Wires. Select to import wires.

Points. Select to import points.

Data

Organization

Import Assembly as Single Part. Select to import the

assembly as a single part. Choose from:

Single Composite Feature to import the

assembly as a single composite feature in the part

environment.

Multiple Solid Part to import the assembly as

individual solid bodies in the part environment.

This setting is not available when the Import command is

used.

Create Surfaces As. Select the surface types to create

during the import. Choose from:

Individual Surface Bodies to import each

surface as a single surface body in the part

environment.

Single Composite Feature to import the surfaces

as a single composite in the part environment.

Multiple Composite Features to import the

surfaces as multiple composites in the part

environment. Composites are created for each

level, layer, or group, as defined by the Create

From selection.

Single Construction Group to import the

surfaces as a single group in the construction

environment.

Multiple Construction Groups to import the

surfaces as multiple groups in the construction

environment. Construction groups are created for

each level, layer, or group, as defined by the

Create From selection.

Create From. Specify Levels (Layers) or Groups from which

to create Multiple Composite Features or Multiple

Construction Groups. Available when the Create Surface As

selection is Multiple Composite Features or Multiple

Construction Groups.

Add Prefix to Group Names. Select to add a prefix to the

source file group names. For example, if the source file has

a group Surfaces1 and you define INV_ as the prefix to add,

the translated group becomes INV_Surfaces1. Available

when the Create Surface As selection is Multiple Composite

Features or Multiple Construction Groups.

Group Name to Place Data. Select a Group Name under

which to place the imported data. The group name is shown

in the browser.

Import Multiple Solid Parts as Assembly. Select to

separate a multi-solid part into individual solid bodies. Each

body is an individual part in an assembly.

Units Import Units. Converts the imported geometry and

parameter values to the selected units.

Post

Processes

Check Parts during Load. Select to perform a quality

check of the imported data. If a bad data is found, the

composite is marked with in the browser and the

remaining bodies are not checked.

Note This option may significantly increase the amount of

time required to translate a file.

Auto Stitch and Promote. When selected, Autodesk

Inventor attempts to stitch surfaces into a quilt or solid. If

the surfaces are stitched into a single quilt or body, the

resulting quilt or body is promoted to the Part environment.

Otherwise, the surfaces remain in the Construction

Otherwise, the surfaces remain in the Construction

environment.

Enable Advanced Healing. If selected, slight alterations in

the surface geometry are allowed to stitch the surfaces.

Note By default, Autodesk Inventor applies the part name (file name of the

inserted part) to browser file nodes. Other CAD systems might apply the part

number property. When a STEP file is imported into Autodesk Inventor, its name

might differ from the name of the CAD system which generated the STEP file. To

avoid confusion, use the Rename Browser Nodes command to specify the browser

node naming scheme.

See Assembly Tools for more information about the Rename Browser Nodes

command.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Import and use STEP data

Import STEP or IGES Options

Specifies the import criteria for imported STEP or IGES files. Specifies the data

types to import and how data are grouped in Autodesk Inventor. A translation

report is generated that includes information on the imported data and its quality,

as well as a list of the parts and assemblies that were created in Autodesk

Inventor.

Access: To translate to a new Autodesk Inventor file, select

Open.

To import into an Autodesk Inventor part file, select Manage

tab Insert panel Import. This workflow is not available for

STEP files.

To place into an Autodesk Inventor assembly, select Assemble

tab Component panel Place.

1. Set the Files of type to IGES or STEP.

2. Select the IGES or STEP file.

3. Click Options.

Note If you choose to translate a file using the Import

command, some import options are not available. Unavailable

options are grayed out.

Save

Options

Save Components during Load. Select the check box to

save the assembly and part files in Autodesk Inventor

format during the import process. Choose where to save the

components from the drop down menu. If you choose to

Select Save Locations, the Component Destination

Folder and Place Top-level Assembly in Separate

Folder become available. This setting is not available when

the Import command is used.

Component Destination Folder. Sets the location for the

part and assembly files created from the import operation.

If Save in Workspace is selected, this folder is defined in

the Edit Projects panel.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Place Top-level Assembly in Separate Folder. Select to

save the top-level assembly file to a location different than

the part files. If Save in Workspace is selected, this folder

is defined in the Edit Projects panel.

Note Specify file destinations that are included in the active

project or add the paths to the project to assure that

referenced files resolve when you open a file.

Entity Types

to Import

Solids. Select to import solid bodies and water tight

stitched shells as individual solid bodies.

Surfaces. Select to import surface bodies. Water tight

stitched shells are imported as solid bodies.

Wires. Select to import wires.

Points. Select to import points.

Data

Organization

Import Assembly as Single Part. Select to import the

assembly as a single part. Choose from:

Single Composite Feature to import the

assembly as a single composite feature in the part

environment.

Multiple Solid Part to import the assembly as

individual solid bodies in the part environment.

This setting is not available when the Import command is

used.

Create Surfaces As. Select the surface types to create

during the import. Choose from:

Individual Surface Bodies to import each

surface as a single surface body in the part

environment.

Single Composite Feature to import the surfaces

as a single composite in the part environment.

Multiple Composite Features to import the

surfaces as multiple composites in the part

environment. Composites are created for each

level, layer, or group, as defined by the Create

From selection.

Single Construction Group to import the

surfaces as a single group in the construction

environment.

Multiple Construction Groups to import the

surfaces as multiple groups in the construction

environment. Construction groups are created for

each level, layer, or group, as defined by the

Create From selection.

Create From. Specify Levels (Layers) or Groups from which

to create Multiple Composite Features or Multiple

Construction Groups. Available when the Create Surface As

selection is Multiple Composite Features or Multiple

Construction Groups.

Add Prefix to Group Names. Select to add a prefix to the

source file group names. For example, if the source file has

a group Surfaces1 and you define INV_ as the prefix to add,

the translated group becomes INV_Surfaces1. Available

when the Create Surface As selection is Multiple Composite

Features or Multiple Construction Groups.

Group Name to Place Data. Select a Group Name under

which to place the imported data. The group name is shown

in the browser.

Import Multiple Solid Parts as Assembly. Select to

separate a multi-solid part into individual solid bodies. Each

body is an individual part in an assembly.

Units Import Units. Converts the imported geometry and

parameter values to the selected units.

Post

Processes

Check Parts during Load. Select to perform a quality

check of the imported data. If a bad data is found, the

composite is marked with in the browser and the

remaining bodies are not checked.

Note This option may significantly increase the amount of

time required to translate a file.

Auto Stitch and Promote. When selected, Autodesk

Inventor attempts to stitch surfaces into a quilt or solid. If

the surfaces are stitched into a single quilt or body, the

resulting quilt or body is promoted to the Part environment.

Otherwise, the surfaces remain in the Construction

Otherwise, the surfaces remain in the Construction

environment.

Enable Advanced Healing. If selected, slight alterations in

the surface geometry are allowed to stitch the surfaces.

Note By default, Autodesk Inventor applies the part name (file name of the

inserted part) to browser file nodes. Other CAD systems might apply the part

number property. When a STEP file is imported into Autodesk Inventor, its name

might differ from the name of the CAD system which generated the STEP file. To

avoid confusion, use the Rename Browser Nodes command to specify the browser

node naming scheme.

See Assembly Tools for more information about the Rename Browser Nodes

command.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Quality Check of translated data

Quality Check

Analyzes translated data and provides diagnostic information. Reports errors

found and suggests repairs. Analyzes data types separately or all at once.

Analysis can be stopped and restarted without repeating examination of already

analyzed data. Right-click a body, surface, or wireframe with an error to locate it

in the graphics window.

Access: In the part browser, double-click the Construction folder to

enter the construction environment. To start, do one of the

following, and then click Examine:

On the ribbon, click Construction tab Manage panel

Quality Check. Select data in the graphics window.

Note "Data" refers to solids and surfaces.

Right-click the construction folder, and select Quality

Check. All data in the construction folder is checked.

Right-click a group node in the browser, and select

Quality Check. Only data in the group node is

checked.

In the graphics window, click and drag a window to

select solids or surfaces. Right-click and select Quality

Check. Selected solids or surfaces are checked.

Right-click in the graphics window, and click Select All

on the context menu.

Known Issues categorizes analyzed data into groups in browser hierarchies:

Topology, Geometry, and Modeling Uncertainty. Wireframes are not checked.

Within each group, error issues are grouped, and bodies with errors are nested in

the groups. Right-click on a body, and select Find in Browser.

Topology Analysis lists bodies or surfaces with topology errors and groups them

by error type.

Topology errors

Geometry Analysis lists bodies or surfaces with geometry errors and groups

them by error type.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Geometry errors

Modeling Uncertainty lists bodies or surfaces with errors, but the system cannot

determine the exact error type.

Problem Diagnosis/Description provides detailed information about a selected

body listed in the Known Issues pane.

Help message summarizes the error or state of the data. Suggests how to repair

the problem data.

Click for more help describes the data error in more detail.

Refit Face selects and repairs problem faces by attempting to refit them, using a

maximum allowable tolerance between faces. Enabled only when the system

detects geometry and modeling uncertainty issues.

Examine starts analysis on the selected data.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Data groups in the constructionenvironment

Group Properties

Access: In the Construction browser, right-click a node under the

Construction folder, and select Properties.

Sets properties for data in the Construction folder.

Color

Style

Accept the default or click the arrow to select a different

color style.

Strip

overrides

For nodes such as groups or subgroups, select the check

box to remove color overrides from individual entities

contained in the node, such as bodies and faces. Clear

the check box to leave individual color overrides intact.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Surfaces in the constructionenvironment

Reverse Normal

Reverse the normal direction of a face or lump in the construction environment.

Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Reverse Normal

Select individual face

Specifies an individual face to be reversed.

Select lump

Specifies all faces of a lump to be reversed.

Note A temporary arrow is displayed in the graphics screen, showing the current

normal direction. For a closed shell (solid), a green arrow indicates what the

system determines as the proper direction. A red arrow indicates what the system

determines as a backward direction.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Boundary patches in the constructionenvironment

Boundary Patch

Creates a boundary patch feature by generating a planar or 3D surface within the

specified boundary.

Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Boundary Patch

Boundary Specifies the boundary of the patch. Select a chain of

tangent continuous edges to specify a closed region. Once

the boundary selection represents a closed region, you can

select the next boundary.

Condition Lists the name for the selected edge and the number of

edges in the selection set. It also specifies the edge

condition to apply to each edge of the boundary patch. Click

the arrow to select an edge condition.

Note Because continuous edges must have the same edge

condition, all selected surface edges that are tangent or

continuous with the previous item are merged.

Free Condition (G0)

Tangent (G1)

Note You cannot apply tangent boundary conditions to selected edges that have

two adjacent faces.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Trim boundaries

Extract Loop

Extracts one or more loops by untrimming a surface, leaving the wires intact, and

attempting to repair poor quality trimming curves. When extracted, loops are

changed to wires.

Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Extract Loop

Loop Select single or multiple loops in the graphics window. The

number of loops selected is displayed.

Delete

Wires

Select the check box to delete wires after extracting a loop.

It is unselected by default.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Stitched surfaces

Unstitch

Unstitch selected faces from a body. The unstitched faces are then placed in

folders in the browser, according to data type.

Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Unstitch

Select

Selects one or more faces to unstitch from a single surface or solid.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Copy and Move geometry

Promote wires

Promotes construction environment wire data and moves it to 3D sketches.

Access: In the construction environment under the Construction folder,

select a Wire subgroup node from the browser, then right-click

and select Promote Wires.

Promote

Wires

Promotes and moves construction environment wire data

to 3D sketches.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Colors on Parts and Surfaces

Change color of solids, surfaces, or wires

To enhance the appearance and visibility of solids, surfaces, and wires, you can

change their color. This can be useful in making a feature or body more visible for

communicating design intent.

Change colors in the construction environment

Change colors on parametric surfaces

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Sheet Metal Parts

Sheet metal design is an extension of the part modeling environment. Unique

template files allow the creation of sheet metal parts with predefined attributes

including: material, bend relief, bend radius, corner relief, gap values, punch

representations and unfolding rules. Sheet metal-specific commands streamline

working on both the folded and unfolded model. Flat patterns rich with

manufacturing information can be created and documented on drawings

containing tables of holes, punches and bends. Flat patterns can be exported to

industry standard formats for CNC manufacturing.

Sheet metal fasteners are available through the Bolted Connection Component

Generator or through Content Center when sheet metal parts are used within

assembly models.

Topics in this section

Templates for sheet metal parts

Sheet Metal Defaults

Sheet Metal Fasteners

Sheet Metal Features

Sheet Metal Flat Patterns

Bend Tables for sheet metal materials

Custom Unfold Equations

Export part and sheet metal faces, flat patterns

Sheet Metal Tips

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Templates for sheet metal parts

Create templates for sheet metal parts

Like parts, assemblies, and drawings, all new sheet metal files are created by

Autodesk Inventor using a template. When you use a sheet metal template to

create a part, the Sheet Metal Rule defined in the template is automatically

applied to the new sheet metal part. If you use a part template and then convert

the model to sheet metal, the Material Style defined in the part will override the

Material Style defined in the Sheet Metal Rule of the sheet metal template.

You can create your own sheet metal templates with settings defined as Sheet

Metal rules and add them to the templates provided by Autodesk Inventor

1. Create a sheet metal part, using an existing template.

2. On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Setup panel Sheet Metal

Defaults.

3. Optionally override the Material Style, Thickness, or Unfolding Rule as

needed.

4. If needed, change the sizes of the origin work planes to accommodate

the average sheet metal size.

5. Set any iProperties for the template file that you want to be inherited

by any files created from the template.

6. Save the file in the Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates folder or a

subfolder of Templates. A sheet metal file automatically becomes a

template when it is saved to the Templates folder.

Note The file sheet metal.ipt in the Templates folder is the default sheet metal

template. To replace the default template, remove sheet metal.ipt and replace it

with a template that has the same name.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Sheet Metal Defaults

Sheet Metal Default

The Sheet Metal Default dialog box specifies material style, thickness, and rules

for the active sheet metal part. The active sheet metal style defines: Unfold,

Bend, and Corner Relief options and alternative flat pattern representations for

punches. While each of these options can be modified (to differ from the active

style) when creating or editing a sheet metal feature, the Style and Standard

Editor must be used to edit shared styles.

Access Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Setup panel Sheet Metal Defaults

Sheet Metal Rule - drop-down listing of all sheet metal rules. List contains all

sheet metal rules within the local file if the filter setting in the Style and

Standard Editor is set to Local. List contains all sheet metal rules within the

style library if the filter setting in the Style and Standard Editor is set to All

Styles. Sheet metal rules contain the selections and values which are used to

define Material Style, Thickness, Bend, Corner, and Flat Pattern options.

Edit Sheet Metal Rule - Provides access to the Sheet

Metal Rule edit panel in the Style and Standard Editor

and allows the selections and values which are used to

define Material Style, Thickness, Bend, Corner and Flat

Pattern options.

Use Thickness from Rule - check box which enables/disables the Thickness

value field.

Thickness - Value field which reflects the thickness. When the Use Thickness

from Rule check box is checked the field is inactive and reports the thickness

specified in the selected Sheet Metal Rule. When the Use Thickness from Rule

check box is not checked, the field is active and allows a thickness value to be

manually input. Fly-out provides ability to obtain thickness value through

Measure, Show Dimensions, List Parameters or by selecting from a list of

recently entered values.

Note If the active part is a sheet metal iPart factory and the iPart table was

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

created with Thickness as a column in the table the Use Thickness from Rule

check box is disabled on this dialog box.

Material Style - Drop-down listing of all material styles. List contains all materials

within the local file if the filter setting in the Style and Standard Editor is set to

Local. List contains all materials within the style library if the filter setting in the

Style and Standard Editor is set to All Styles.

Edit Material Style - Provides access to the Material edit

panel in the Style and Standard Editor and allows the

material properties to be edited.

Unfolding Rule - drop-down listing of all sheet metal unfolding rules. List

contains all unfolding rules within the local file if the filter setting in the Style

and Standard Editor is set to Local. List drop-down contains all unfolding rules

within the style library if the filter setting in the Style and Standard Editor is

set to All Styles. Sheet metal unfolding rules define: linear unfolding method vs.

bend table-driven bends, KFactor values, and bend table tolerance options within

the sheet metal style.

Edit Unfolding Rule - Provides access to the Unfold Rule

edit panel in the Style and Standard Editor and allows the

selections and values which are used to define: linear

unfolding method vs. bend table-driven bends, KFactor

values and bend table tolerance options to edit.

OK - Click to accept all style changes made and dismiss the dialog box.

Cancel - Click to close the dialog box and ignore any changes that were made

while the dialog box was open.

Apply - Click to apply any style changes that were made while keeping the dialog

box open for further changes.

Note Any changes that are made to a style from the style library must be saved

to the style library if they are to be available to other users of that style.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Sheet Metal Fasteners

Use Sheet Metal Fasteners in Assemblies

From within an assembly which contains sheet metal

components, you can add sheet metal fasteners using

one of two methods:

Use sheet metal fasteners in a bolted connection

Place sheet metal fasteners from content center

Note If you do not see a PEM category in your list of component categories in

Content Center, you may need to configure your Project file by adding the

Inventor PEM library. Additional information on setting up and using the Content

Center can be found here.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Sheet Metal Features

Add bends to sheet metal faces

Create sheet metal contour flanges

Bend Edit

Reset All Bends

Corner Edit

Reset All Corners

Create Contour Roll as Base Feature

Create Contour Roll

Mirror and Pattern a Contour Roll

Add Unfold features to a Contour Roll

Add corner chamfers to sheet metal faces

Add corner rounds to sheet metal faces

Add corner seams between sheet metal faces

Rip Corner Seams on Converted Part Edges

Create cuts in sheet metal faces

Create sheet metal faces

Create sheet metal flanges

Create symmetrical flanges

Bend Edit

Reset All Bends

Corner Edit

Reset All Corners

Concept Procedure

Fold sheet metal faces

Hem sheet metal faces

Create Lofted Flange for Die Formed Output

Create Lofted Flange for Press Brake Output

Bend Zone Edit

Bend Edit

Punch shapes into sheet metal faces

Create sheet metal Punch tools

Create a single point Rip

Create a point to point Rip

Create a face extents Rip

Unfold Sheet Metal Features

Unfold Rolled Sheet Metal Features

Unfold Sketch with Sheet Metal Feature

Refold Sheet Metal Features

Refold Rolled Sheet Metal Features

Refold Sketch with Sheet Metal Feature

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Bends

Bend Extension

Determines how bends extend material between edges

of participating faces.

Access:

Located on the Shape tab of the: Face, Bend, and Contour

Flange sheet metal feature dialog boxes.

Extend Bend

Aligned to Side

Faces

Extends material along the faces on the side of

the edges connected by the bend instead of

perpendicularly to the bend axis. Useful when

side edges of face are not perpendicular. In the

following images, the same bend is created using

each option. The first image shows the bend

extension aligned to the side face. Note the area

of the flat pattern on either side of the bend

zone.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Extend Bend

Perpendicular

to Side Faces

Extends material perpendicularly to the side face.

This option is the default when the dialog box is

initialized. The image following image shows the

same bend as in the previous illustration created

using the bend extension perpendicular to the

side face. Note the area of the flat pattern on

either side of the bend zone and compare with

the same area on the flat pattern shown

previously.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Contour Flanges

Corner Edit

Use the Corner Seam Edit glyph to select a single

corner to edit from among a group of corners that are

being created as part of a multi-edge flange or contour

flange feature (during the feature preview) or following

selecting Edit Corners from the context menu of a

previously created flange or contour flange feature.

Access: Click the Corner Seam Edit glyph in the graphics window

over the corner you wish to modify.

Overlap

Relief

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Contour Roll

Sheet metal contour roll

Creates a rolled sheet metal feature from an open profile.

Access Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Create panel Contour Roll

Shape

Used to select profile geometry.

Used to select rotation axis. Note -

Rotation axis geometry must be contained

within the sketch containing the profile

geometry.

Flip Side - Click to offset the material

thickness to the other side of the selected

profile.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Flip Side - Click to offset the material

thickness to the other side of the selected

profile.

Both Sides - Click to offset the material

thickness equally to both sides of the

selected profile.

Rolled Angle

Rolled Angle Data entry field. Allows the value of the

angular sweep of the rolled section to be

input. Defaults to 90 degrees. Note -

angle value may not equal 360 degrees

for multi-segment profiles. A Rolled Angle

value of 360 degrees can be used for

profiles with a single, straight line.

When active, click to sweep the Contour

Roll in the direction opposite of the

previewed direction.

When active, click to sweep the Contour

Roll in the direction opposite of the

previewed direction.

Click to sweep the Contour Roll equally

both clockwise and counter-clockwise from

the selected profile.

Unfolding Unrolling

Unroll Method Drop-down selection list allowing the

selection of the method used to unroll the

selection of the method used to unroll the

Contour Roll feature. These methods all

derive a Developed Length by

multiplying the Rolled Angle by a

Neutral Radius. They differ by the type

of input provided:

1. Centroid Cylinder - The default

method: an axis parallel to the

revolute axis is passed through

the evaluated Centroid location

providing input to define a

neutral cylindrical surface.

2. Custom Cylinder - Allows

selection of a sketched line

which defines the surface of

the cylindrical neutral surface.

3. Developed Length - Allows

entry of an explicit value which

drives the developed length of

the flattened rolled segment.

4. Neutral Radius - Allows a

parametrically determined

value for the neutral radius

(when multi-segment profiles

are considered).

5. KFactor - Method used for

single-segment linear profiles.

Unfold Rule Drop-down selection list allowing the

selection of an Unfold Rule that differs

from the Unfold Rule specified in the

active Sheet Metal Rule.

Neutral Radius Informational display. Displays the value

of the neutral radius used when deriving a

developed length using a rolled angle.

Unrolled Length Informational display. Displays the length

value of the unrolled Contour Roll feature.

Bend Radius Data entry field. Allows input of the value

of the bend radius. Defaults to the system

parameter: BendRadius.

Note This data entry field is disabled when

a single, linear profile is selected.

Help Click to open the Help page.

Preview Click the check box to enable or disable

the preview display of the Contour Roll

before creation.

OK Click OK to accept the input, create the

Contour Roll and dismiss the dialog box.

Cancel Click Cancel to reject any input and

dismiss the dialog box.

Apply Click Apply to accept the input, create the

Contour Roll. The dialog box remains

displayed allowing additional Contour Roll

creation.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Corner Chamfers

Sheet metal corner chamfers

Adds a chamfer on one or more sheet metal corners.

You specify the corner appearance and select corners

individually. All chamfers created in a single operation

are one feature.

Access Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Corner Chamfer

Method

Corners and Edges

Distance and Angle

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Corner Rounds

Corner round feature

Adds fillets or rounds to one or more corners of a

sheet metal part. You can create fillets or rounds of

different sizes in a single operation. All fillets and

rounds created in a single operation are one feature.

Access Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Corner Round

Corner Defines a set of sheet metal corners for fillets or

rounds. Click to add a new set.

Radius Specifies the radius for a selected set of corners.

Click to change a radius, and then enter a new

value.

Select

Mode

Changes the method for adding or removing

corners from a corner set.

Corner selects or removes single corners.

Feature selects or removes all corners of a

feature, except the corners that result from

intersections between the feature and other

sheet metal faces.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Corner Seams

Sheet metal corner options

Overrides default parameters that define how corners are relieved when a folded

model is unfolded. Change these parameters for individual features using the

Corner Options tab. The Default settings are specified in the Sheet Metal Styles

dialog box.

Access:

Click the Corner tab on the Contour Flange, Flange, or Corner

Seam dialog box.

Note Not all options described are available or valid for each

feature that shares this tab.

Use this option to define the Default corner relief when two bends intersect.

Round A corner relief shape defined in the

flat by a circular cut out centered on the

intersection of the bend lines.

Square A corner relief shape defined in the

flat by a square cut out centered on the

intersection of the bend lines.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Tear A corner relief shape defined in the flat

by extending the flange edges to their

intersection. Characterized by no relief which

allows material failure (tearing) across the

bend zone in the folded model.

Trim to Bend A corner relief shape defined

in the flat by a polygonal cut out bounded by

the bending zone lines.

Linear Weld A corner relief shape defined in

the flat by a V-shaped cut out defined from

the intersection of the inner bend zone lines

to the outer bend zone intersection of the

line with the flange edges. Characterized by

minimum relief allowing a subsequent weld

operation to close the corner.

Arc Weld A corner relief shape defined in

the flat by curves tangent to the flange

edges along the outside edge of the bend

zone which converge to a flat gap equal to

the Miter Gap value. Characterized in the

folded model by a gap between the flanges

that is equidistant along the length of the

relief suitable for subsequent arc welding.

Use this option to define the Default corner relief to display in the flat pattern

when three bends intersect.

Note The folded model does not display the selected relief option.

No Replacement As indicated, no

replacement of the "as modeled" geometry is

made in the flat pattern.

Intersection A corner relief shape defined in

the flat by extending and intersecting the

flange edges.

Full Round A corner relief shape defined in

the flat by extending the flange edges to their

intersection and then placing a fillet tangent to

the bend zone tangency lines. Radius are likely

larger than what is produced using the Round

with Radius option.

with Radius option.

Round with Radius A corner relief shape

defined in the flat by extending the flange

edges to their intersection, and then placing a

tangent fillet of the size specified. Radius likely

smaller than what is produced by the Full

Round option.

Relief Size - Allows you to input a value to change the size of the Corner Relief

of the selected feature from the default which is defined in the Sheet Metal Style

using the named parameter: CornerReliefSize.

Apply Auto-Mitering - Enables automatic material extension between adjacent

flange edges during creation or edit of at least two flange edges during a single

operation where bend angle is greater than 90 degrees. Available on Flange and

Contour Flange dialog box (not available on Corner tab of Corner Seam dialog

box)

Enabled - A contour flange loop

applied with the auto-miter

option enabled.

Disabled - A contour flange loop

applied with the auto-miter

option disabled.

Miter Gap - Allows you to input a value to change the size of an automatically

applied gap between flanges when the Auto-Miter option is enabled. When

enabled, the value displayed defaults to the system named parameter: GapSize

which is defined in the Sheet Metal Style.

2 Bend/3 Bend Corner - Indicates which type of corner relief applies to the

selected geometry. These radio buttons are active when a choice must be made

between the type of corner being specified. They are inactive and serve as an

indicator of the type of corner selected at all other times.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Cuts

Sheet metal cut

Removes material from a sheet metal face. The shape

of the cut feature is controlled by the sketched profile.

Access: Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Cut

Shape

Profile Selects a profile to remove material. If there are

multiple profiles and none are selected, click Profile, and

then click one or more profiles. The material to remove is

previewed in the graphics window.

Single profile Automatically selects profile and previews

the cut.

Multiple profiles Position the cursor over the profile and

click to select. To cancel the selection, press Ctrl and click

the profile.

Cut Across Bend - Check to remove material by wrapping the profile across

faces and one or more sheet metal bends. If there are multiple profiles and

none are selected, click Profile and then click one or more profiles. The

material to remove is previewed in the graphics window.

Extents

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Extent Type drop-down select field - Allows the selection of the type of

extent:

Distance Default method. Establishes the depth and

direction of the cut. The cut is perpendicular to the

sketch plane.

To Next Cut terminates on the next plane or face.

Selects the direction for the cut.

To Selects an ending face or plane on which to

terminate the cut. You can terminate the cut on the

selected face, or on a face that extends beyond the

termination plane. In an assembly, the face or plane can

be on another part.

From - To Selects beginning and ending faces or planes

on which to terminate the extrusion. In an assembly,

the faces or planes can be on other parts.

All Extrudes the profile through all features and sketches

in the specified direction. Select the direction of the cut

or extrude the cut equally in both directions.

Thickness value field - Allows the thickness of the cut to be specified:

Thickness - Default cut depth is equal to the

Thickness parameter of the sheet metal material and

results in a through cut. When the Cut Across Bend

option is selected the cut is applied to the faces and

bends located under the sketch while the part is in a

flattened state. The cut depth is through the material.

Thickness/"n" - A partial depth cut can be specified by

using the Thickness parameter in an equation. May be

specified as an absolute depth value. Thickness/2

results in a cut that was half the depth of the material

thickness. When the Cut Across Bend option is selected

the cut is applied to the faces and bends located under

the sketch while the part is in a flattened state. The cut

depth is equal to the value specified by the equation.

Measure - Uses the distance defined by two points or an edge for the

thickness of the cut.

Show Dimensions - Displays the dimensions for a selected feature. Uses the

distance determined by a selected dimension as the thickness for the cut.

List Parameters - Displays a list of defined parameters in the file which can

be selected as the thickness for the cut.

Offset

Flips the direction of the cut from the default setting. Useful

when the cut sketch is created on a reference plane.

Results in no material removal when the sketch is created

on a sheet metal face.

The default direction selected. Removes material from the

plane of the selected sketch towards the material thickness

of the part.

Defines the cut sketch as being the mid-plane of the cut

thickness. Can be useful when the cut sketch is created on

an appropriately positioned reference plane.

OK Click OK to create (or modify) a bend using the

parameters and options specified and close the dialog

box.

Cancel Click Cancel to discard any edits made to parameters

or options and close the dialog box.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Faces

Sheet metal unfold options

The default Sheet Metal Unfold rule is set for the part in the Sheet Metal Rule.

The Sheet Metal Unfold rule can be changed for an entire part using Sheet Metal

Defaults on Sheet Metal tab Setup panel Sheet Metal Defaults. The Unfold

rule can be overridden for the feature being created by changing the style

selection on this dialog box tab.

Access:

While creating a Sheet Metal feature, click the Unfold Options

tab on the feature creation dialog box.

Unfold Rule - Drop-down selection field that allows the selection of any

previously defined Unfold rule.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Feature Patterns

Sheet metal features behave much the same as solid features in patterns. For

example:

You can create rectangular, circular, and mirror patterns.

Secondary (child) features, such as corner rounds, corner chamfers,

corner seams, and bends, can be patterned only when the parent

feature is included.

For faster computation, use Identical termination instead of Adjust to

Model where possible.

You can suppress one or more individual occurrences of a feature in a

pattern to flow around an irregular shape, for example, but not the

original base feature.

Some special considerations for sheet metal features in patterns include:

Fold features usually extend along an entire edge and may not be good

candidates for patterns.

A sheet metal cut (without the cut across bend option) is like an

extruded cut. You can get different results using the Identical compared

to Adjust to Model termination method.

Cut across bend features pattern results differ depending on the bend

geometry and termination method. Compare results when using Identical

and Adjust to Model methods.

Patterns of multi-edge flanges are not supported.

Only Identical termination method is available for:

Face features, with or without associated bends

Flanges

Contour flanges

Hems

When you are not certain of the results, experiment with termination methods

and the number of pattern instances to determine the best approach.

Show Me how to create a circular pattern of sheet metal features

Show Me how to create an incremental circular pattern

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Flanges

Corner Edit

Use the Corner Seam Edit glyph to select a single

corner to edit from among a group of corners that are

being created as part of a multi-edge flange or contour

flange feature (during the feature preview) or following

selecting Edit Corners from the context menu of a

previously created flange or contour flange feature.

Access: Click the Corner Seam Edit glyph in the graphics window

over the corner you wish to modify.

Overlap

Relief

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Folds

Sheet metal fold

Bends an existing sheet metal face by folding it along

a sketched line that terminates at face edges.

Access: Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Create panel Fold

Shape

Unfold Options

Bend

OK Click OK to create (or modify) a fold using the

parameters and options specified and dismiss the

dialog box.

Cancel Click Cancel to discard any edits made to parameters

or options and close the dialog box.

Apply Click Apply to create a fold using the parameters and

options specified and keep the dialog box displayed

allowing additional contour folds to be created.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Hems

Sheet metal hem

Creates a folded hem along sheet metal edges to

strengthen the part, or eliminate sharp edges. You can

create single, double, rolled, and teardrop hems.

Access: Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Create panel Hem

Shape

Unfold Options

Bend

OK Click OK to create (or modify) a hem using the

parameters and options specified and dismiss the

dialog box.

Cancel Click Cancel to disregard any edits made to

parameters or options and dismiss the dialog box.

Apply Click Apply to create a hem using the parameters and

options specified and keep the dialog box displayed

allowing additional hems to be created.

(More)

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Lofted Flange

Sheet metal bend edit

Allows editing of the bend radius and unfold rule for individual bends within a

selected bend zone of a lofted flange.

Access:

Select Edit Bends from the context menu of the Bend child-

feature of a Lofted Flange. Within the graphics window, select

the Bend Zone Edit glyph then select an individual Bend Edit

glyph on a specific bend within the bend zone.

Check Box Enables the editing of the Bend Radius field.

Bend Radius Allows input of a value to modify the bend radius of

the selected bend.

Check Box Enables the editing of the Unfold Rule.

Unfold Rule Allows the selection of an alternative Unfold Rule for

the selected bend.

Help Button Click “?” to open this page of the on-line help.

OK Click to apply the modified facet control type and

value to the selected bend zone and close the dialog

box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Punch Tools

Sheet metal punch tool placement reference

Punches a 3D shape into a sheet metal face. At least

one hole center must exist on the selected sheet metal

face. The iFeature designed to be used with the Punch

tool must be a 3D solid based on a sketch with a

single hole center.

Access: Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Punch Tool

Then, select a punch in the Punch Tool Directory and click Open

for the Punch Tool dialog box.

Preview

Geometry

Size

Finish - Creates the Sheet Metal Punch iFeature on the face of the part.

Cancel - Discards all input and closes the Punch Tool dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Rip

Rip definition reference

Dialog box displayed during the creation and edit of Rip features.

Access: Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Rip

Rip Type Drop-down selection list containing the

following selections:

Single Point - Allows the

definition of a Rip feature

through the selection of a face

to e rip and a single sketched

point along an edge of the face.

Point to Point - Allows the

definition of a Rip feature

through the selection of a face

to rip and two sketched points

along edges of the face.

Face Extents - Allows the

definition of a Rip feature by

selection of a model face to

remove.

Gap Value Value entry field. Allows the input of a

gap value. Defaults to value of system

parameter: GapSize.

Note Value entry field available for Single

Point and Point to Point rip types.

Shape

Rip Face - Selection tool used to choose

the model face to which the Rip feature is

applied.

Sketch Point - This selection tool is

labeled Sketch Point when the Rip Type is

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

labeled Sketch Point when the Rip Type is

Single Point. It is used to choose the

sketch point that definse the location of

the rip.

Start Point - This selection tool is labeled

Start Point when the Rip Type is Point to

Point. It is used to choose the sketch

point that defines the location of the first

point of the rip

Note This selection tool is not visible

when the Rip Type chosen is Face Extents.

End Point - Selection tool used to choose

the end point of the Rip feature when the

Rip Type chosen is Point to Point.

Note This selection tool is not visible

when Rip Type chosen is Single Point or

Face Extents.

Gap Offset Direction (available for Single Point and Point to Point rip types)

Flip Side - When active during the

graphic preview, offsets the Rip gap to

the opposite side of the selected point.

Flip Side - When active during the

graphic preview, offsets the Rip gap to

the opposite side of the selected point.

Both Sides - Offsets the Rip gap to both

sides of the selected point.

Help Opens this page.

OK Accepts the input, create the Rip feature

and dismiss the dialog box.

Cancel Discards any input and closes the dialog

box.

Apply Accepts the input and creates the Rip

feature. The dialog box remains displayed

allowing additional Rip feature creation.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Unfold/Refold Feature Pair

Sheet metal unfold/refold reference

The dialog box displayed during either the Unfold and Refold workflow differs only

in the labeling of the functions as either Unfold or Refold. This reference covers

both dialog boxes. The dialog box contains three selection sections, a contextual

illustration, and a set of buttons along the bottom.

Access:

On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel

Unfold

or click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Refold

Unfold or Refold Reference (A)

Use this selection tool to choose the face or reference plane

that to use to define the reference to which bends or rolls are

unfolded or refolded. This reference is labeled A in the

illustration to the right on the dialog box. When entering the

workflow, this tool is active by default.

Unfold or Refold Geometry (B)

Use this selection tool to select individual bend or roll features

to unfold or refold. Geometry that can be selected using this

tool is labeled B in the illustration to the right on the dialog

box. This tool is disabled until a reference is selected.

Use this selection tool to select all bend or roll features to

unfold or refold. Geometry that can be selected using this tool

is labeled B in the illustration to the right on the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

is labeled B in the illustration to the right on the dialog box.

This tool is disabled until a reference is selected.

Sketches (C)

Use this selection tool to select unconsumed sketches to unfold

or refold. Sketch geometry that can be selected using this tool

is labeled C in the illustration to the right on the dialog box.

This tool is disabled until unfold or refold geometry is selected.

Parent is visible - When sketches are unfolded, a copy of the

sketch is created and displayed on the flattened face. The

original sketch (or parent) remains in the folded position. Check

this option to see both the original (folded position) sketch as

well as the unfolded copy of the sketch.

Dialog Image Panel

The Unfold or Refold dialog box displays an image that changes

depending on the available geometry.

Unfold - Flat faces

present

Unfold - No flat faces Refold - Flat faces

present

Refold - No flat faces

Unfold - Contour roll Refold - Contour roll

Enable/disable feature preview - Enable or disable

the preview of the fold or unfold result.

OK Create (or modify) an Unfold or Refold using the

selections specified and dismiss the dialog box.

Cancel Discard any edits made to parameters or options and

dismiss the dialog box.

Apply Create (or modify) an Unfold or Refold using the

selections specified and leave the dialog box displayed

for further interaction.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Sheet Metal Flat Patterns

Create flat patterns in sheet metal

Export flat patterns

Reorient flat patterns in sheet metal

Switch between folded and flat pattern environments

Review flat pattern extents

Update flat pattern extent

Directed Reorder

Sequential Reorder

Individual Override

Remove all Overrides

Create Flat Pattern Cosmetic Centerline

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Flat Patterns >

Create Flat Pattern

Flat pattern extents

Informational dialog reports the length and width of the sheet metal flat pattern.

These values are later available from within the drawing environment through the

Format Text dialog box. You can select the Sheet Metal Properties category type

and subsequently select FLAT PATTERN EXTENTS LENGTH or FLAT PATTERN

EXTENTS WIDTH to obtain these values.

Access:

With the Flat Pattern browser node selected, click Extents.

Width - Displays the width of the flat pattern.

Length - Displays the length of the flat pattern.

Close - Dismisses the dialog box.

Update - Updates the values in the width and length field when a migrated file

has not had the flat pattern width and length values updated. Button is inactive

when the values are up to date.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Flat Patterns >

Bend Order Annotation

Bend Order Edit

Used to edit the Bend Order sequence. Allows input of sequence number override

and allows override value to be unique or duplicate.

Access: Ribbon: Flat Pattern tab Manage panel Bend Order

Annotation, and then click a displayed Bend Order glyph.

Bend Number Check

Box

Enables the Bend Number input field.

Bend Number Enter numeric value to override displayed

bend order sequence value.

Unique Number Specifies that the Bend Number is unique

within the bend order sequence.

Enabled when the override is a

number that exists in the

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

number that exists in the

sequence. When Unique Number

is selected, the remaining

sequence numbers is

incremented.

Disabled and checked if the

override is not in the sequence.

Duplicate Number Specifies that the Bend Number is

duplicated within the bend order

sequence.

Enabled when the override is a

number that exists in the

sequence. When Duplicate

Number is selected, the

remaining sequence numbers is

unaffected.

Disabled and checked if the

override is already in the

sequence and there is more than

one bend with the same

number.

Help Open this page.

OK Accept the input, update the displayed

bend order sequence, and close the dialog

box.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Flat Patterns >

Cosmetic Centerline

Flat Pattern Cosmetic Centerline

Convert flat pattern sketch line geometry to Cosmetic Centerlines that carry

manufacturing attributes including bend extent lines, bend direction, and bend

angle.

Access: Ribbon: Flat Pattern tab Create panel Cosmetic Centerline

Sketched Bend Lines

Selection tool used to select sketched

lines that are used to create cosmetic

centerlines.

Manufacturing Information

Information

Type

Choices include:

1. None - No attribution is

required on the resulting

cosmetic centerlines.

2. Press Brake - The resulting

cosmetic centerlines provide

press brake attributes.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

3. Crease - The resulting cosmetic

centerlines represent stiffening

creases.

Change the up/down attribute associated

with the cosmetic centerline.

Check box for

Bend Angle

Displayed when Information Type is

Crease. Allows a bend angle attribute to

be specified.

Bend Angle Data entry field. Allows input of a bend

angle value.

Check box for

Radius

Displayed when Information Type is

Crease. Allows the radius attribute to be

specified.

Radius Data entry field. Allows input of a radius

value. Defaults to the Bend Radius

specified in the active sheet metal rule.

Unfold Rule Displayed when Information Type is Press

Brake. Drop-down selection field which

allows selection of existing Unfold Rules.

Allows an Unfold Rule to be associated

with the cosmetic centerline. Defaults to

Default_KFactor.

Help Open this page.

OK Accept the input, create the cosmetic

centerlines, and close the dialog box.

Cancel Discard any input and close the dialog

box.

Apply Accept the input and create the cosmetic

centerlines, but leave the dialog box open

to allow additional cosmetic centerline

creation.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Bend Tables for sheet metal materials

Sheet metal bend table example

Note Resize the window as needed to see the entire table.

;

; Use an ASCII file editor to customize the values to your specific conditions. All

bend radius columns must contain values.

;

;-----------------------------------------------------------------------

;

; Notations used in tables:

;

; ';' = remark character

;

; '*' = start of a new table

;

; '/' = special character

; U = units of tolerance; thickness; bend radius; and correction values

; m; cm; mm; micron; in; ft; or yd

; S = sheet thickness

; R = bending radii

; A = opening angle

; T1 = Tolerance (+/-) for sheet thickness S (valid for the whole file)

; T2 = tolerance for equal min and max bending radius R

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

; The T2 tolerance is used at the minimum and maximum

; bending radii R in the tables. For model bend radii that fall

; between two values existing in the table, the resultant

; correction value X is determined by linear interpolation

; using the appropriate x values in the table.

; T3 = tolerance for equal min and max opening angle A

; The T3 tolerance is used at the minimum and maximum

; opening angles A in the tables. For model opening angles

; that fall between two values existing in the table, the

; resultant correction value X is determined by linear

; interpolation using the appropriate X values in the table.

;

;-----------------------------------------------------------------------

;

; The correction value X is applied as follows:

;

; L = A + B - x

;

; (L = unfolded length in flat pattern)

; (A = length of side A (outside measurement of bending zone))

; (B = length of side B (outside measurement of bending zone))

;

;-----------------------------------------------------------------------

;

; Angle A expressed in degrees.

;

;-----------------------------------------------------------------------

;

;

;UNITS for tolerance; thickness; bend radius and correction values

/Ucm

;

;TOLERANCES valid for the whole file

;

/T10.000100

/T20.010000

/T30.010000

;

*** TABLE 1

;

;sheet thickness

/S0.050000

;

; bending

radii

/R 0.500000 1.000000 1.500000 2.000000

; opening

angle

-------------------- correction value x ------------------

-

/A 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000

/A 5.000000 0.029508 0.026252 0.024359 0.023024

/A 10.000000 0.059349 0.053004 0.049384 0.046881

/A 15.000000 0.089863 0.080765 0.075755 0.072419

/A 20.000000 0.121398 0.110057 0.104168 0.100510

/A 25.000000 0.154319 0.141429 0.135353 0.132067

/A 30.000000 0.189014 0.175462 0.170086 0.168059

/A 35.000000 0.225899 0.212779 0.209200 0.209526

/A 40.000000 0.265428 0.254063 0.253600 0.257602

/A 45.000000 0.308101 0.300062 0.304289 0.313537

/A 50.000000 0.354475 0.351613 0.362380 0.378726

/A 55.000000 0.405180 0.409660 0.429132 0.454742

/A 60.000000 0.460932 0.475279 0.505980 0.543377

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Custom Unfold Equations

Sheet metal custom unfold equation bounding conditions edit dialog box

Allows edit of the bounding condition associated with a specific custom unfold

equation.

Access:

When the Unfold Method selected on the Style and Standard

dialog box is Custom Equation, double-click a Bounding

Condition cell on the dialog box.

Top Row

Lower

Equality

Operator

Drop-down selection that includes the equality

operators: less than, less than or equal, equal.

Range Type Drop-down selection that includes range variables

to define: angle, thickness, radius.

Upper

Equality

Operator

Drop-down selection that includes the equality

operators: less than, less than or equal, equal.

Bottom Row

Lower Limit Value entry field to define the lower bounding

limit.

Range

Equality

Indicates range type and equalities. Edit using

drop-down selections in top row.

Upper Limit Value entry field to define the upper bounding

limit.

Help Open this page.

OK Accept the bounding condition and close the

dialog box.

Cancel Discard any edits to the bounding condition and

close the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Export part and sheet metal faces, flatpatterns

With a single model face (or flat pattern) selected,

you can use Export Face As (from the context menu)

to export to several different file formats.

Use Export Face As to export all loops on a single planar face. The command is

available within the part, sheet metal, or assembly environments. The face loops

can be exported to either .dxf or .dwg file format. The loop data is processed

during the publishing routine. All geometry is moved to a location where

coordinates have positive values and the outer profile is converted into a polyline.

This option is helpful for certain types of manufacturing equipment which require

a polyline for direct consumption of .dxf and .dwg data. Export Face As is

available while working on the flat pattern of a sheet metal part to export the

entire flat pattern when the creation of a polyline is required.

In the sheet metal environment, Export Face As is available for both the flat

pattern and the folded part.

Use Save Copy As to export sheet metal flat patterns to .sat, .dxf, and .dwg file

formats. You can export the entire flat pattern by selecting Save Copy As from

the flat pattern browser node context menu while the flat pattern is displayed.

The Save Copy As command is recommended if there is no polyline requirement

for the exported flat pattern. Save Copy As produces the most complete and

accurate representation of the flat pattern. For example, the loops on all faces

are exported; all data are classified and exported to appropriate layers;

countersunk holes show the correct inner diameter, and so on.

Click Options in the Save Copy As dialog box to customize the file version being

exported. For .dxf and .dwg file types, additional options are available to

customize post-process routines using an xml script.

There are two controlling .xml files. FlatPattern.xml is used by the Save Copy As

command when exporting from the flat pattern. FaceLoops.xml is used by the

Export As Face command. Before you export, depending on your particular

workflow requirements, you may want to set up the flat pattern export options in

the relevant .xml file. The .xml files by default are stored in the:

Windows XP: Program Files/Autodesk/Inventor(version)/Design Data/DWG-DXF

folder.

Vista: Users/Public/Documents/Autodesk/Inventor(version)/Design Data/DWG-

DXF folder.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Sheet Metal Tips

Sheet metal parts are different from regular parts

Decide how to create sheet metal parts

Create stamped features in a sheet metal part

Use industry standard material styles

Use the Parameters command to change parameter names and values

Plan how to show features in flat patterns

Creating a flat pattern of a rolled part

Features with elliptical or spline profile geometry

Autodesk Inventor >

Assemblies

Topics in this section

Build assemblies

Bills of materials

Representations

Functional design overview

Component Generators

Calculators

Content Center

Build structural frames with Frame Generator

Weldments

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Build assemblies

Topics in this section

Fundamentals

Top-down design

Components

Constraints

Modifications

Features

Productivity Tools

Physical Properties

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Fundamentals

Topics in this section

Assembly modeling environment

Work smart in assemblies

Strategies for productivity in assemblies

Dependencies in assemblies

Templates for assemblies

Assembly browser

Adjust the browser hierarchy

Improve workflow with user-defined folders

Assembly coordinate system

Model in assembly section views

Cross-part sketches in assemblies

Resolve a file search

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Assembly modeling environment

Assembly tools

Access: Windows XP:

Run Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor

[revision]\SDK\Tools\Users\AssemblyTools\setup.exe. On the

ribbon, click the Assembly Tools tab.

Vista:

Run Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Inventor

[revision]\SDK\Tools\Users\AssemblyTools\setup.exe. On the

ribbon, click the Assembly Tools tab.

Rename Browser Nodes

Add Part

Add Assembly

Save and Replace Component

Ground and Root Component

Component Derive

Place at Component Origin

Alpha Sort Components

Concept Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Work smart in assemblies

Enhance performance and capacity

Performance and capacity tips

A note on performance and capacity

File migration

Application Options tips

Projects: general best practices

Assembly selection filters and Design View representations

Autodesk Inventor 3 GB feature

Additional capacity tips

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Strategies for productivity inassemblies

Using Autodesk Inventor, you can manipulate component size and position, see

assemblies in various views, see assemblies with components in different

positions, select components based on certain criteria, and make components

visible or invisible.

Click a link below to learn more about how and when to use these commands. In

each topic, click the Procedure tab to go to a step-by-step procedure.

Move components

Move an unconstrained component, a component and all components

constrained to it, or simulate mechanical motion by driving constraints.

Constrain components automatically

Use iMates to constrain frequently used components together in an

assembly.

Collision and contact

Detect collision when driving constraints and facilitate contact between

components.

Component selection sets

Select a group of components based on specific criteria.

Flexible assemblies

Each flexible assembly instance solves separately, so that each instance

can be in a unique position.

Adaptive components

All instances of an adaptive assembly adapt size and position relative to

constrained objects.

Derived parts and assemblies

Capture design intent using selected sketches, a part, or multiple

assembly components as the base component in a new part or

assembly.

Design View representations

Save multiple Design View representations within an assembly to

preserve different display configurations, including component visibility,

enabled state, and color overrides.

Positional representations

Capture kinematic "snapshots" of assemblies to evaluate various

assembly positions and conduct motion studies. Retrieve later for further

analysis or modification.

Level of Detail representations

Specify which components are loaded into memory. Create several

representations to load different components of the assembly for

different tasks.

Take advantage of the three system-supplied Level of Detail

representations when appropriate. Oftentimes, starting with nothing

loaded (such as All Components Suppressed) and then loading only the

components of interest is more efficient than loading the entire

assembly.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Dependencies in assemblies

The assembly browser is a hierarchical structure that shows component

relationships and dependencies. Component relationships are defined by assembly

constraints that control position and size and determine how adaptive components

change.

How does position in the browser affect component behavior?

What affects component position?

What affects component size?

How are adaptive components controlled?

Can dependencies be derived from equations?

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Templates for assemblies

Create templates for assemblies

All new assembly files are created with a template. You can create your own

templates and add them to the templates provided by Autodesk Inventor.

1. Create an assembly, using an existing template.

2. Set the default units of measurement.

3. If needed, change the sizes of the origin work planes to accommodate

the average assembly size.

4. Set the properties for the file.

5. Save the file in the Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates folder or a

subfolder of Templates. An assembly file automatically becomes a

template when it is saved to the Templates folder.

Note The file standard.iam in the Templates folder is the default assembly

template. To replace the default template, remove standard.iam and replace it

with a template that has the same name.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Assembly browser

Assembly browser

Graphically illustrates assembly hierarchy. Shows and hides selected components,

filters, and arranges contents, manages access to component and constraint

editing, and provides alternate access to functions from the context menu.

Controls assembly feature roll back and participation of components in each

feature.

Access: In an assembly file, click item to select, and then right-click to

display context menu.

Browser filters

Representations

Browser views

Find

Context menu options

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Adjust the browser hierarchy

Restructure assemblies

You can move one or more existing components, including component patterns,

within an assembly or from one assembly to another assembly. You must have

read and write privileges to the origin and target assembly files.

A component does not move relative to other components in the graphics window,

even when you change its position in the assembly browser. Constraints between

components that originate from the same parent assembly or subassembly are

retained.

Restructure an assembly by dragging a component

Restructure an assembly using Promote and Demote

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Improve workflow with user-definedfolders

Create and use folders

Create browser folders and use them based on your design needs. You can

choose to populate your assembly browser with folders before you have placed a

single component. Then, as you place components and create features, you move

the browser nodes into the appropriate folders. Alternatively, you can completely

design your assembly, then define your folders and move browser nodes into

them. Use these techniques, or a combination thereof, to order and simplify your

assembly browser.

You have two methods available to create your browser folders. You can create

empty folders, or pre-select browser nodes and add them to new folders.

Create new folder

Add to new folder

Select folder items

Edit folders: drag and drop behavior

Delete folder

Tips

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Assembly coordinate system

The assembly coordinate system describes component position in an assembly

along three axes: the X axis (the horizontal reference), the Y axis (the vertical

reference), and the Z axis (the depth reference).

Where is the origin of the assembly coordinate system?

What is the location of the first placed component?

Can a part have an absolute position?

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Model in assembly section views

Create assembly section views

Create a section view to visualize portions of an

assembly within chambers or obscured by

components. While the assembly is sectioned,

use part and assembly commands to create or

modify parts in the assembly context.

To begin, open an assembly file containing one or

more components.

1. If appropriate, specify if you want to section standard parts in the

assembly. Click Options Assembly tab. Select the Section

All Parts check box.

2. Set visibility for components. Select the component in the graphics

window or the browser, then:

To hide components, right-click and clear the check mark

beside Visibility.

To show components in wireframe for context, right-click and

clear the check mark beside Enabled.

3. On the View tab, Appearance panel, click one of the Section View

commands, then select any planar or work plane to define the cutting

plane.

Creates Quarter section view.

Creates Half section view.

Concept Procedure

Creates Three-Quarter section view.

Sets assembly to no section view.

Note From Quarter section and Three-quarter section views, you

can right-click and select the opposite view.

4. Right-click and select Flip, if necessary, to display the desired view of

the section.

5. On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Create. When

prompted to select a sketch plane, select the plane used to define the

section.

6. If desired, click Sketch tab Draw panel Project Cut Edges to

project edges of a part cut by the section plane onto the sketch plane.

7. Use sketch and feature commands to create new geometry.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Cross-part sketches in assemblies

Break links from referenced sketches

When creating a part in an assembly, you can project edges, loops, and faces

from one part into the sketch of the new part feature. By default, the resulting

geometry is a cross-part sketch.

The Cross Part Geometry Projection option on the Assembly tab of the Application

Options dialog box makes the projected geometry associative to the parent part

by default. If you later want to make the associative part independent of its

parent part in the assembly, you can break the associative link.

To begin, open the assembly containing the part with the link you want to break:

1. In the browser, expand the assembly hierarchy, right-click the part you

want to make independent, and then select Edit.

2. Expand the feature containing the reference sketch. Right-click the

Reference sketch symbol , and then select Break Link. The

Reference sketch symbol is removed from the browser.

The sketch geometry changes from reference geometry to normal

geometry. You can add dimensions and constraints as needed.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Resolve a file search

Resolve Link

Provides a method to specify the current location of a file that is not found

automatically when you open an Autodesk Inventor assembly.

Access: The Resolve Link dialog box opens if the automatic search for a

referenced file fails when the referencing file is opened. The

automatic search fails to find a file if:

Paths to referenced files are not specified in the active project.

The referenced file or a folder that contained it was renamed, moved, or

deleted, and no longer exists within any of the storage locations defined

by the active project.

The file was moved from one library to another.

The file was moved from one subfolder to another within a storage

location or a library.

The file was moved from one subfolder to another within a storage

location.

Look in Displays the active path. To change the path,

click the arrow and navigate to the desired

folder.

Locations Shows each file location and its subfolders

defined in the project. Click a file location to

make it active. The contents of the location are

listed in the main window of the dialog box. Click

a file to see a preview.

File name The name of the file that is being referenced, or

the file name selected in the main window of the

dialog box.

File of type Filters the file list of files to include only files of a

specific type. Click the arrow to display the list,

and then click to select a file type.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Open Opens the selected file.

Find Opens the Find dialog box so that you can define

searches to find files.

Skip Discontinues search for the specified file. The

assembly, drawing, or presentation opens without

the referenced file.

A skipped file is marked with a red question mark

in the assembly browser and is not shown in the

graphic window. You can select an unresolved file

and delete it or replace it.

Note You cannot create a drawing view or

assembly presentation or open a drawing or

presentation of an assembly with skipped

components.

Skip All Discontinues search for all files with unresolved

links. The assembly opens without the referenced

components.

Unresolved Reference

File Name The name of the referenced component file that

is not found.

Relative Path The subdirectory where files are being searched,

relative to each storage location defined in the

active project.

Library Name The name of the library from which the searched

component is referenced. Available only if the

missing component is referenced from a library.

File containing

the reference

The name of the file that is being opened and

that contains the component reference that is not

found.

Library The name of the library where the source file is

found. Available only if the source file is a library.

Cancel Ends the top level Open operation.

(More)

Search for

other

unresolved

references

using the

Check to activate the search for other unresolved

references using the information you enter in the

Substitution Rule section. Remove the check

mark if you do not want to search for other

unresolved references using the information you

using the

following rule.

unresolved references using the information you

enter.

Substitution

Rule

Use this section if you can enter path information

to locate missing components.

Leading portion

of the

Referenced

relative Path to

replace

The portion of the existing referenced relative

path to replace to find the missing referenced

component.

Replacement

Path

Enter the path to a location where the missing

referenced component can be found.

Replacement

Library

Enter the name of the library where the missing

referenced library component can be found.

Available only if the missing component is

referenced from a library.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Top-down design

Topics in this section

Top-down, bottom-up, middle-out design

Layout

Sketch blocks in layouts

Make part and make components

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Top-down design >

Top-down, bottom-up, middle-outdesign

Skeletal Modeling

Skeletal Modeling (a type of Top-down Design) is a technique that facilitates

centralized design criteria and creates components that reference those criteria.

Although many variations of this technique exist, the basic workflows are as

follows.

Note Use the common origin workflow to derive shape and position to your new

components. Use the position independent workflow to derive shape only. With

position independent components, changes to the position of sketch geometry in

your layout do not require component revisions. Also use the position independent

workflow with sketch blocks to create kinematic layouts; Make Components

translates sketch constraints to equivalent assembly constraints to achieve the

kinematic behavior.

Common origin

Position independent

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Top-down design >

Layout

Make layout

Creates a layout part in an assembly.

Access:

Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Make Layout

New

Layout

Name

Input name of your new part file.

Template Select or browse to the part template from which the

new file is created.

New File

Location

Input or browse to the save location for the new file.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Top-down design >

Sketch blocks in layouts

Use sketch blocks in your layout to represent components. Once a sketch block is

created, you can easily add instances of the block to your layout. For components

used in multiple locations, it provides a quick, associative method for adding them

to the design. Any changes to the block definition are propagated to all block

instances.

A powerful use of sketch blocks is the creation of flexible, nested blocks. This type

of block allows you to simulate assembly and subassembly kinematics in your

layout. You can evaluate your design and change the design before you make

components. You can also evaluate the impact of any changes in your design. If

changes to the sketch block definition are made, the block instances are updated.

Note Sketch blocks can be constrained to other sketch blocks, as well as

projected and primitive geometry. However, only sketch constraints between

blocks are translated during the Make Components workflow.

Learn more about sketch blocks.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Top-down design >

Make part and make components

Make part

Creates a part file and derives the selected objects from the source part into the

new part.

Access:

Ribbon: Manage tab Layout panel Make Part

Ribbon: Sketch tab Layout panel Make Part

Derive

style

Derives a single, merged body without seams

between planar faces.

Derives a single solid body with seams between

planar faces.

Individual component colors of planar faces are

preserved.

Derives a single part that retains each component as

an individual solid body. For example, an assembly with

20 parts derives to a part with 20 solid bodies.

Derives a single composite surface feature. The

composite retains the seams between planar faces and

preserves unique part colors.

Status Includes the selected objects in the derive operation.

Some child objects are included and some excluded.

Excludes the selected objects from the derive

operation.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Part

information

Part name. Enter the name of your new part.

Template. Select or browse to the part template from

which the new part is created.

New file location. Enter or browse to the location

where the new part is saved. Use to select a part that

exists, if appropriate.

Default BOM structure. Select the bill of materials

structure for the new part.

Place part

in target

assembly

Select to place the new part into an assembly. If this

option is selected, the Make Part process will:

Create a target assembly and insert your new

part. The part is grounded at the assembly

origin.

Open the target assembly as the active

window. The new part and target assembly are

not automatically saved to disk. You save both

when the target assembly is saved.

If this option is cleared, the Make Part process will:

Create a part file.

Open the part file as the active window. The

part file is not automatically saved. Save the

new file.

Assembly

information

Target assembly name. Enter the name of your new

assembly.

Template. Select or browse to the assembly template

from which the new assembly is created.

New file location. Enter or browse to the location

where the new assembly is saved. Use to select an

assembly that exists, if appropriate.

Default BOM structure. Select the bill of materials

structure for the new assembly.

Show all

objects

Select to show all derivable objects regardless of their

Export status.

Scale

factor

Select or enter a scale factor to apply to the derived

objects. The default value is 1.0.

Note Selected sketch block definitions and their

instances are scaled. The scale factor is appended to the

block name to indicate the block was scaled.

Mirror

assembly

Select to mirror the assembly. Specify the XY, XZ, or YZ

origin work plane as the mirror plane.

Note Sketch block instances of selected block definitions

are mirrored. However, the block definitions are not

mirrored.

OK Click OK to execute Make Part and close the dialog box.

The target part and target assembly are not saved to

disk. You save both when the target assembly is closed.

Apply Click Apply to execute Make Part and keep open the

dialog box. The target part and target assembly are

saved to disk but neither are opened. The source part

window remains open and the Make Part command

remains active so you can continue to select different

objects and create more parts.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Components

Topics in this section

Assembly components

Choose the first assembly component

Place components in assemblies

Adjust visibility of components

Create parts in assemblies

iAssemblies

iAssembly auto-capture

Assembly components in patterns

Copied assembly components

Mirrored assembly components

Occurrence properties in components

Use colors to distinguish components

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Assembly components

Place or Replace Component

Specifies one or more files to place as a component in an assembly.

Note You can open multiple files that are in sequence by holding down the SHIFT

key. You can also select multiple files that are not in sequence by holding down

the CTRL key.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel

Place

In an assembly file, right-click an assembly in

the browser and select Component Replace

Component.

Quick Launch If you have Vault installed and are placing (or

replacing) a file in the vault, click Open from

Vault located under Quick Launch for immediate

access to your vaulted files.

Look in Shows path of the active directory.

File list The main window shows a list of the subfolders

and files in the selected path. Double-click a

subfolder to show the files it contains, or click a

file to select it. You can also double-click the file

to open it.

File name Specifies the file to open, enter a file name, or

select a file from the listed files.

Files of type Filters file list to include only files of a specific

type. Click the arrow to show list, and then

highlight to select a file type.

Project File Displays the active project.

Open Places the selected file into the active assembly.

Cancel Cancels the file open operation and closes the

dialog box.

Find Opens the Find Files dialog box so you can

search for files based on file properties.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

search for files based on file properties.

Options Opens an options dialog box so that you can set

the options for the selected file.

Interactively

place with

iMates

Inserts components with matching iMates in an

assembly. You can place multiple instances of the

component. When placing members of an iPart or

iAssembly factory, iMates are matched according

to how they are specified in the factory. One

member may include iMates with no offset value,

while another can be offset a specified amount.

Automatically

generate iMates

on place

Inserts component and simultaneously solves all

accepted iMate matches. Terminates command

after each insertion.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Choose the first assembly component

Place the first assembly component

To begin creating an assembly, choose a fundamental part or subassembly such

as a frame or base plate as the first component. When the first component is

placed in the assembly, its origin is coincident and aligned with the assembly

coordinate origin. All degrees of freedom are removed from the first component.

1. To create a file, on the Quick Access toolbar, click

New, select an assembly template, and click OK.

2. On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component

panel Place to place the first component.

3. Go to the folder that contains the component, select

the component, and click Open. Alternately, if Vault

is installed and you open a file in the vault, click

Open from Vault located under Quick Launch for

immediate access to your vaulted files.

4. Click to continue placing occurrences of the

component as needed, right-click, and then select

Done.

If you must relocate the grounded component, use one of the following methods.

To restore degrees of freedom to the component

To enter precise displacement coordinates

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Place components in assemblies

Create in-place component

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Create

New

Component

Name

Specifies file name for the new component.

Template Sets the template used to create the file. Click

the button next to the Template list box to

display the Open Template dialog box.

New File

Location

Sets the location of the new file. To find the part

when the assembly is opened, specify its

directory by a path in the project used for the

assembly.

Default BOM

Structure

Sets the default BOM structure for the

component.

Note You can override the structure to be

Reference at the component instance level.

Virtual

Component

Select the check box to create a virtual

component.

Note A virtual component is a component that

requires no modeling of geometry and no file.

Constrain

sketch plane to

selected face

By default, a mate constraint is created between

the selected part face and the sketch plane. If

you prefer, clear the check box to prevent the

automatic constraint. The option is not available

if the new component is the first one in the

assembly.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Adjust visibility of components

Component visibility and enabled status

Sets component visibility in graphics on or off and sets component enabled status

(selectability) on or off. Visibility status determines whether a component

occurrence appears in the graphics window. The component is still loaded into

memory. Enabled status determines whether a component occurrence can be

selected. The component appears in the graphics window according to the Enabled

layout settings in the Application Options, Display tab. By default, the component

appears semi-transparent.

Adjust the visibility or enabled status from either the context menu or the

Properties dialog box, Occurrence tab.

Access: Select the component, right-click, and select either Visibility or

Enabled.

Visible and enabled components can be selected in the

graphics window.

Invisible components are not visible for selection in the

graphics window. Select an invisible component from the

browser, and then right-click to change its status. Double-click

an invisible component in the browser to edit it, and the status

changes to visible automatically.

Visible but not enabled components cannot be selected in the

graphics window. They are displayed in background style.

Show Me

Note It is possible to turn off component visibility but have the component still be

enabled. This technique is useful for quickly removing a needed component from

view. Enabled components are loaded in an assembly file, while only the graphic

portion of not enabled components are loaded. The assembly calculates faster

because the data structure of not enabled components is not present, but its

graphics are useful for a frame of reference.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Create parts in assemblies

Multiple components with older versions

When you save a file or first edit a component, a message warns you that

someone has edited a file while you had it open.

Access: Save or edit an assembly, drawing, or presentation file that

contains reserved components

OK Replaces changes made to the file by the other person.

More Click to show list of components, the name of the

person who changed it, and the date it changed.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

iAssemblies

iAssembly Author

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Create iAssembly

Author overview

iAssembly tabs

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

iAssembly auto-capture

When editing an iPart or iAssembly factory, you can use conventional modeling

commands to make edits that affect the table. This technique efficiently creates a

factory without requiring the table editor or Excel to make modifications.

Use the Edit Scope selector to switch the modeling scope between Edit Member

(the active row) and Edit Factory (all rows).

For Edit Member Scope, model edits that can be configured modify the active row

of the table. If a column for a modified item is not yet in the table, it is created,

with the new value set for the active row and the original value set for all other

rows. If the item is already configured in the table, the modification only changes

the cell in the current row. Other members are not updated with the change.

For Edit Factory Scope, edits to items that are already configured adjust all cells

in the column to match the new value. New columns are not created for

modifications to items that are not already in the table.

Note Use caution when applying a global change to all factory members. You

could inadvertently change a required value that works in the current member but

causes errors in another member.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Assembly components in patterns

Pattern components

Duplicates one or

more components

and arranges the

resulting occurrences

in a circular or

rectangular pattern.

Rectangular and

circular patterns can

use patterned

features on a part to

set number and

spacing.

Patterns may be made associative to a part feature pattern so that changes to

the pattern add to or subtract components in the assembly pattern. Individual or

all occurrences can have visibility turned on or off.

Constraints or iMates are retained whenever possible if they are included in a

pattern.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Pattern

Component

Associative tab

Rectangular tab

Circular tab

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Copied assembly components

Copy Components: Status

The Copy command creates copies of the selected components. You can copy,

create an instance of, or exclude the components that you select in the Copy

Components: Status dialog box.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Copy

The Copy command has two dialog boxes:

Copy Components: Status, which enables you to select components

and set copy status.

Copy Components: File Name, which enables you to designate the file

name. For more information about the File Names dialog box, see the

Mirror/Copy Components: File Names reference.

You can switch between the two dialog boxes.

The Copy Components: Status dialog box contains these elements:

Components Select the components in the graphics window or the

browser to include all child components in the copy

operation. If the copy status of the parent changes, all

children are reset to the same status automatically.

Status

commands

Provides the following command buttons, enabling you

to change the status on multiple selected components

at the same time.

Creates a copy of the component. Each copied

component is saved in a new file, which is not

associative to the source file.

Creates an instance of the component.

Excludes the component from the copy

operation.

Status symbols Indicates the status of components selected for copy,

creation of a new instance, or exclusion. In addition to

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Status symbolscreation of a new instance, or exclusion. In addition to

using the status command buttons at the top of the

dialog box, click an individual symbol to change its

status.

Indicates that a subassembly contains

components with different statuses.

Reuse Standard

Content and

Factory Parts

Restricts library components and iParts from being

copied. Instances of library parts and iParts are created

instead and are resident in the current assembly file.

Next Opens the Copy Components: File Names dialog box.

For more information about Copy Components: File

Names, see the Mirror/Copy Components: File Names

reference.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Mirrored assembly components

Mirror/Copy Components: File Names

The Mirror Components: File Names, or Copy Components: File Names dialog box

specifies names for part and assembly files created with the Mirror or Copy

command.

Access: Mirrored Components: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component

panel Mirror

When the components to mirror are selected, click Next in the

Mirror Components dialog box to open the Mirror Components:

File Names dialog box.

Copied Components: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component

panel Copy

When the components to copy are selected, click OK in the

Copy Components dialog box to open the Copy Components:

File Names dialog box.

Name Lists all components created by the mirror (or copy)

operation. Repeated components are shown only once.

New Name Lists names of new files. Click a name to edit. Right-click in

the New Name column, and select Find to search in listed file

names, or select Replace to find and replace a string in listed

file names.

If a name exists, new file names are enumerated sequentially

until a unique name is defined.

File

Location

Specifies where the new file is saved. Source Path is the

default and means that the file is saved at the same location

as the original component. Right-click to change the setting

to Workspace or User Path. To specify the User Path, click

the file location, and then type the path or browse for the

desired folder.

Status Indicates if the new file name is valid. Names created

automatically have a white background, manually renamed

files have a yellow background, and name conflicts are shown

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

files have a yellow background, and name conflicts are shown

with a red background.

New File Indicates the new file name is valid, and does

not exist in the file location.

Reuse

Existing

Indicates that the file name is already used in

the file location, but is a valid name for the

selected components. Assembly components

can be reused, however the entire assembly

must be like the source assembly. Reusing

parts has no restrictions.

Name

Conflict

Indicates that the file name exists in the file

location (for assemblies) or that there is

another instance of the same source assembly

with the same name.

Naming

Scheme

Renames selected components in the Name column with a

specified Prefix or Suffix (the default suffix is _MIR for

mirrored components and _CPY for copied components) after

you click Apply. Select Increment to name numbered files

incrementally. If you previously manually changed a name, it

is overwritten. Click Revert to return to previous version of

name.

Component

Destination

Specifies the destination of the mirrored or copied

components.

Insert in

Assembly

The default option places all new components

as peer objects in the top-level assembly.

Open in

New

Window

Opens a new window with the new assembly

containing all mirrored components.

Return to

Selection

Returns to the Mirror Components dialog box, where you can

select components.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Occurrence properties in components

iProperties - Occurrence tab

Controls characteristics for an individual occurrence of a component in an

assembly. Specifies whether the component is visible, enabled, adaptive,

grounded, or displays degrees of freedom. Sets occurrence name, color style, and

offset from parent assembly origin.

Access: In the browser, right-click a part or subassembly, select

iProperties, and then click the Occurrence tab.

Name

Properties

Current Offset from Parent Assembly Origin

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Use colors to distinguish components

Apply colors to components

All components are displayed in the As Material

color style, but you can use color to make a

complex assembly easier to interpret. For

example, instead of using the color associated

with the material specified for the component,

you can display all components created by one

vendor in one color. Display components from a

different vendor in a second color.

1. Select the component in the browser or the graphics window.

2. On the Quick Access toolbar, click the down arrow on the Color box.

3. Scroll through the color list and click to select one.

The color is applied to the component. If you create a design view representation,

the color preference is saved with that view.

Changing a component color in an assembly affects only that occurrence. It does

not change the material color in Occurrence Properties.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Constraints

Topics in this section

Introducing constraints

Assembly constraints overview

Degrees of freedom in assemblies

Assembly constraint errors and recovery

Component collision and contact

iMates

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints >

Introducing constraints

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints >

Assembly constraints overview

Assembly constraints - Constraint Set tab

Constraint Set enables you to constrain two UCSs together. You can select UCS in

part or assembly file.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Position panel Constrain, and then

click the Constraint Set tab.

Selections

Selects two UCSs to constrain together.

First UCS Selects the first UCS.

Second UCS Selects the second UCS. To select different first

UCS, click First UCS, and then reselect.

Pick Part First Limits the selectable UCS to a single

component. Use when UCSs are in close proximity or partially

obscure one another. Clear the check box to restore feature

priority selection mode.

Show Preview

Select the check box to preview the constraint to apply. Constraint set UCS to

UCS results in three Mate constraints, created between the corresponding pairs of

YZ, XZ, and XY planes.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints >

Degrees of freedom in assemblies

Restore degrees of freedom to grounded components

You can restore degrees of freedom to a grounded (base) component and

reposition it. Any components constrained to the grounded component also move.

1. Select the grounded component in the graphics window or the browser.

2. Right-click the component, and then clear the Grounded check mark.

3. Drag the component to the new location, right-click, and select

Grounded to fix the location.

Grounded components are identified by a pushpin icon in the

browser.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints >

Assembly constraint errors andrecovery

Isolate assembly components

Use Isolate to turn off visibility of all components except the components you

selected.

You can progressively isolate components by starting at a high-level assembly,

and work down the browser tree, isolating to smaller sets of components.

1. In an assembly, click the components you want to isolate in the

graphics window or the browser.

2. Right-click, and then select Isolate. All unselected components are set

to Invisible status.

Use Undo Isolate instead of Undo to restore components to the pre-isolation

state. Undo "backs up" through the last-performed operations in reverse order,

including isolation. Right-click in the graphics window or the browser, and then

select Undo Isolate. Component visibility is turned back on to the state before

they were isolated, but unlike Undo, operations performed in the isolated state

remain intact.

Undo Isolate is available only after you isolate components.

Note Use Isolate to identify constraint errors. For example:

When the Design Doctor displays, use Isolate as a treatment to find the

constraint.

Right-click a component in the browser and select Isolate Constraint. All

components are made invisible except the two participants in the

constraint.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints >

Component collision and contact

Detect contact between assembly components

The contact solver isolates

selected components in a

contact set so you can

determine if the components

behave in a mechanical motion

as expected. Apply constraints

to position the components as

intended, and designate

components to include in the

contact set, and move the

components or drive constraints

to simulate the action.

Open an assembly with components you must evaluate for contact.

1. Activate the Contact Solver. On the ribbon, click Tools tab Options

panel Document Settings Modeling tab.

2. In the Interactive Contact box, select:

Contact Set Only to limit participation in contact analysis to

the selected components.

All Components to analyze all components in the assembly for

contact.

Contact Solver Off to turn off solver analysis.

Concept Procedure

Surface Complexity to specify the level of performance

according to surface complexity. Not available if Contact Solve

Off is selected.

Click Apply to continue selecting options or OK to close the dialog box.

Note If you prefer, select Inspect tab Interference panel Activate

Contact Solver. This option switches the setting on the Document

Settings Modeling tab on and off.

3. In the browser, right-click one or more components and select Contact

Set to include them in the contact set.

If you prefer, right-click one or more components, and select

Properties. On the Occurrence tab, select the Contact Set option, and

then click OK.

4. Move the components or drive constraints through the intended

motion.

Correctly positioned components should complete the motion as

intended. If necessary, adjust the component positions and repeat the

analysis.

Note On the context menu, clear the check mark on Visibility or Enabled to

remove the components from analysis for contact, interference, or collision.

Reference components are analyzed regardless of visibility or enabled status.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints >

iMates

Create an iPart factory

Create iMates

Modify an iMate

Place components that have matching iMates

Control iMate visibility

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > iMates >

Use iMates in iParts and iAssemblies

Create an iPart factory

A good candidate for an iPart factory is a basic part you use often in different

sizes, materials, or mounting configurations. When you transform a part to an

iPart factory, you define the parameters and properties that must change for each

part.

You can also create a table-driven iPart and use it to create a table-driven

iFeature if the entire part is going to be used as an iFeature. Use the Extract

iFeature command to save the iPart as an iFeature. Once the table-driven

iFeature is saved to the catalog location, use the iFeature Author to make

changes to the table.

Note There is no link between the original iPart and the iFeature. Save the part

file if you want to preserve a copy of the original iPart.

Concept Procedure

In the iPart Author table, you define individual members of the iPart factory by

specifying its values. If you prefer, you can add or edit members in an embedded

Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. For standard iParts, each table row is a member of

the iPart.

In previous versions, legacy iParts concatenated Key values to create a file name.

Now, a Member column in the iPart table generates a default file name based on

the factory name. Each member name is incremented. Optionally, click Options in

the iPart Author dialog box to set up a different naming scheme, or enter a new

name in the member cell.

You can create a standard iPart factory or a custom iPart factory.

Note Add the file locations to the active project because iPart members are

stored according to your search paths in the active project.

Set up part parameters

Create a standard iPart

Create a custom iPart

Generate new member files

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > iMates >

iMate fundamentals

Infer (Feature) iMates

Creates iMates on hole, revolve, and circular extruded part and assembly

features.

Note Inferred iMate definitions are placed only on closed loops.

Access: In the browser, right-click a feature, and then select Infer

iMates.

Name Enter a name to apply to all inferred iMate

definitions. If you leave the Name field blank, the

name is automatically assigned according to the

constraint type.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > iMates >

Name and match iMates

Create iMate

Defines constraint pairs called iMates to

specify how parts connect when inserted

in an assembly.

iMates are identified by symbols that show

the type and state of the iMate, and can

be renamed to correspond with a

matching constraint in other parts.

Multiple iMates can be defined on a single

part.

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel iMate

Assembly tab

Motion tab

Name and Match List

Concept Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Modifications

Topics in this section

Edit assemblies

Move and rotate assembly components

Replace assembly components

Delete assembly components

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications >

Edit assemblies

Update part and assembly files

The Update command incorporates changes to parts or assembly components that

are held in memory from the current editing session. The graphics window and

browser update to show the changes. The Update command changes to indicate

whether an assembly is fully up to date.

When significant changes have been made to a part file or assembly component

(for example, editing a part in the assembly, placing a constraint, or editing a

constraint), Global Update is the default choice.

You can trigger Update automatically or set an option to defer updates while you

continue to work. When deferring updates, part positions will not change until you

use the Update command.

To defer updates:

1. On the ribbon, click Tools tab Options panel Application Options.

2. Click the Assembly tab, and then select the Defer Update check box to

defer updates until you click Update in the active file.

3. Clear the check box to update automatically.

To manually apply edits to a part file or to one or all components of the current

assembly:

1. Click the arrow beside the Update command on the Quick Access

toolbar.

2. Select the appropriate option:

Click Global Update when one or more components have

significant changes. All components, including the top-

level assembly, update.

Click Update to regenerate only the active part or

subassembly and its dependent children.

The Update command dims to show the file is fully up-to-date.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications >

Move and rotate assemblycomponents

Grip Snap Move Options Bar

Provides a set of icons that represent the possible options available to define the

behavior of the geometric entity you selected.

Access: With the Grip Snap command active,

the move option icons are displayed

when you select the geometry you

want to use as the basis of a move or

rotation.

The Back icon is always included so that you can back out of your selections

and deselect the geometry while keeping the command active.

Move option selections and results

Point as first selection, followed by:

Move Option

Selection

Second

Selection

Third

SelectionResult for selection set:

Free Drag none Repositioned so the origin is

coincident with the selected

point in space.

point Moved to a position defined

by the selected snap point.

line Moved to a position defined

by the cursor on the

selected line.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

plane Moved to a position defined

by the cursor on the

selected plane.

Reference

Geometry

Displacement

point Moved (as applied to the

point originally selected as

the origin of the selection

set) by the direction and

magnitude derived from the

2 points selected.

line Moved (as applied to the

point originally selected as

the origin of the selection

set) by the direction and

magnitude derived from the

lines definition.

Free Rotate none Rotated about its origin point

in all 3 planes. The selected

point in space defines the

termination point for the

rotation whip.

Reference

Geometry

Rotate

point point Rotated about an axis

defined by the 2 points

selected (Cross Product) The

angle of rotation is taken

from the same 2 points (Dot

Product).

Line (linear edge, work axis, centerline, implicit ray) as first selection,

followed by:

Move Option

Selection

Second

Selection

Third

SelectionResult for selection set:

Free Drag none Repositioned so the cursor

pick point origin on the edge

is coincident with the

selected point in space.

point Moved to a position defined

by the selected snap point.

line Based upon the pick point,

moved to a position defined

moved to a position defined

by a selected pick point on

the line. Collinearity is

established.

Move Along

Ray

none Moved to a position defined

by the selected point in

space along the ray of

displacement.

plane Moved to a position defined

by the intersection of the

endpoint of the line (select

other to toggle) and an

intersection plane. You can

enter an offset value.

Reference

Geometry

Displacement

Along Ray

point Point Moved the magnitude of the

component derived from the

2 points selected along the

ray of displacement.

line Moved the magnitude of the

component derived from the

lines definition along the ray

of displacement.

Free Rotate none Rotated about an axis

defined by the selected line.

The selected point in space

defines the input for the

rotation angle.

point Rotated about an axis

defined by the selected line.

The selected snap point

defines the input for the

rotation angle.

Reference

Geometry

Rotate

point Point Rotated about an axis

defined by the selected line.

The angle of rotation is

derived from selected points.

You can enter an offset

value.

line Line Rotated about an axis

defined by the selected line.

defined by the selected line.

The angle of rotation is

derived from selected lines

(must be parallel to axis of

rotation). You can enter an

offset value.

plane Plane Rotated about an axis

defined by the selected line.

The angle of rotation is

derived from the normal of

the selected planes (must

not intersect the axis of

rotation). You can enter an

offset value.

Curve (spline edge) as first selection, followed by:

Move Option

Selection

Second

Selection

Third

SelectionResult for selection set:

Free Drag none Repositioned so the cursor

pick point origin on the

curve is coincident with the

selected point in space.

point Repositioned so the cursor

pick point origin on the

curve is coincident with the

selected snap point.

line/edge Repositioned so the cursor

pick point origin on the

curve is coincident with the

selected point on the

line/edge.

plane/surface Repositioned so the cursor

pick point origin on the

curve is coincident with the

selected point on the face

or surface.

Reference

Geometry

Displacement

point point Moved by the direction and

magnitude derived from

the 2 points selected.

line Moved by the direction and

magnitude derived from

the definition of the line.

Circle - Vector (circular edge, arc edge) as first selection, followed by:

Move

Option

Selection

Second

Selection

Third

SelectionResult for selection set:

Free Drag none Repositioned so the cursor

pick point origin on the

edge is coincident with the

selected point in space.

point Repositioned so the cursor

pick point origin on the

edge is coincident with the

selected snap point.

line Repositioned so the cursor

pick point origin on the

edge is coincident with the

selected point on the line.

circular/arc

edge

Repositioned so the origin

edge is coplanar with the

selected circular/arc edge

and the respective

centerlines/vectors are

collinear. An insert is

established and flip is used

to change between inside

and outside.

analytic/NURB

surface

Repositioned so the cursor

pick point origin on the

edge is coincident with the

selected point on the

surface.

Move Along

Ray

none Moved to a position defined

by selected point in space

along the ray of

displacement.

plane Moved to a position defined

by the intersection of the

endpoint of the line (select

other to toggle) and an

intersection plane. You can

enter a value for the offset.

Reference

Geometry

Displacement

Along Ray

point point Moved the magnitude of the

component derived from the

2 points selected along the

ray of displacement.

line Moved the magnitude of the

component derived from the

lines definition along the ray

of displacement.

Free Rotate none Rotated about an axis

defined by the circle-vector

centerline. A selected point

in space defines the input

for the rotation angle.

point Rotated about an axis

defined by the circle-vector

centerline. The angle of

rotation is derived from the

selected snap point.

Reference

Geometry

Rotate

point point Rotated about an axis

defined by the circle-vector

centerline. The angle of

rotation is derived from the

selected points. You can

enter an offset value.

line line Rotated about an axis

defined by the circle-vector

centerline. The angle of

rotation is derived from the

selected lines (must be

parallel to axis of rotation).

You can enter an offset

value.

plane plane Rotated about an axis

defined by the circle-vector

centerline. The angle of

centerline. The angle of

rotation is derived from the

normal of the selected

planes (must not intersect

the axis of rotation). You

can enter an offset value.

Plane (planar face, work plane) as first selection, in Grip Snap followed

by:

Move Option

Selection

Second

Selection

Third

SelectionResult for selection set:

Free Drag none Positioned so that the cursor

pick point origin on the plane

is coincident with the

selected point in space.

point Based upon the cursor pick

point, moved to a position

defined by the selected snap

point.

line Repositioned so that the

cursor pick point origin on

the plane is coincident with

the selected point on the

line/edge.

plane Based upon the cursor pick

point, moved to a position

defined by the selected pick

point on the plane. A

coplanar condition is

established, and you can use

flip to change between mate

and flush.

Move Planar none Repositioned (within the

restricted plane defined by

the initial selection) so that

the cursor pick point origin

on the plane is coincident

with the selected relative

point in space.

Reference

Geometry

Displacement

Within Plane

point Point Moved the magnitude of the

component derived from the

2 points selected within the

plane of displacement.

line Moved the magnitude of the

component derived from the

definition of the line within

the plane of displacement.

Move Along

Normal

none Moved to a position defined

by the selected point in

space along the ray of

displacement.

Reference

Geometry

Displacement

Along Normal

point Point Moved the magnitude of the

component derived from the

2 points selected along the

ray of displacement.

line Moved the magnitude of the

component derived from the

lines definition along the ray

of displacement.

Analytical Surface (Cylindrical, spherical, conical, toroidal face) as first

selection:

Move Option

Selection

Second

Selection

Third

SelectionResult for selection set:

Free Drag none Repositioned so that the

cursor pick point origin on the

analytical surface is coincident

with the selected point in

space.

point Repositioned so that the

cursor pick point origin on the

analytical surface is coincident

with the selected snap point.

line/edge Repositioned so that the

cursor pick point origin on the

analytical surface is coincident

with the selected point on the

line or edge.

line or edge.

face/plane Repositioned so that the

cursor pick point origin on the

analytical surface is coincident

with the selected point on the

face or plane.

cylindrical,

spherical,

conical &

toroidal

surfaces

Repositioned so that the

cursor pick point origin on the

analytical surface is coincident

with the selected point on the

destination surface. A

tangency is established, and

you can use flip to change

between inside and outside.

NURB

surface

Repositioned so that the

cursor pick point origin on the

analytical surface is coincident

with the selected point on the

NURB surface.

Reference

Geometry

Displacement

point point Moved the magnitude of the

component derived from the 2

points selected within the

plane of displacement.

line Moved the magnitude of the

component derived from the

definition of the line within the

plane of displacement.

NURB Surface (non-uniform rational B-spline surface) as first

selection:

Move Option

Selection

Second

Selection

Third

SelectionResult for selection set:

Free Drag none Repositioned so that the

cursor pick point origin on

the surface is coincident

with the selected point in

space.

point Repositioned so that the

cursor pick point origin on

cursor pick point origin on

the surface is coincident

with the selected snap

point.

line/edge Repositioned so that the

cursor pick point origin on

the surface is coincident

with the selected point on

the line or edge.

plane/surface Repositioned so that the

cursor pick point origin on

the surface is coincident

with the selected point on

the face or surface.

Reference

Geometry

Displacement

point point Moved the magnitude of the

component derived from the

2 points selected within the

plane of displacement.

line Moved the magnitude of the

component derived from the

definition of the line within

the plane of displacement.

Move option icons and behavior descriptions

Entity

SelectedIcon Tool tip description of behavior

Point Free Drag

Move point using reference geometry

Rotate about point

Rotate about point using reference geometry

Line Free Drag

Drag Along Ray

Move along ray using reference geometry

Rotate about line

Rotate about line using reference geometry

Plane Free Drag

Drag Planar

Move planar using reference geometry

Drag along normal

Move along normal using reference geometry

Curve Free Drag

Move point using reference geometry

Circle-

Vector

Free Drag

Drag along axis

Move along axis using reference geometry

Rotate about axis

Rotate about axis using reference geometry.

Analytic

Surface

Free Drag

Move point using reference geometry

NURB

Surface

Free Drag

Move point using reference geometry

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications >

Replace assembly components

Replace assembly components

You can replace one assembly component with another component or replace all

occurrences of the component in the current assembly. If possible, constraints are

retained, unless the replacement part has a different shape. In that case, some

constraints may not survive and must be reapplied.

1. In the browser or the graphics window, select the

component to replace.

2. On the Assemble tab, Component panel, click the

down arrow on the Replace command, and then

choose one of the following:

Click Replace, and then click a component to

replace.

Click Replace All, and then click the

component to replace all occurrences in the

current assembly.

3. In the Open dialog box, go to the folder that

contains the component, select the component, and

then click Open.

4. A message notifies you that constraints and iMates

will be retained, if possible. Click OK to continue or

Cancel to discontinue replacing a component.

The new component or multiple occurrences are placed in the

same location as the original components. The origin of the

replacement component is coincident with the origin of the

replaced component. If some constraints were not retained,

apply assembly constraints as needed to remove degrees of

freedom.

Note When you replace a component with a member of an iAssembly or iPart, the

Open dialog box browses to the factory file of the member. You can select a

different member of the factory or create a new member using the Place iPart or

Place iAssembly dialog box.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications >

Delete assembly components

Delete assembly components

When you delete components created in place or placed directly in an open

assembly, you might need to reapply constraints or recreate features.

To delete a part created in place, double-click the top-level assembly in the

browser to activate the assembly. Select a component in the graphics window or

the browser, and then choose one of the following actions:

Press the Delete key.

Right-click and select Delete.

Press CTRL-X to cut the component from the assembly and move it to

the Clipboard. The component is deleted from the current assembly, but

can be pasted into another file.

Note To delete a component nested within a subassembly, double-click the

subassembly in the graphics window or browser to open its file. You can then

select and delete its components.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Features

Topics in this section

Assembly features

3D sweep features

Sketches in assemblies

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Features >

Assembly features

Roll back the state of assembly features

To roll back the state of assembly features in the assembly, in the browser, drag

the EOF symbol up the feature tree. When rolled back, anything under the EOF

node is temporarily not included in the model. When you drag the EOF symbol

back down the tree within the list of assembly features, those features are added

back into the model.

1. Open an assembly file that contains one or more assembly features.

2. Click and drag the EOF symbol up the tree to any location within the

list of assembly features.

3. Repeat for each feature to roll back.

4. Click and drag the EOF symbol back down the tree to add features

back in.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Features >

3D sweep features

Create profiles for coil springs

Follow these steps to create a coil with 12

revolutions. Begin by drawing construction

lines based on the dimensions of the coil.

Several of the basic tools in Autodesk

Inventor are used to create the 3D coil,

including:

Spline

2D and 3D sketch

Revolve

Extrude

Sweep

Circular pattern

Step 1: Create a planar spline to represent one revolution of the spring

Step 2: Create a circle to represent the diameter of the spring.

Step 3: Create construction geometry to define a path for the spring -

Part 1

Step 4: Create construction geometry to define a path for the spring -

Part 2

Concept Procedure

Step 5: Prepare for the Sweep command by creating a path for the

spring

Step 6: Prepare for the Sweep command by creating a profile for the

spring

Step 7: Sweep one revolution of the spring

Step 8: Pattern the Sweep feature to complete the spring

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Features >

Sketches in assemblies

Sketches in assemblies can be created in a part file or an assembly file. Your

design purpose determines which type of sketch you create:

Create a sketch in a part file to create features that belong to a part.

Create a sketch in an assembly file to create features that affect

multiple parts, such as cuts, holes, and weldments.

The following describes the characteristics of sketches created in an assembly file.

Projected geometry

Sketches consumed by features

Constraint behavior

Shared sketches

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Productivity Tools

Topics in this section

Rename Browser Nodes

Add Part

Add Assembly

Save and Replace Component

Ground and Root Component

Component Derive

Place at Component Origin

Alpha Sort Components

Degree of Freedom Analysis

Update Substitutes

Create Substitutes

Link Levels of Detail

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Rename Browser Nodes

Rename Browser Nodes

This command provides the means to identify all component nodes within an

assembly using one of three naming schemes. This command requires no

component selection and acts upon all components within the assembly.

Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Rename Browser

Nodes

New Name Provides a selection list of three types of naming

schemes for component browser nodes:

Filename - Resets any component browser

node that was renamed manually to display

using the file name of the component. A

numerical sequence identification number

replaces the occurrence identification

number.

Part Number - Replaces the default or

Filename with the Part Number defined in

the component iProperties. By default the

Part Number iProperty is initially populated

with the Filename string. Therefore, this

option is most useful after you set the Part

Number property for each component.

Components that do not have a defined

Part Number attribute report <Missing

Data> as the browser node name. A

numerical sequence identification number

replaces the occurrence identification

number.

Default - Returns the component browser

node name and occurrence identification to

the default file name.

Apply Applies the selected browser node naming scheme to

all component nodes within the assembly.

Close Terminates the command and closes the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Add Part

Create Part

This command provides a streamlined version of the Inventor default command,

Create Component, to create an empty part file. You name and save a part file

you create using the Create Part dialog box.

Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Add Part

Save in: Provides a selection list of folders. Defaults to the last

folder used for a Save by Autodesk Inventor.

Go to the last folder visited.

Go to the folder one level above the current folder.

Create and name a new folder within the current folder.

Provides the following options to redisplay the folder

contents:

Thumbnails

Tiles

Icons

List

Details

Vertical Shortcut Panel

Provides a view of recently used documents.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Provides a view of files stored on the desktop.

Provides a view of the My Documents folder.

Provides a view of the My Computer (root) folder.

Provides a view of My Network Places locations.

Filename: Provides the means to name the file you create, and a

selection list of previously named files.

Save as

type:

Defaults to the Inventor part (IPT) file type. Single

selection of IPT is available in the selection list.

Save Creates and saves the new empty part within the

assembly.

Cancel Terminates the command and closes the dialog box.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Add Assembly

Create Assembly

This command provides a streamlined version of the Inventor default command

Create Component, to create an empty assembly file. You name and save the

assembly you create using the Create Assembly dialog box.

Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Add Assembly

Save in: Provides a selection list of folders. Defaults to the last

folder used for a Save by Autodesk Inventor.

Go to the last folder visited.

Go to the folder one level above the current folder.

Create and name a new folder within the current folder.

Provides the following options to redisplay the folder

contents:

Thumbnails

Tiles

Icons

List

Details

Vertical Shortcut Panel

Provides a view of recently used documents.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Provides a view of files stored on the desktop.

Provides a view of the My Documents folder.

Provides a view of the My Computer (root) folder.

Provides a view of My Network Places locations.

Filename: Provides the means to name the file you create, and a

selection list of previously named files.

Save as

type:

Defaults to the Inventor assembly (IAM) file type. Single

selection of IAM is available in the selection list.

Save Creates and saves the new empty subassembly within

your assembly.

Cancel Terminates the command and closes the dialog box.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Save and Replace Component

Create Part

This command displays the dialog box during the save portion of the Save and

replace component workflow..

Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Save and Replace

Component

Save in: Provides a selection list of folders. Defaults to the folder

of the parent assembly.

Go to the last folder visited.

Go to the folder one level above the current folder.

Create and name a new folder within the current folder.

Provides the following options to redisplay the folder

contents:

Thumbnails

Tiles

Icons

List

Details

Vertical Shortcut Panel

Provides a view of recently used documents.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Provides a view of files stored on the desktop.

Provides a view of the My Documents folder.

Provides a view of the My Computer (root) folder.

Provides a view of My Network Places locations.

Filename: Provides the means to name the file you create, and

provides a selection list of previously named files.

Save as

type:

Defaults to the Inventor part (IPT) file type. Single

selection of IPT is available in the selection list.

Save Creates, saves, and place the new copied part within

your assembly.

Cancel Terminates the command and closes the dialog box.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Ground and Root Component

Ground and Root Component

This command provides the means to select an existing component within an

assembly structure and in a single operation:

Move and align the origin of the selected component to the origin of the

assembly.

Reposition the selected component as the first browser node in the

assembly browser.

Ground the selected component.

1. On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Productivity panel Ground and

Root Component.

2. Click to select the component to move and ground.

The selected component is moved and grounded within the assembly and

repositioned within the assembly browser structure.

Note If the selected component has existing assembly constraints that prevent it

from being moved to and aligned with the assembly origin, additional conflicting

constraints are applied. Your assembly displays a red Recover indication. The

component is grounded and repositioned within the assembly browser node

structure.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Component Derive

Create Part

This command provides a streamlined Derive Component workflow. You use the

Create Part (or Create Assembly) dialog box to name and save the new part (or

assembly) file.

Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Component

Derive

Save in: Provides a selection list of folders. Defaults to the last

folder used for a Save by Autodesk Inventor.

Go to the last folder visited.

Go to the folder one level above the current folder.

Create and name a new folder within the current folder.

Provides the following options to redisplay the folder

contents:

Thumbnails

Tiles

Icons

List

Details

Vertical Shortcut Panel

Provides a view of recently used documents.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Provides a view of files stored on the desktop.

Provides a view of the My Documents folder.

Provides a view of the My Computer (root) folder.

Provides a view of My Network Places locations.

Filename: Provides the means to name the file you create, and a

selection list of previously named files.

Save as

type:

Defaults to Inventor part (IPT) file type. Single selection

of IPT is available in the selection list.

Save Creates, saves, and opens the new derived part or

assembly for edit.

Cancel Terminates the Component derive tool and closes the

dialog box.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Place at Component Origin

Place at Component Origin

Select, place, and constrain a new component aligned to and coincident with the

origin of a selected component within an existing assembly.

1. On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Productivity panel Place at

Component Origin.

2. Click to select an existing component within your assembly.

3. In the Open dialog box, select the component to place.

4. Click Open to place the component and close the dialog box.

The component you select is placed and constrained in the assembly with its

origin aligned to and coincident with the origin of the component you initially

selected within the assembly.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Alpha Sort Components

Alpha Sort Components

This command sorts the contents of the assembly browser alphabetically.

To sort the components, click Assemble tab Productivity panel Alpha Sort

Component.

The browser components display alphabetically.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Degree of Freedom Analysis

Degree of Freedom Analysis

This command displays a dialog box that lists the number of translational and

rotational degrees of freedom for all the occurrences in the active assembly.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Degree of

Freedom Analysis

Refresh List Updates the list of components when the active

assembly is switched to another (already open)

active assembly.

Degrees of

Freedom

Displays in a three-column table a list of components

and translational and rotational degrees of freedom.

Animate

Freedom

Provides the means to select and animate graphically

the degrees of freedom of a component.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Update Substitutes

Update Substitutes

From within your active assembly:

1. On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Productivity panel Update

Substitutes.

A dialog box reports how many substitutes must be updated.

2. Click OK to continue the update.

3. The informational dialog box closes, and the substitute parts update.

Note Refresh the view of your assembly to see the updated substitute parts.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Create Substitutes

Create Substitute

This command creates a substitute part for every subassembly within the active

assembly. The Create Substitute dialog box provides a means to select the

subassemblies for which to create a substitute part, and for naming the resulting

substitute parts.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Create

Substitutes

Three-

column

table

The Create Substitute dialog box displays a three-

column table with a row for each first-level

subassembly in the active assembly.

Assembly Name column - Each cell in this column

contains the name of a first-level subassembly within

the active assembly. Right-click and select Remove

row to remove the subassembly from the table and

prevent the Create substitutes command from

creating a substitute part for the subassembly.

Substitute Part Name column - Each cell in this

column contains a default name for the substitute

part file to be created. The default name is the name

of the subassembly and either a prefix or suffix, as

determined by the selections in the Naming Scheme

portion of the dialog box. To enter a specific file

name for the substitute part, double-click slowly in

the cell.

File Location column - The cells in this column

display one of three locations. Right-click to specify

the preferred location:

User Path - The substitute part is created

in the folder specified by a path you enter.

Workspace - The substitute part is created

in the workspace specified by the Project

file.

Source Path - The substitute part file is

created in the same location as the source

subassembly.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

subassembly.

Naming

Scheme

Provides the means to control the default naming

scheme.

Prefix - Enables the edit field. The name of the

substitute part file is the name of the subassembly

with a prefix you enter in the Prefix field. You can

use it in addition to, or instead of, the Suffix option.

Suffix - Enabled by default, the suffix field is also

supplied with a default string: “_SUB” that adds the

suffix to the name of the subassembly to create the

file name of the substitute part file. You can edit the

suffix string to suit your design situation. You can

use it in addition to, or instead of, the Prefix option.

Apply - Applies any changes that you have made to

the naming scheme.

Revert - Undoes any changes made to the default

naming scheme using the Apply option.

Level of

Detail Name

The name that is applied to the Level of Detail

representation created within each of the

subassemblies.

OK Creates the substitute parts and named Level of

Detail representations, activates the newly created

Level of Detail representations in each subassembly,

and closes the Create Substitute dialog box.

Cancel Dismisses the Create Substitutes dialog box.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Link Levels of Detail

Link Levels of Detail

Provides the means to select a named Level of Detail representation from the

active assembly. The selected Level of Detail representation is activated in any

subassembly which contains one of the same name.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Link Levels of

Detail

Named

Levels of

Detail

Lists named Level of Detail representations within

the active assembly. Provides the means to select a

single named Level of Detail representation. The

selected Level of Detail representation is activated in

any subassembly which contains one of the same

name.

Help Displays the Quick Reference topic within the online

help..

OK Applies the named Level of Detail representation to

each first-level subassembly in the active assembly

containing a named Level of Detail representation

with the same name. Closes the Link Levels of Detail

dialog box.

Cancel Terminates the command and closes the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Physical Properties

Topics in this section

Center of gravity

Mass properties

Check for interference between components

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Physical Properties >

Center of gravity

Select the center of gravity

The center of gravity symbol contains three selectable work planes and a

selectable work point. Select the work planes to measure distance along the

perpendicular axis. Use the work point to measure straight line distance.

1. Start the measure command.

2. Select a COG work plane and appropriate component geometry to

measure perpendicular axial distance between geometry and selected

plane.

3. Select the COG work point and appropriate component geometry to

measure straight line distance between geometry and COG work point.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Physical Properties >

Mass properties

Properties - Physical tab

Calculates physical and inertial properties for a part or assembly to demonstrate

how differences in materials, analysis tolerances, and other values affect the

model.

The measurement units are controlled by the Document Settings Units tab.

Assembly

access:

Select a component, right-click and select

Properties. Click the Physical tab.

Part access: iProperties. Click the Physical tab.

To access the properties of a Virtual Part, right-click on a virtual part in the

assembly browser and select Properties.

Update

Clipboard

Material and density properties

General Properties

Inertial Properties

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Physical Properties >

Check for interference betweencomponents

Assembly interference

Analyzes selected sets of components for

interference. If interference is found, the

interfering volume is temporarily displayed. A

report describes the interfering components and

the location and volume of the centroid of the

interfering body. If no interference is found, an

appropriate message appears.

Access: Ribbon: Inspect tab Interference panel Analyze

Interference

Interference Analysis

Interference Detected

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Bills of materials

Topics in this section

Bills of materials

Manage item numbers in bills of materials

Structure of bills of materials

Bill of Materials Editor

Parts lists and BOMs in iAssemblies

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials >

Bills of materials

A bill of materials is a table that contains information about the parts within an

assembly. The table includes quantities, names, costs, vendors, or any other

information someone building the assembly needs. Quantities on the bill of

materials are updated when a part is added or removed from the assembly.

Bill of materials information is automatically collected from iProperties in the

Properties dialog box, such as the Title and Part Number from the Project tab.

Using the Bill of Materials command in the Manage panel of the Assemble tab,

you can view and edit properties for the bill of materials. The exported file can be

used in an application such as a spreadsheet or text editor. You can also export a

bill of materials (partial or full) to an Engineer's Notebook note.

You can modify values on the bill of materials by changing the design properties

in the Properties dialog box or in the Bill of Materials dialog box.

Within a drawing, you can create a similar document called a parts list. The parts

list derives data generated by the assembly and the Properties dialog box (as

reflected by the bill of materials). The placed parts list can then be edited, with

changes to its structure and content. Data in the parts list derived from the

Properties dialog box can be edited in the property dialog box. The data can be

overridden in the Edit Parts list dialog box. You can publish parts list to the DWF

format.

The Item Column displays item numbers in the bill of materials. Every item is

automatically assigned an item number. The item number can be edited as

needed. Changes to item numbers update automatically in the parts list and

balloons.

Quantity property in the bill of materials

Virtual components

Equivalent Components

Stock Number iProperty

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials >

Manage item numbers in bills ofmaterials

Renumber

Access: In the Bill of Materials dialog box, select the Structured or Parts

Only tab. Click Renumber.

The radio buttons for selection control are set based on preselection. When two or

more rows are preselected the dialog box defaults to Selected Rows. For

preselection of none or one, the default is set to All Rows and the radio buttons

are disabled.

Start Value The smallest valid value found in the selection is

used for the start value.

Increment Any integer ranging from 1 to 10,000.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials >

Structure of bills of materials

Structure bills of materials

The BOM Structure iProperty defines the status of the component in the bill of

material (BOM). BOM Structure has five basic options: Normal, Phantom,

Reference, Purchased, and Inseparable.

Tip You can set a default value for BOM Structure on the Design BOM tab of the

Document Settings dialog box. The BOM Structure for all components is set to

this value, until it is overridden at the component instance level.

Set BOM Structure using BOM Editor

Set BOM Structure for a component

Override the BOM Structure for an instance of component

Set BOM Structure attributes in the BOM Editor

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials >

Bill of Materials Editor

Find and Replace

Use the Find and Replace dialog box to find or replace a string in the BOM table..

Access: In the Bill of Materials dialog box, right-click a BOM cell or a

set of multiple BOM cells, and click Find or Replace on the

menu.

Find what Enter a string to search for.

Replace with Enter a string to replace the original string with.

Match Case Select to distinguish between lower case and

upper case letters.

Direction Select the direction of the searching process.

Find Next Click to find the next occurrence of the searched

string.

Replace Click to replace the original string with the new

string.

Replace All Click to replace the original strings in all BOM

table or in a set of selected cells.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials >

Parts lists and BOMs in iAssemblies

Manage bills of materials in iAssemblies

Multiple assemblies exist within an iAssembly. In the BOM, separate QTY and Item

QTY columns display for each member as the item count is affected individually

for members with component suppression.

The BOM view displays the active member. Click the iAssembly down-arrow to

access remaining list or display all members.

The Bill of Material editor displays quantities for members within an iAssembly.

You can only edit the quantity of the QTY column per member.

Note Item QTY refers to a column choice that displays a calculated quantity for an

item which is separate from a QTY for an item. You can edit a QTY for an item.

The Item QTY is calculated and you cannot edit it.

You can create a Parts List of selected members or a traditional single assembly

parts list. You can also create an aggregate parts list of specified members.

However, only one BOM view is provided containing the aggregate list of items

and Item numbers.

Note The Bill of Materials command is disabled within an iAssembly member.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Representations

Topics in this section

Assembly representations and configurations

View representations

Flexible assemblies

Positional representations in assemblies

Level of Detail representations

Shrinkwrap assemblies

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations >

Assembly representations andconfigurations

This topic introduces the 2 types of assembly manipulation tools; representations

and configurations, and recommends how to use them together for a variety of

workflows.

What are representations?

What are configurations?

What makes representations different from configurations?

How can you combine representations and configurations?

How is this an advantage?

How do I know which one to use?

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations >

View representations

View representations

A View representation preserves an assembly display configuration so that you

can recall it by name the next time you work on the assembly.

Access: On the Assembly browser, click to expand the Representations

folder, right-click the View node, and then click New or Edit or

click the Design View Representations icon on the browser title

bar.

Storage Location

Design View Representations

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations >

Flexible assemblies

Create and edit flexible components

Subassemblies are often used several times in a design. Make subassemblies

flexible so that each child of the subassembly can solve uniquely from other

instances to show each in a different position.

1. Right-click a subassembly in the graphics window or the browser, and

then select Flexible. An icon denoting the flexible state marks the

subassembly in the browser.

2. Continue to select subassemblies and make flexible, as needed.

3. Click Save to preserve flexible states in the assembly file. Individual

component files are not affected.

To remove flexibility, right-click a flexible subassembly, and then clear the check

mark.

Note If a subassembly or part within a subassembly is adaptive, setting flexibility

on automatically turns adaptivity off.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations >

Positional representations inassemblies

Override Objects

For assemblies that participate in a positional representation, the Override Objects

dialog box overrides suppression status or constraint value, grounding status,

offset values, and flexibility status. Used to make in-process adjustments to

positions of objects in the current positional representation. Items with overrides

are indicated by bold text in the browser, with the override value in parentheses.

You cannot override values in the master positional representation. The master

positional representation is the default state of the assembly, where all modeling

tasks are performed

Tip You can quickly override one or a few values without accessing the Override

Objects dialog box. For example, right-click a constraint in the browser and select

Modify (Override). Or, right-click a component name and select Grounded

(Override) to change the grounding state.

Access: In the browser, double-click a positional representation to make

it active. In the graphics window or browser, right-click an

object that participates in a positional representation, and then

select Override to open the Override Objects dialog box.

On each tab, objects that cannot be overridden are not available.

Positional Representation

Constraint tab

Pattern tab

Component tab

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations >

Level of Detail representations

Edit Level of Detail representations

Once a Level of Detail representation is created and saved in a subassembly, it

can be activated in any consuming assembly.

Note Open a subassembly to edit its Level of Detail representations. A Level of

Detail representation cannot be edited-in-place in an assembly that consumes the

subassembly.

Edit Level of Detail representations

Copy Level of Detail representations

Delete Level of Detail representations

Rename Level of Detail representations

Create and activate a Level of Detail representation in a nested

subassembly

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations >

Shrinkwrap assemblies

Shrinkwrap assemblies

The Shrinkwrap command creates a part from an existing assembly. The

shrinkwrap part is a simplified version of the source assembly that can provide a

significant reduction in file size in consuming assemblies or applications. Use the

hole and geometry removal tools to help protect intellectual property. The default

method creates a single surface composite. A surface composite is the fastest

method and creates the smallest file of the three options.

Assembly Shrinkwrap Options

Style

Single solid body merging out seams between

planar faces Select to produce a single solid body

without seams between planar faces. When you

merge seams between faces, the face assumes a

single color.

Solid body keep seams between planar faces

Select to produce a single solid body with seams

between planar faces retained.

Single composite feature This is the default

selection. Select to produce a single surface

composite feature. This selection produces the

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

composite feature. This selection produces the

smallest file. Colors and seams of the original

components are retained. The mass properties of the

original assembly are cached. and retained.

Preview Select to visualize the results of the current selection

settings in the dialog box. If options are changed,

reselect Preview to see the effects of the change.

Simplification

Remove geometry by visibility Select the check

box to enable the options to remove geometry based

on visibility. The check box is selected by default.

Whole parts only Parts which meet the visibility

criteria are removed. Individual faces which meet

the visibility criteria are not removed.

Parts and faces Removes any face including entire

parts which meet the visibility criteria. The default

setting is on.

Visibility percentage A value of zero removes all

parts or faces that are not visible in any view.

Increasing the slider value removes more parts and

faces.

Ignore surface features for visibility detection

Available if Remove geometry by visibility is enabled.

If enabled, surface features do not affect visibility

detection. If not enabled, surface features participate

in visibility detection and can hide geometry.

Remove parts by size Select to enable the option

to remove parts based on the size ratio. The ratio

indicates the difference between the part bounding

box and the assembly bounding box.

Hole Patching

None Does not remove any holes.

All Removes all holes that do not cross surface

boundaries. Holes do not need to be round to be

included. It is the default setting.

Range Specifies the circumference or perimeter of

the holes to include or exclude. Holes do not need to

be round to be included.

Include other

objects

Work Geometry When selected, any visible work

features in the component are exported and can be

features in the component are exported and can be

derived.

Sketches When selected, any visible and

unconsumed 2D or 3D sketch in the component are

exported and can be derived.

iMates When selected, any iMates defined in the

source assembly are exported and can be derived.

Parameters When selected, any parameters in the

source assembly are exported and can be derived.

The Parameters folder includes a subfolder that

contains folders from the Parameters dialog box. The

Parameters and Export Objects dialog boxes share

the same parameter statuses.

Break link Permanently disables any updates from the source

component.

Reduced

Memory

Mode

When the check box is selected, a part is created

using less memory by excluding source bodies from

the cache. No source bodies appear in the browser.

Breaking or suppressing the link removes the

memory savings. Checked on by default.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Functional design overview

Topics in this section

Understand functional design

Design Accelerator

Functions, Prefixes, and Algebraic Operators

Component Authoring

Best practices and general workflows

Design Accelerator Browser

Material Database

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Understand functional design

Functional design is a knowledge content tool that represents the trend to move

from geometrical descriptions to capturing knowledge.

Designers use functional design to analyze the function of their products and the

design problems they are trying to solve, rather than spending time on the

modeling operations necessary to create 3D representations.

Functional design is not only a set of functions. It supports design by function and

adds mechanical content and intelligence. Using functional design, you can create

mechanically correct components automatically by entering simple or complex

mechanical attributes.

Functional design provides further advantages:

The design and modification process is faster.

There is a higher level of design quality and accuracy.

It provides a more intuitive design environment.

It eliminates the need for physical prototypes.

Within Autodesk Inventor, the following areas are part of Functional Design:

Design Accelerator

Frame Generator

Autodesk Inventor Studio

AutoLimits

Content Center

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Design Accelerator

Delete

Use the Delete dialog box to delete components.

Components inserted in an assembly using Design Accelerator generators are

related to one another using assembly constraints to define their positions.

When you delete a feature using Functional Design commands it affects the whole

connection. Then, you can decide if you want to delete affected features as well.

How can components be deleted?

How are the remaining components affected?

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Functions, Prefixes, and AlgebraicOperators

Using Equations and Parameters

You can use equations wherever you can enter a numeric value. For example, you

can write equations in the Edit Dimensions dialog box, feature dialog boxes, and

the Parameters dialog box. Equations can vary in complexity, and you can use

them to calculate feature sizes, calculate assembly constraints offsets or angles,

or simulate motion among several components.

Equations can be simple or contain many algebraic operators, prefixes, and

functions. For example, here is a simple equation:

2 ul *(6+3)

The following complex equation uses internal parameters such as pi:

(PI rad/5 ul +(25 deg *PI rad)/180 deg))

Supported Algebraic Operators

The following table lists the algebraic operators supported by Autodesk Inventor.

Operator Meaning

+ addition

- subtraction

% floating point modulo

* multiplication

/ division

^ power

( expression delimiter

) expression delimiter

; delimiter for multi-argument functions

Supported Unit Prefixes

The following table lists the unit prefixes supported by Autodesk Inventor.

Prefix Symbol Value

exa E 1.0e18

peta P 1.0e15

tera T 1.0e12

giga G 1.0e9

mega M 1.0e6

kilo k 1.0e3

hecto h 1.0e2

deca da 1.0e1

deci d 1.0e-1

centi c 1.0e-2

milli m 1.0e-3

micro micro 1.0-6

nano n 1.0-9

Pi co p 1.0e-12

femto f 1.0-15

atto a 1.0e-18

When you use unit prefixes in an equation, enter the prefix symbol. Do not enter

the prefix itself. For example, an equation that includes the unit "nanometer"

might look like this equation: 3.5 ul * 2.6 nm.

When you add the unit prefix for name to the meter unit, your equation is

calculated based on the length of 2.6 nanometers.

Note Prefix symbols are case sensitive. Enter them exactly as they appear in the

previous table.

Supported Functions

The following table lists the supported functions.

Syntax Returns Unit

Type

Expected Unit Type

cos(expr) unitless angle

sin(expr) unitless angle

tan(expr) unitless angle

acos(expr) angle unitless

asin(expr) angle unitless

atan(expr) angle unitless

cosh(expr) unitless angle

tanh(expr) unitless angle

acosh(expr) angle unitless

asinh(expr) angle unitless

sqrt(expr) unit^1/2 any

sign(expr) unitless any (Return 0 if negative, 1

if positive.)

exp(expr) unitless any (Return exponential

power of expression: for

example, return 2 for 100,

3 for 1000, and so on.)

floor(expr) unitless unitless (Next lowest whole

number.)

ceil(expr) unitless unitless (Next highest whole

number.)

round(expr) unitless unitless (Closest whole

number.)

abs(expr) any any

max(expr1;expr2) any any

min(expr1;expr2) any any

In(expr) unitless unitless

log(expr) unitless unitless

pow(expr1;expr2) unit^expr2 any and unitless,

respectively

random(expr) unitless unitless

isolate(expr;unit;unit) any any

Note Function names are case sensitive. Enter them exactly as they appear in the

previous table.

Reserved System Parameters

The following table lists the reserved system parameters supported by Autodesk

Inventor.

Parameter Value

PI 3.14159265358979323846264338328

E 2.71828182845904523536

Unit Types

The unit type that you use with an equation depends on the type of data that you

are evaluating. For example, to evaluate a linear or angular value, you typically

use a unit type of millimeters, inches, or degrees (mm, in, or deg).

Some equations must return a unitless value, for example, an equation to solve

the number of occurrences in a pattern. You designate a unitless value with the

characters ul. For example, 5 ul means that the equation has been evaluated and

returned the number 5, as in the number of occurrences in a pattern.

Note Keep units consistent within equations containing parameters that represent

different unit types. You can do this using the Isolate function. For example, to

calculate the number of occurrences for a pattern that is based on one occurrence

for each unit of a parameter named Width, your linear equation would be:

isolate(Width;mm;ul)

The number of Occurrences value in a dialog box requires a unitless (ul) result,

but you are referencing the unit width, which is a linear value. Convert the Width

parameter to a unitless value.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Component Authoring

Part Template Parameters

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Component , on

the Parameter Mapping tab, click the button at the end of the

edit fields.

To display Part Template Parameters dialog box, on the Layout tab select the

Parameter Category.

Assign part template parameters to category parameters during the Authoring

process.

To map the parameter to a column, double-click a parameter, or select it and

click OK.

The Part Template Parameters dialog displays all part template parameters that

can be valid for mapping in a tree structured by parameter categories.

Note You can save all the information you insert during the Authoring process,

and publish it to the Content Center Library.

Model Displays the part model tree with features and

feature related parameters.

Parameters

Model Displays the part model tree with features and

feature related parameters.

User List of User parameters. Decide if a dimensional

parameter is used for mapping.

Threads Provides list of threads in the part template with

Thread Family, Designation, and Class parameters.

iProperties Provides part template iProperties - Summary,

Project, Physical (only material) and Custom.

Suppression Allows selection of a feature to map to a table

column and specifies individual features to compute

or suppress for each family member.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Valid Template parameter mapping

What if the table columns are not presented in the Category Parameters

tab (Template parameters mapping to Category Parameters)

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Best practices and general workflows

Design Accelerator generators and calculators

Design Accelerator generators and calculators support assemblies and

weldments. In drawing, sheet metal or part environment they are not

available.

Design Accelerator support of positional representations is limited to

changes in the component only.

You can promote and demote Design Accelerator components in the

browser using the context menu. Ensure that the subassemblies that the

Design Accelerator components are part of are grounded after demoting.

Note that the drag function is not available to promote or demote

components in the browser.

Design Accelerator components must be encapsulated in an assembly to

apply kinematics. A component can be placed in a deep level

subassembly. In that case, in-place edit its parent assembly before you

start any Design Accelerator commands. Only entities inside a parent

assembly can be selected in Design Accelerator commands

A Design Accelerator assembly is used to organize components under an

assembly. A single assembly can have only one component assembly.

Tips and Tricks

When working with Design Accelerator generators and calculators there are many

features that can help you to work faster and efficiently:

Multi-line tooltips with images describe what you must do or select, in

the case of an error or problem they describe the nature of the error.

Use the (More) in the majority of generators and calculators to

access additional setting options.

3D grips + double-click : Most of the generators use 3D graphics for

better orientation and workflow. Use the 3D preview to see the

component in context with other parts of the assembly even before

creating it. Move the grip to change important dimensions of the

displayed preview. Double-click the 3D grip to open the Edit dialog box

to enter the dimension directly.

Output units change: Double-click a result value to change units. Enter

new units.

Items lists – drag : You can drag in most of the generators. You can

change the order of generated components. For example, in the Bolted

Connection Generator, you can change the order of nuts and washers.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Design Accelerator Browser

Uses the Assembly browser to organize and manage component entities.

When you open any generator and calculator, a prompt is displayed with the

option to save the design accelerator generator or calculator to the assembly

before you continue. Change the assembly name and folder or accept the default,

and click Save. An assembly node is added to the browser structure. The

component is designed in this assembly.

Design Accelerator generators and calculators are saved as subassemblies. All

inserted design accelerator components are stored together. For example, when

you insert Spur Gears connection, Gear 1 and Gear 2 are placed together in one

subassembly with a user- specified name. Use the Promote command to create

another instance of a component and move it up within the assembly structure.

Browser structure of generators and calculators

Design Accelerator Context Menu

Context menu for Design Accelerator Update

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Material Database

Wire Diameters and Ultimate Tensile Strength

Use the dialog to enter values of wire diameters and the ultimate tensile strength

of the selected material. Double-click the edit field to change values.

According to the specified values of wire diameters and the ultimate tensile

strength, generator uses the ultimate tensile strength value if you design a spring

of an appropriate wire diameter. For example, you set the wire diameter value in

this table to 0,072 and the ultimate tensile strength value to 232692. If you set

the wire diameter value in the Design tab to 0,072, generator automatically

inserts the ultimate tensile strength value (232692) to the Ultimate Tensile

Strength edit field of the Calculation tab.

If generator does not find the ultimate tensile strength value for inserted wire

diameter in the table, the value is calculated. Generator finds the closest lower

and upper wire diameter values and approximately calculates the ultimate tensile

strength.

The data from material database are stored in the XML format in ...Design

Data\Design Accelerator\Tables\Materials folder. If you edit the data, tables in

XML format are by default stored in ...Design Data\Design

Accelerator\Tables\Custom folder.

Access: On the ribbon, click the Design tab. Open Compression Spring,

Tension Spring, or Torsion Spring, Calculation tab. Check the

box next to the Material edit field to open Material Database

dialog box. Double-click the last column, Wire Diameters.

Add item Adds a row for new wire diameter and ultimate

tensile strength values.

Delete item Removes selected row with data from the table.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Component Generators

Topics in this section

Bolted Connection Component Generator

Shaft Component Generator

Parallel Splines Component Generator

Involute Splines Component Generator

Parallel Key Connection Generator

Cam Component Generators

Spur Gears Component Generator

Bevel Gears Component Generator

Worm Gears Component Generator

Bearing Component Generator

Plain Bearing Calculator

Compression Spring Component Generator

Extension Spring Component Generator

Torsion Spring Component Generator

Belleville Spring Component Generator

V-Belts Component Generator

Synchronous Belts Component Generator

Roller Chains Generator

Clevis Pin Component Generator

Pin Component Generators

O-Ring Component Generator

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Bolted Connection ComponentGenerator

Modify length/hole

Specifies hole and bolt parameters that you can change.

For bolts, you can change the length only.

For holes, you can change type, diameter, designation, and class.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Fasten panel Bolted Connection

and then click the Design tab. In the area on the right side,

specify fasteners. Select the row with hole and click .

For bolts, select bolt and hold the Alt key + to open Modify

length dialog box.

The dialog box differs depending on whether the selected component is a bolt or a

hole.

Modify Hole

Type You have several options to select the type of

hole. Depending on the selected option, the hole

is adjusted. For example, if you select the Loose

option and click OK, you can see that the hole

dimensions are changed in the Design tab.

Threaded - Hole Diameter is always driven. It

designs the threaded hole type.

Designation For some holes, there are more possible

dimensions for the bolt type. Specify the hole

more accurately by selecting the appropriate

designation.

Modify Bolt

Custom Length Check the box to select the bolt length from the

drop-down list. Values in the list depend on the

type of the selected bolt.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

type of the selected bolt.

When you enter a user parameter and return to

the Design tab of the Bolted connection

Generator, the part item with user dimensions is

displayed with a green background.

You can also change the length of bolt in the

graphics window using the 3D grip. Drag the grip

to the appropriate length. The edit field of the

part is displayed with a green background in the

Design tab.

Double-click the 3D grip to edit the bolt length.

Confirms the input from the component.

Closes the dialog box.

Design tab

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Shaft Component Generator

Torque

Use the dialog box to enter parameters of shaft torque.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel

Shaft. Click the Calculation tab, In the Loads &

Supports drop-down list select Loads, and in the

toolbar click Add Torque.

On the Loads & Supports area of the Calculation tab,

select Torque in the tree control, and click Loads

properties.

Double-click the torque preview in the Autodesk

Inventor window.

Properties Enter the value for distance measured from the

middle of the section.

Moment Enter the torque value.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Parallel Splines Component Generator

Loading Conditions

Specifies the influence of production and operating parameters on the connection

acceptability.

Access: On the Design tab, Power Transmission panel, click Key,

Involute Splines, or Parallel Splines, and on the Calculation tab

click Loading Conditions.

Joint Type

Fixed Splines are firmly joined by pressing or fixed by

rings, avoiding axial movement.

Flexible Splines are flexibly joined to allow axial

movement.

Crowned Uses external splines with crowned teeth for

misalignment up to 5 degrees.

Note This option is available for Involute Splines

only and if the ANSI Standard is selected.

Ka - Application factor

This coefficient reflects the effect of the character and the type of loading on

decrease of the loading capacity or the coupling. It is determined according to

empirical values given in the following table:

Drive Type of loading

Continuous Light

shocks

Cyclical

shocks

Heavy

shocks

Uniform 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.8

Light shocks 1.2 2.1 1.8 1.8

Medium shocks 2.0 2.2 2.4 3.8

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Fatigue-life factor

This coefficient reflects effects of the operational character and appropriate

service life of the coupling (measured in number of torque cycles) on increase of

the loading capacity of the coupling. It is determined according to empirical

values given in the following table:

No. of Torque

Cycles

Fatigue-life factor, Kf

Unidirectional Fully bi-directional

10000 1.0 1.0

100000 0.5 0.4

1000000 0.4 0.3

10000000 0.3 0.2

Wear-life factor

This coefficient reflects effects of wear of contact surfaces during the appropriate

service life of the coupling (measured in number of revolutions) on increase of

the loading capacity the coupling. It is determined according to empirical values

given in the following table:

Total number of

revolutions

[millions]

Kw

0.01 4.0

0.1 2.8

1 2.0

10 1.4

100 1.0

1000 0.7

10000 0.5

Note only for flexible joints.

Load Distribution factor

In couplings with two keys, the loading is not distributed exactly uniformly onto

the two keys due to production and assembly inaccuracies. The actual load

bearing surface of the coupling is lower than the load bearing surface determined

theoretically. The ratio between the theoretical and actual load bearing surface of

the coupling is defined by the coefficient of distribution of the loading. With

regards to the accuracy of bearing, the size of the coefficient is given in a range

from 0.6 to 0.8.

Tip: For common accuracy of production and installation, a coefficient of 0.75 is

taken into account .

Note In cases of couplings with 1 key, the coefficient is equal to 1.

Factor of Tooth Side Contact

Note This factor is available for Involute Splines only.

The factor indicates the load is not spread evenly on all the spline teeth because

of production and assembly inaccuracy. At a common and higher mounting

accuracy, it is assumed that half of the teeth carry the load (Ks = 0.5). For

splines with higher production inaccuracy, the load is only carried by one third of

the teeth (Ks = 0.3).

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Involute Splines Component Generator

Loading Conditions - Metric method

Specifies the influence of production and operating parameters to the connection

acceptability.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Involute

Splines. In the Involute Spline Connection Generator, click

Loading Conditions.

Note This dialog box is available only if you select the ISO or CSN spline type and

Metric Method in the Strength Calculation area on the Calculation tab.

Joint type

Fixed Joins splines firmly by pressing or fixed by rings

avoiding axial movement.

Working Conditions

Specifies the type of working conditions.

Tooth Side

Specifies the type of tooth sides.

Recommended values of allowable pressures on tooth sides:

Type of loading Working

conditions

Hardened

Tooth Side

Non-

Hardened

Tooth Side

Allowable pressure pD [kg/mm3]

flexible under

load

adverse - 0.3 - 1

medium - 0.5 - 1

advantageous - 1 - 2

no load adverse 1.5 - 2 2 - 3.5

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

medium 2 - 3 3 - 6

advantageous 2.5 - 4 4 - 7

fixed adverse 3.5 - 5 4 - 7

medium 6 - 10 10 - 14

advantageous 8 - 12 12 - 20

Factor of Tooth Side Contact

The factor indicates the load is not spread evenly on all the spline teeth because

of production and assembly inaccuracy. At a common and higher mounting

accuracy, it is supposed that one half of teeth carry the load (Ks = 0.5), for

splining with higher production inaccuracy the load is only carried by one third of

teeth (Ks = 0.3).

Calculation Tab

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Parallel Key Connection Generator

Loading Conditions

Specifies the influence of production and operating parameters on the connection

acceptability.

Access: On the Design tab, Power Transmission panel, click Key,

Involute Splines, or Parallel Splines, and on the Calculation tab

click Loading Conditions.

Joint Type

Fixed Splines are firmly joined by pressing or fixed by

rings, avoiding axial movement.

Flexible Splines are flexibly joined to allow axial

movement.

Crowned Uses external splines with crowned teeth for

misalignment up to 5 degrees.

Note This option is available for Involute Splines

only and if the ANSI Standard is selected.

Ka - Application factor

This coefficient reflects the effect of the character and the type of loading on

decrease of the loading capacity or the coupling. It is determined according to

empirical values given in the following table:

Drive Type of loading

Continuous Light

shocks

Cyclical

shocks

Heavy

shocks

Uniform 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.8

Light shocks 1.2 2.1 1.8 1.8

Medium shocks 2.0 2.2 2.4 3.8

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Fatigue-life factor

This coefficient reflects effects of the operational character and appropriate

service life of the coupling (measured in number of torque cycles) on increase of

the loading capacity of the coupling. It is determined according to empirical

values given in the following table:

No. of Torque

Cycles

Fatigue-life factor, Kf

Unidirectional Fully bi-directional

10000 1.0 1.0

100000 0.5 0.4

1000000 0.4 0.3

10000000 0.3 0.2

Wear-life factor

This coefficient reflects effects of wear of contact surfaces during the appropriate

service life of the coupling (measured in number of revolutions) on increase of

the loading capacity the coupling. It is determined according to empirical values

given in the following table:

Total number of

revolutions

[millions]

Kw

0.01 4.0

0.1 2.8

1 2.0

10 1.4

100 1.0

1000 0.7

10000 0.5

Note only for flexible joints.

Load Distribution factor

In couplings with two keys, the loading is not distributed exactly uniformly onto

the two keys due to production and assembly inaccuracies. The actual load

bearing surface of the coupling is lower than the load bearing surface determined

theoretically. The ratio between the theoretical and actual load bearing surface of

the coupling is defined by the coefficient of distribution of the loading. With

regards to the accuracy of bearing, the size of the coefficient is given in a range

from 0.6 to 0.8.

Tip: For common accuracy of production and installation, a coefficient of 0.75 is

taken into account .

Note In cases of couplings with 1 key, the coefficient is equal to 1.

Factor of Tooth Side Contact

Note This factor is available for Involute Splines only.

The factor indicates the load is not spread evenly on all the spline teeth because

of production and assembly inaccuracy. At a common and higher mounting

accuracy, it is assumed that half of the teeth carry the load (Ks = 0.5). For

splines with higher production inaccuracy, the load is only carried by one third of

the teeth (Ks = 0.3).

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Cam Component Generators

Add Motion

You can define your own motion. You must specify the motion name and the file

name.

Access: On the Design tab, Power Transmission panel, click Disc, Linear,

or Cylindrical Cam. On the Design tab click Add next to the

Motion Function pull-down list.

Motion

Name

Specify a user motion name to display on the Motion

list.

File Name Specify a file name with path of file with motion

data.

File Format

The Motion file is a text file that contains 2 columns of values delimited by tabs or

characters ";" or "|".

The first column represents the position in segment. The first value must be zero

(start of segment). The last value must be 1, or all values are transformed by

1/last value in the table. For example, if the last value in the table is 30,

generator recalculates value 1/30. The values must be listed ascendingly.

The second column represents an elevation at position. The first value must be

zero. The last value must be 1, or all elevation values are transformed by 1/last

value in the table. The values must be listed ascendingly.

Example of the values of the Polynomial motion of third degree. You can copy the

values from the table directly to the TXT file.

0;0

0.1;0.028

0.2;0.104

0.3;0.216

0.4;0.352

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

0.5;0.5

0.6;0.648

0.7;0.784

0.8;0.896

0.9;0.972

1;1

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Spur Gears Component Generator

Accuracy

Displays a dialog box for input of accuracy standard and accuracy degree.

Access: On the Design tab, Power Transmission panel, click Spur Gear

or Bevel Gear. In the Spur Gears or Bevel Gears Component

Generator, Calculation tab, click Accuracy.

Standard Selects the standard for accuracy calculation.

According to your selection, the Precision

Specification options are displayed.

Precision

Specification

Select precision degree.

Note For the CSN Standard, list contains all

values. Some of these values cannot be selected

randomly, but they depend on the inserted

values on their left. If you select a value that

does not correspond with the value on the left,

the value is not inserted automatically. The

nearest acceptable value is selected and inserted.

OK Click to confirm the selection and close the

dialog box.

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Bevel Gears Component Generator

Accuracy

Displays a dialog box for input of accuracy standard and accuracy degree.

Access: On the Design tab, Power Transmission panel, click Spur Gear

or Bevel Gear. In the Spur Gears or Bevel Gears Component

Generator, Calculation tab, click Accuracy.

Standard Selects the standard for accuracy calculation.

According to your selection, the Precision

Specification options are displayed.

Precision

Specification

Select precision degree.

Note For the CSN Standard, list contains all

values. Some of these values cannot be selected

randomly, but they depend on the inserted

values on their left. If you select a value that

does not correspond with the value on the left,

the value is not inserted automatically. The

nearest acceptable value is selected and inserted.

OK Click to confirm the selection and close the

dialog box.

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Worm Gears Component Generator

Accuracy

Displays a dialog box for input of accuracy standard and accuracy degree.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Worm Gear

and on the Calculation tab, click Accuracy.

Precision

Specification

Selects the precision degree.

Note For the CSN Standard, the list contains all

values. Some of these values cannot be selected

randomly because they depend on the values on

their left. If you select a value that doesn't

correspond with the value on the left, that value

is not inserted. The nearest acceptable value is

selected and inserted automatically. For example,

if you set the first left value to 2, values on the

right side are updated according to specified

value. In this case the second value from left is

set to 3.

OK Confirms the selection and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Bearing Component Generator

Various Load Conditions

Specifies the values of various loads.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Bearing

and click the Calculation tab. On the Loads section, click

the load diagrammatic picture.

If the load is not constant during bearing life, use the dialog box to enter

additional loads.

Click Add load to add load.

To enter the load values, double-click the edit fields. You can insert Time values

either in absolute values or in percent.

For calculation of Equivalent Dynamic Load P used in Bearing Life Calculation, the

time ratio of the loading conditions is crucial, not the absolute values of the

loads.

The diagram on the Calculation tab displays the impact of individual element to

the Equivalent Dynamic Load P value.

Adds new load.

Deletes selected load

Moves selected load one line up.

Moves selected load one line down.

OK Confirms the loads settings and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Plain Bearing Calculator

Diagram of radial bearing

Displays the preview of designed radial bearing.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Bearing

Calculator and on the Calculation tab, click Preview.

OK Click to close the dialog box.

Calculation tab

Advanced...

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Compression Spring ComponentGenerator

Compression Spring Component Generator - Calculation tab

Sets parameters for calculation of a compression spring. You can calculate

generator data based on selections made in the Design tab.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Spring panel Compression and

click the Calculation tab.

Spring Strength Calculation

Calculation Options

Load

Dimensions

Spring Coils

Spring Material

Check of Buckling

Fatigue Loading

Assembly Dimensions

(More)

Results

Summary of Messages

Toolbar buttons

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Extension Spring ComponentGenerator

Extension Spring Component Generator - Calculation tab

Sets parameters for calculation of an extension spring.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Spring panel Extension and click the

Calculation tab.

Type of Strength Calculation

Calculation Options

Loads

Dimensions

Spring Prestress

Spring Material

Assembly Dimensions

Spring Coils

(More)

Results

Summary of Messages

Toolbar Commands

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Torsion Spring Component Generator

Torsion Spring Component Generator - Calculation tab

Sets parameters for calculation of a torsion spring.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Spring panel Torsion and click

the Calculation tab.

Spring Strength Calculation

Calculation Option

Loads

Spring Mounting

Dimensions

Spring Coils

Spring Material

Assembly Dimensions

(More)

Results

Summary of Messages

Toolbar Commands

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Belleville Spring Component Generator

Belleville Spring Dimensions

Use this dialog box to modify the existing spring values or add new spring sizes.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Spring panel Belleville and click

the Design tab. Click in the Dimensions group box.

Note The list of springs depends on the selected standard in the Spring Type list.

Add You can add a new spring size.

Remove You can remove the existing spring size.

Reverts all changes Deletes all changes created and

reverts to original data.

Click the Add icon to insert new spring size. Enter all required values for new

spring size.

The following table lists the data displayed for each spring size:

Name Spring dimension

D [in], [mm] Outside Diameter

d [in], [mm] Inside Diameter

t [in], [mm] Material Thickness

H [in], [mm] Unloaded Height

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

V-Belts Component Generator

Coordinates

Controls the X and Y coordinates of the pulley given by precise input. The Fixed

position by coordinates placement type must be selected for the pulley.

Access: In the Autodesk Inventor assembly preview of the V-belt,

double-click the center grip of the pulley.

Confirms the input of the coupling.

Closes the Coordinates dialog box.

V-Belts Generator Design Tab

Synchronous Belts Generator Design Tab

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Synchronous Belts ComponentGenerator

Coordinates

Controls the X and Y coordinates of the pulley given by precise input. The Fixed

position by coordinates placement type must be selected for the pulley.

Access: In the Autodesk Inventor assembly preview of the V-belt,

double-click the center grip of the pulley.

Confirms the input of the coupling.

Closes the Coordinates dialog box.

V-Belts Generator Design Tab

Synchronous Belts Generator Design Tab

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Roller Chains Generator

Roller Sprocket Properties

Set up properties of a toothed sprocket.

Note This dialog box is displayed only if you select the roller chain sprocket.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Roller

Chains and click the Design tab. On the Sprockets group

box, click Sprockets Properties commands.

To more precisely control dimensions and properties of sprocket for analysis,

double-click the sprocket within the preview, or click within the dialog box.

The transmission requires a minimum of 2 toothed sprockets. All others can

be flat idlers.

Design Guide Controls the size of the idler based on a diameter

specified, or appropriate transmission ratio. Select the

Diameter option to retain the sprocket size when you

change the size of the driver sprocket. If you select

the Transmission Ratio option, you cannot enter the

sprocket size value. It is determined by size of driver

sprocket and transmission ratio. If you change the size

of the driver sprocket, the size of this driven sprocket

changes as well.

Custom size Customizes dimensional parameters of the sprocket

such as tooth gap shape properties, or sprocket hub

size. By default, the sprocket size values are set

according to the chain standard (data tables are

stored within the ...\Design Data\Design

Accelerator\Tables\Chains\RollerChains folder). If you

select the Custom Size option, you are responsible for

all sprockets' properties.

Custom number

of strands

Overrides number of strands adopted from a chain by

default. Number of strands of the sprocket can be

bigger than number of strands of the chain. You can

select active strand which is used for the chain.

Note To set active strand, select the blue grip within

Autodesk Inventor window.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Motion clockwise/ Motion counterclockwise

Changes the motion direction. When you have a

design with 2 sprockets drive, select this option to

change the direction of the chain motion. When you

have a design with multiple sprockets drive, select this

option to change motion just for the given sprocket.

Power ratio Power ratio magnitude range is from 0.0 to 1.0,

depending on the amount of power that is distributed

by a given sprocket. If more than 2 sprockets are

within the chain drive, some sprockets can act also as

idlers or power can split into more driven sprockets in

some ratio. If the power ratio is 0.0, the generator

considers it an Idler. The first sprocket (driveR) always

has 100% power so the power ratio value is 1.0.

Inertia moment An important value for calculation of natural

frequencies of the chain drive. If the Vibration analysis

option is selected within the Calculation tab then the

inertia moments of toothed sprockets cannot have a

zero value. The moment of inertia is considered not

for a sprocket itself but for entire rotating mass that

holds with the sprocket.

Theoretical tooth form Generates sprocket with

theoretical form of the tooth gap for specified number

of teeth. See the Geometry design properties chapter

within the Engineer's Handbook for more information.

ISO tooth form Generates sprocket with idealized ISO

form of the tooth gap for specified number of teeth.

See the Geometry design properties chapter within the

Engineer's Handbook for more information.

Dimensions Modify the sprocket dimensions.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Clevis Pin Component Generator

Service Factor

Displays the list of factors and appropriate values.

To edit the field manually, you can enter the value in the Calculation tab, or you

can select a value from the table.

To insert a value on the Calculation tab, click the white field with a value, and

click OK.

Access: On the ribbon, click the Design tab, Fasten panel, select any

Pin Generator. On the Calculation tab, click next to the

Service Factor edit field.

Pernament Fit

Specifies the overall effect of manufacturing and operational parameters upon

connection loading capacity reduction in terms of allowable deformation of contact

surfaces. Its value depends on the pin type and connection loading character.

With regards to the mentioned parameters, the literature gives values of the

coefficient in a range from 1 to 3.

Running Fit

Specifies the overall effect of manufacturing and operational parameters upon

reduction of the loading capacity of a pin loaded with shearing or bending stress.

Its value depends on the pin type and connection loading character. With regards

to the mentioned parameters, the literature gives values of the coefficient in a

range from 1 to 3.

OK Confirms the selection and closes the dialog box.

Includes the value in the calculation.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Pin Component Generators

Modify Pin

Changes pin parameters (tolerance class, type, length, and so on).

Access: On the ribbon, click the Design tab, Fasten panel. Click any Pin

Generator, Design tab, Items area, click the Custom Properties

commands.

When you enter a parameter (Length or Diameter, for example) and

return to the Design tab of the pin generator.

You can also change the length of a pin in the Autodesk Inventor

window using the grip. If you drag the grip to the appropriate length,

the value is automatically inserted into the generator.

Confirms the parameters entered for the component.

Closes the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

O-Ring Component Generator

O-Ring Generator - Pattern tab

Connect to the Content Center server and configure Content Center on your

computer before you insert components using the O-Ring Generator. See the

Content Center Help, or Manage libraries across design workgroups Help to learn

how to use the Content Center.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel O-Ring

and click the Pattern tab.

By default, No Pattern option is selected.

When you select an o-ring, the displayed options depend on the type of selected

o-ring, axial or radial.

Apply and OK commands are grayed out. They become available when you specify

the placement geometry and select a family with a valid o-ring member. At that

point you can insert an o-ring into the assembly.

Radial o-rings

Axial o-rings

Menu Commands

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Calculators

Topics in this section

Weld Joint calculators

Solder Joint Mechanical Calculators

Clamping Joint Calculators

Tolerance Mechanical Calculator

Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator

Press Fit Calculator

Power Screw Calculator

Beam and Column Calculator

Plate Mechanical Calculator

Brake Mechanical Calculators

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Weld Joint calculators

Spot Weld Calculator - Calculation tab

Sets parameters for calculation of a spot weld joint.

Access: Ribbon: Environments tab Convert panel Spot Weld

Calculator

Calculation of Statically Loaded Weld

Specifies the Standard Calculation Procedure and Method of Comparative

Stresses. Selects a calculation method for statically loaded weld joints. Both

methods calculate resultant stresses in a similar way, but the evaluation of

results for the strength check is different. See the Engineer's Handbook for

used methods of weld joint calculations.

Standard

Calculation

Procedure

Checks joint strength by direct comparison of

calculated normal, shear, or resulting reduced stress

with the allowable stress by using a standard

calculation procedure. See the Engineer's Handbook

for calculation formulas.

Method of

Comparative

Stresses

Compares allowable stress with auxiliary comparative

stress, which is determined from the calculated partial

stresses by using conversion factors of the weld joint

when the strength check is carried out with this

method. See the Engineer's Handbook for calculation

formulas.

Loads

Enter the acting force.

Dimensions

Summarizes all parameters necessary for definition of the weld geometry.

Displayed options depend on the Weld Design selected type.

Joint Material and Properties

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Opens the Material Database where you select a material. Edit the properties

of the material, if needed.

Yield Strength Displays the maximum stress that can be applied

without permanent deformation of the test specimen.

The value is automatically modified according to the

selected material. When you edit the value, the

selected material is changed to User.

Safety Factor Enter the value or click the arrow to set the value in

the Safety Factor dialog box.

Weld Design

Diagrammatic pictures of weld design are changed according to the selected weld

type. Choose the corresponding weld design.

Results

Displays the calculated values and the weld strength check.

Summary of Messages area

Displays the reports about calculation. To open the Summary of Messages area at

the bottom of the tab, double-click the double line at the bottom of the tabs or

click the chevron.

Toolbar buttons

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Solder Joint Mechanical Calculators

Step Solder Joint Calculator - Calculation tab

Sets parameters for calculation of a step solder joint.

Access: Ribbon: Environments tab Convert panel Step Solder

Calculator

Type of Strength Calculation

Joint Design Designs the step depth for the indicated load,

dimensions, and joint properties.

Check Calculation Performs the strength check for the specified load,

dimensions, and connection properties.

Load

Specifies the force carried by the joint or for the torque in the stepped joint.

The direction of load action is shown in the diagram of the solder joint in the

dialog window.

Joint Material and Properties

Select the check box to open the Material Database and select a material.

Edit the properties of the material, if needed.

Shear Safety

Factor

Specifies the Shear Safety Factor value you enter or

select in the dialog box that opens when you click the

button beside the input field. The recommended range

of appropriate coefficients is displayed in the dialog

box.

Dimensions

Specifies dimensions of connected materials. The picture of the weld joint

contains the most important geometric joint dimensions specified in the

Dimensions section. Forces and moments which load the joint and which are

entered in the Loads section, are represented in the same way.

Results

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Assessments of the joint strength, including the results of the strength check, are

presented in the Results section. If input parameters are changed, refresh the

values in this section by clicking the Calculate button (F5 key).

Summary of Messages area

Displays the reports about calculation. To open the Summary of Messages area at

the bottom of the tab, double-click the double line at the bottom of tabs or click

the chevron.

Toolbar buttons

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Clamping Joint Calculators

Cone Joint Calculator

Sets parameters for calculation of cone joints.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Cone Joint

Calculator

Loads

Loading is entered through torque.

Dimensions

Enter the dimensions of the cone hub joint.

d, D, L Taper

Ratio

Calculates the pin taper ratio for the specified pin

diameters and joint length.

d, D, Taper

Ratio L

Calculates the joint length for the specified pin

diameters and taper ratio.

d, L, Taper

Ratio D

Calculates the major pin diameter for the

specified taper ratio, minor pin diameter, and

joint length.

D, L, Taper

Ratio d

Calculates the minor pin diameter for the

specified taper ratio, major pin diameter, and

joint length.

Joint Properties

Type of Loading Using the roll-down menu, select the Type of

loading.

Material Check the check box to open Material Database

and select a material. Edit the properties of the

material, if needed.

Allowable

Pressure

Allowable pressure in the joint is entered by

selection from the list according to the joint

character or by typing a value into the input

field.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Results

Displays the calculated values and the joint strength check.

Summary of Messages area

Summary of Messages area opens at the bottom of the tab when you double-click

the double line at the bottom of tabs or if you click the chevron at the bottom of

the tabs. It displays the reports about calculation.

Toolbar buttons

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Tolerance Mechanical Calculator

Tolerance

In the Tolerance dialog box, you can enter individual chain element dimensions

and tolerances.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Tolerance

Calculator. On the Calculation Tab, Dimension List box, click

Edit.

Confirms the tolerance inputs.

Closes the Tolerance dialog box.

Name: Enter the tolerance name.

Model value: Displays the computed value of the selected

dimension. You cannot change the value in this dialog

box.

Tolerance

Redefines the tolerance type and value for the selected dimension. Click the

arrow and select from the list.

Type: Specifies the tolerance type. The tolerance method

determines which tolerance values are available. Click

the arrow and select from the list.

Upper: Sets the value for upper tolerance.

Hole: Sets the tolerance value for the hole dimensions when

using Limits and Fits tolerance. Click the arrow and

the tolerance from the list.

Lower: Sets the value for upper tolerance.

Shaft: Sets the tolerance value for the shaft dimensions

when using Limits and Fits tolerance. Click the arrow

and the tolerance from the list.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator

Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator

Use to design fits and limits.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Limits/Fits

Calculator

The Limits and Fits Mechanical calculator takes recommendations from ISO 286 or

ANSI B4.1. The option to select a standard is available within the More Options

area. (To display the More Options area, click More in the lower right corner

of the Calculation tab.) Each standard has its own profile and the units of the

nominal diameter and deviations are millimeters for ISO and inches for ANSI.

Conditions

Tolerances

Tolerance Zones

Specify the limits and fits. Selected fit is displayed in a graphic form.

Fit Type Select Clearance, Transition, or Interference.

Preferred

Fits

Select 1 of the predefined Fits. The list is dynamically

updated when the Fit Type is changed. The Limits graph

is dynamically updated to display the selected fit.

Limits Select the limit letter and number. The Limits graph is

dynamically updated to display the selected Limits. If

you manually enter any letter or number, the Fit Type

and Preferred Fits pull-down lists are disabled. When

you click the Fit Type and Preferred Fits drop-down

arrows, you enable these selections and Limits entries

are reset to default values.

Limits are defined by a letter and a number. Capitol

letters are used for holes, and lower case letters are

used for shafts.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

The letter is the Fundamental Deviation from the basic

size. It is the maximum size or upper tolerance of the

feature.

The number is the Standard Tolerance Grade. It is the

size of the tolerance zone. Subtract the Standard

Tolerance Grade from the Fundamental deviation to

determine the minimum size or lower tolerance of the

limit.

Limits

graph

Displays all available hole and shaft tolerance classes for

the entered nominal diameter and tolerance grade. You

can see currently selected tolerance class, displayed in a

hidden line. Pause the cursor over each fit symbol to see

the information about any fit deviations, which belong to

the selected tolerance class. Click a tolerance class to

change it.

The Zero line is displayed. The fit parameters are

dimensioned to show the tolerance zone dependencies

clearly. The dimensions that join the center of the

tolerance zones can have a value of less than zero.

Using this technique, you can design the transition fit

with respect to the maximum center value. It defines

the Interference fit (negative) or Clearance fit (positive).

(More)

Results

To display the Results area on the right side of the Calculation tab, double-click

the double line on the right or click the chevron.

The area displays numerical values for the tolerances. Click Calculate to calculate

the values.

The following items are displayed in the Results pane:

Hole

Minimum diameter of the hole (Hole min)

Maximum diameter of the hole (Hole max)

Upper tolerance of the hole (Hole upper)

Lower tolerance of the hole (Hole lower)

Shaft

Minimum diameter of the shaft (Shaft min)

Maximum diameter of the shaft (Shaft max)

Upper tolerance of the shaft (Shaft upper)

Lower tolerance of the shaft (Shaft lower)

For Clearance Fits

Minimum clearance diametric value of the fit (Clearance min)

Maximum clearance diametric value of the fit (Clearance max)

For Transition Fits

Maximum interference diametric value of the fit (Interference

max)

Midpoint

Distance between midpoints of tolerance zones (Midpoint)

Toolbar buttons

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Press Fit Calculator

Press Fit Calculator

Sets parameters for calculation of a press fit.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Press Fit

Calculator

Required Load

Enter values for required transferred loading.

Required Torque Performs a calculation according to required

torque.

Required Force Performs a calculation according to required

force.

Torque Maximum torque required to transfer between

shaft and hub.

Force Axial force required to transfer between shaft

and hub.

Safety Factor Enter the value of safety factor. This value is

multiplied with force or torque and in fact

describes size of over design. Use higher number

than 1.0 specially if non-static load is applied.

Dimensions

Enter dimensions for press fit. If you enter values that do not correspond with

other dimensions, the values are displayed in red.

Outer Diameter Enter outer diameter of the hub.

Shaft Diameter External shaft diameter in place of contact.

Inner Diameter Internal shaft diameter of hollow shaft. If solid shaft is

considered use 0.0.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

considered use 0.0.

Connection Length Enter length of pressure connection.

Limits and Fits

This part of the panel is used to find standard fit for shaft and hub.

Fit Symbol Standard hub and shaft fit that is calculated

based on ISO or ANSI standard.

Change... Opens the Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator -

Interference Fit dialog box. You can adjust the

maximum and minimum interference. Click OK to

return to the Calculation tab.

Fundamental

Deviations

If the corresponding standard fit for the

calculated maximum possible and minimum

possible interference cannot be found, the limit

deviations are calculated and numerically

expressed. In the tolerance field, you can adapt

the limit deviations. You cannot exceed

maximum possible or minimum possible

interference. If so, the calculated interferences

are shown in red and display an error message.

To adapt limit deviations, clear the check box for

the Specify manually option in the Fundamental

Deviations box.

Note : When you click Calculate, Design

Accelerator presents a new solution or calculates

new limit deviations. Your changes are not saved.

When you edit the fields, partial results are

calculated. It is not necessary to start the

calculation again.

Advanced

Assembly

Clearance

Assembly clearance is an important dimension for

the shaft cooling temperature calculation and hub

warming. You can specify the dimension only

when the Assembly Clearance check box is

selected.

Surface

Smoothness

Surface quality affects the size of the trueing at

contact surfaces and the size of efficient

interference. Trueing is not applied to perfectly

interference. Trueing is not applied to perfectly

smooth surfaces. For smooth surfaces, the

efficient interference equals the minimum

interference and the maximum loading capacity.

The Surface Smoothness fields for editing surface

quality are only available when you select the

Surface Smoothness check box. If you clear the

check box, you can specify the value of trueing.

The surface quality value is not used in the

calculation.

Clamping Factor The calculation contains a table of minimum

values for the steel parts clamping coefficient.

Click the button on the Clamping Factor box to

open the Clamping Factor table.

Clamping Factor

(pressing)

Applies this factor for connections manufactured

(connected) in the cold state. Pressing force

affects the assembly shaft and hub.

Hub Material

Opens the Material Database where you select a material. Edit the properties

of the material, if needed.

Material can be selected form predefined values. All properties that are used

in calculation are displayed and can be modified if "user" material is selected.

Shaft Material

Opens the Material Database where you select a material. Edit the properties

of the material, if needed.

Material can be selected form predefined values. All properties that are used

in calculation are displayed and can be modified if "user" material is selected.

Temperature

Limitation of Hub

Warming Up

Sets limitations for hub warming up.

Limitation of

Shaft Cooling

Sets limitations for shaft cooling.

Hub Warming Up Specifies the minimum warming up temperature

for the hub if the connection is assembled in the

for the hub if the connection is assembled in the

hot state.

Base

Temperature

Specifies the base temperature of the

surroundings environment.

Shaft Cooling Specifies the minimum cooling temperature of

the shaft if the connection is assembled in the

hot state.

Results

Displays the results of strength proportion calculation. Also, the hub warming

temperature is shown, which can be reduced by using shaft cooling.

Summary of Messages

Toolbar buttons

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Power Screw Calculator

Power Screw Calculator - Calculation tab

Sets parameters for calculation of a power screw.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Power

Screw Calculator

Type of Strength Calculation

Screw Diameter

Design

Calculates the screw diameter according to the

specified load, geometric dimensions, material

properties, and safety coefficient.

Material Design Designs the minimum material values for the specified

load, length, and properties.

Check Calculation Performs the stress check in the screw, and checks

allowable pressure in its threads.

Loads

Specifies force, moment, and thread friction coefficient.

Max. Axial Force Sets the value of maximum operating force carried by

the screw.

Max.Torque Sets the value of maximum operating torque.

Thread Friction

Factor

Sets the friction coefficient in the thread between the

nut and the screw. Values are presented in the table

in the Engineer's Handbook.

Screw

Specifies or calculates screw diameter, nut height, factor for end conditions,

and maximum length of loaded screw.

Thread Diameter,

Pitch, and Mean

Screw Diameter

Sets geometric screw dimensions.

Min. Screw

Diameter

Sets the smallest screw diameter, usually the thread

small diameter.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Diameter small diameter.

Nut Height Specifies the active nut (thread) height.

Factor for End

Conditions

Sets the coefficient according to the diagram of

mounting types. See the chapter in the Engineer's

Handbook.

Max. Length Specifies the maximum loaded length of the power

screw.

Material

Specifies screw properties. Check the check box to open Material Database

and select a material. Edit the properties of the material, if needed.

Allowable Thread

Pressure

Sets the allowable thread pressure in the nut. Click

the arrow to show appropriate values in the Allowable

Thread Pressure table.

Elasticity Module Selects the material, such as steel, aluminum, or a

custom value.

Yield Strength Sets the yield strength of the screw.

Safety Factor Sets the required safety level, usually from 2 through

10.

Type of transmission

Rotation Shift Transform rotation to shift.

Shift Rotation Transform shift to rotation.

Results

Displays the calculated and limit stresses in the screw and pressure in

the thread.

Summary of Messages area

Displays the reports about calculation. To open the Summary of

Messages at the bottom of the Calculation tab, double-click the double

line at the bottom or click the chevron.

Toolbar buttons

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Beam and Column Calculator

Restraint

Use this dialog box to enter parameters of a restraint.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Frame panel Beam/Column Calculator

Click the Beam Calculation tab. From the Loads &

Supports drop-down list select Supports, and on the

toolbar click Add Restraint.

In the Loads & Supports area of the Calculation tab,

select restrain in the tree control, and click Restraint

properties.

Double-click the support preview in the Autodesk

Inventor window.

Distance Enter the distance value which defines the distance

of the restraint from the left side of the element.

Yielding Define the plasticity for XY and XZ planes.

Radial

Displacement

Enter the radial displacement values for XY and XZ

planes.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Plate Mechanical Calculator

Plate Calculator

Calculates flat plates of the circular, square, and rectangular shape with uniformly

distributed load over the surface, or with load concentrated at the center.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Frame panel Plate Calculator

Type of Strength Calculation

Design for specific

deflection

Designs the minimal thickness and material values for

specified load and deflection.

Design of minimal

material values

Designs the minimal material values for specified load

and dimensions.

Design of plate

thickness

Designs the minimal thickness of plate for specified

load and properties.

Strength check Performs the strength check for the specified load,

dimensions, and properties.

Shape of plate

Select on of the place shapes from the drop-down menu: Circular Flat Plate,

Square Flat Plate, or Rectangular Flat Plate.

Support type

Select the supported edges or fixed edges and the support type.

Load

Select the appropriate type of load and load input.

Material

Select the check box to open Material Database and select a material. Edit

the properties of the material, if needed.

Yield Strength Displays the maximum stress that can be applied

without permanent deformation of the test specimen.

The value is automatically modified according to the

selected material. When you edit the value, the

selected material is changed to User.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

selected material is changed to User.

Safety Factor Specifies the value you enter or select from the

predefined list.

Dimensions of

Plate

Summarizes all parameters necessary for definition of the plate geometry.

Results

Displays the calculated values and the plate strength check.

Summary of Messages area

To open the Summary of Messages area at the bottom of the tab, double-click

the double line at the bottom of tabs or click the chevron. It displays the

reports about calculation.

Tip

To complete the plate calculation or design, click Calculate.

To create an output report, click the Results icon.

Toolbar buttons

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Brake Mechanical Calculators

Start Energy

Displays a dialog for energy calculation.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Drum Brake

Calculator, Disc Brake Calculator, Cone Brake Calculator, or

Band Brake Calculator. Then click the button next to the Start

Energy edit field.

OK Click to confirm the selection and close the

dialog window. Enters the Start Energy value in

the calculation.

Cancel Closes the Start Energy dialog box.

Rotation Energy

Moment of

Inertia

Enter value of Moment of Inertia of the braked

element.

Revolutions Enter the value for Revolutions of the braked

element.

Rotary Energy Calculated value of the Rotary Energy.

Kinetic Energy

Mass Enter value of Mass of the braked element.

Speed Enter value of Speed of the braked element.

Kinetic Energy Calculated value of the Kinetic Energy.

Start Energy Calculated value of Start Energy.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Content Center

Topics in this section

Content Center Installation and Setup

Administrative tasks on the Autodesk server

Migrate or synchronize user libraries

Configuration of Content Center libraries

Content Center Environment

Find parts in the Content Center Library

Content Center Consumer

AutoDrop

Refresh Standard Components

Content Center Editor

Publish parts and features in Content Center

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Content Center Installation and Setup

Share libraries across design workgroups

Before beginning, designate an administrator who installs and manages Content

Center libraries on the Autodesk data management server.

Library configurations for team members are saved in the Autodesk Inventor

project and can be edited in Project Editor. Each team member can create a

personal project using the project file (.ipj) as a template, or include a common

project (.ipj) file that is configured with the shared libraries. This enables each

team member to have the same configuration.

Note You cannot include a project file in an Autodesk Vault project file. Autodesk

Vault does not support included project files.

If you are connecting to a vault database and the Content Center libraries

database, the administrator creates the vault project file first and makes it the

active project. Then the administrator configures the Content Center libraries in

the Configure Libraries dialog box.

Overview

Install the server and client components for a design team.

Create a common project file (.ipj) with the desired configuration of

Content Center libraries. This project can be used as a template or as an

included project.

In the common project, change the folder where standard components

are created, if needed.

In Autodesk Vault Server Console, create the user accounts for anyone

requiring editing permissions. Communicate user account information

and the Login procedure to each member in the team.

Install the server components

Use the server console to configure libraries on the server

Create Content Center Editor user accounts in the server console

Install the client components

Concept Procedure

Connect to the server from Autodesk Inventor

Create a project file (.ipj) and configure Content Center libraries

Configure local project settings

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Administrative tasks on the Autodeskserver

Autodesk Server Console - Reference

Use the server console to perform Content Center Library administrative tasks.

The server console displays the list of Content Center libraries currently available

on the server.

Note An .mdf and an .idf file comprise one library and must be maintained as a

pair for both Import and Export.

Access

Start Programs Autodesk Autodesk Data Management

Autodesk Vault (Server Console).

Context Menu for Libraries folder

Create

Library

Creates a read/write Content Center library that can be

configured for use in a local or remotely served

Autodesk Inventor project.

Attach Attaches an existing .mdf and .idf file (containing

Content Center library data) to the server. Use the

Attach command to:

Reattach to the server a library you previously

detached.

Attach a library (pair of .mdf and .idf files)

Note For information on the location of the libraries see

the Autodesk Data Management Server (version)

Implementation Guide. The guide is installed as a PDF in

Program Files > Autodesk > ADMS [version] > Help.

Use the Library Name dialog box to specify the library

name, which may be different than the name of the

.mdf file.

Import Copies library files (a pair of .mdf and .idf files) that are

not in the database to the server console.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Note For information on the location of the libraries see

the Autodesk Data Management Server (version)

Implementation Guide. The guide is installed as a PDF in

Program Files > Autodesk > ADMS [version] > Help.

Context Menu for a selected library

Detach Removes Content Center libraries from the list of

available libraries in the Content Center Library Manager

dialog box. Detach does not delete them from the

database. The libraries can be reattached and made

available using the Attach command, or can be manually

copied to another location, for example, to be backed

up or moved to another computer.

Delete Detaches and deletes the selected library from the

database. All data contained in the library is

permanently deleted.

Export Copies a set of library files that are in the server

console to a specified location. You can specify a folder

on the same computer or a location available on the

network.

Read

Only

Changes the status of a user-created read/write Library

to read-only.

Note The read-only status of Autodesk Inventor

standard and Parker libraries cannot be changed.

Copy Copies a library from the Autodesk Inventor 2008 or

2009 partition to the Autodesk Inventor 2010 partition.

Edit

Display

Name

Edits the display name of the library.

Note For information on the location of the libraries see the Autodesk Data

Management Server (version) Implementation Guide. The guide is installed as a

PDF in Program Files > Autodesk > ADMS [version] > Help.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Migrate or synchronize user libraries

Update Tool

Use the Update Tool guide to migrate and synchronize user libraries.

Access:

Click Manage Projects. In the Projects dialog box,

click Configure Content Center Libraries. In the Configure

Libraries dialog box, click Update Tool.

Step 1:

Welcome Page

Review the introduction and click Next

Step 2:

Libraries to

Migrate

Select libraries to migrate and click Next.

The Libraries to Migrate list displays all legacy

libraries that need to be migrated. If you clear

the selection for a library, the library will not be

available for use in your version of Autodesk

Inventor.

Step 3:

Libraries to

Synchronize

Select libraries to synchronize and click Next.

The Libraries to Synchronize list displays all

libraries that include out-of-date copied families

with link to parents. Parent families must be

available in the current library configuration to

perform the synchronization. Synchronization is

not mandatory.

Step 4: Library

Analysis

Set the options and click Next to start the

process.

Select location for family templates backup If

appropriate, change the location of the backup

folder.

Do not create backup of customized part

templates Select to discard your customized

family templates. If not selected, customized

legacy family templates are saved in the backup

folder, and you can replace the standard

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

folder, and you can replace the standard

templates with your customized templates.

Overwrite existing files Select to replace the

existing files in the backup folder with the new

files.

Create Log file Select to create a log file. The

log file is saved in the specified folder.

Step 5: Update

Finished

Review the process report.

Done lists all actions that are complete.

Final fix required lists families that require

additional table fix.

Failures lists families that did not update and

why the family failed to update.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Configuration of Content Centerlibraries

Content Center log files

Log files are generated which record the events that occur during installation.

The log files are typically written to Documents and Settings\[USERID]\Local

Settings\Temp.

In addition, there are subfolders for the server, client, and Web client installations

(named Server, Vault, and WebClient, respectively). Each installed product writes

to its own log file in one of those subfolders. So, you sometimes see edm_wse.log

and msde.log under Server\ too.

You can use a log file to track system operations, warning, and errors.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Content Center Environment

Customize Selection

Use the Customize Selection dialog box to select or reorder properties displayed

in the Detail List view.

Access: In the Content Center dialog box, click View > Detail List on

the menu. Then right-click a column heading on the Detail List

table and click Customize.

Properties

list

Lists family properties that can be displayed in the Detail

List view.

Select a property to display it in the view. Clear the

check box to remove a property from the view.

Move Up Moves the selected property up in the list. Moves the

corresponding column to the left in the Detail List view.

Move

Down

Moves the selected property down in the list. Moves the

corresponding column to the right in the Detail List

view.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Find parts in the Content CenterLibrary

Advanced Search

Use Search for searching in Content Center Library. You can search in the entire

Library, or you can search for a part that matches specific criteria in the

Advanced Search dialog box.

Access: In the Content Center dialog box, click Search , and then

click Advanced Search on the Quick Search bar.

Look For: Click the drop-down arrow and select Families to

list families in Search Result, or Members to list

all members of families that match the searching

criteria.

Look In: Click the Categories button to specify categories

to include in the search.

Note A structure of all available categories is

displayed. Select categories to include them in

the selection.

Search Now Starts the search process.

Search Result: Lists families that match the selected search

criteria.

Move to

Content Center

Displays all Search Result families in the Content

Center dialog box.

Basic Tab

Name To specify a name as search criteria, select the

check box and enter a name in the text field.

To specify a description as search criteria, select

the check box and enter a description in the text

field.

Part Number To specify a Part Number as search criteria,

select the check box and enter a Part Number in

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

select the check box and enter a Part Number in

the text field.

Standard To specify a Standards search criteria, click the

drop-down arrow and select from the list.

Material To specify a Material as search criteria, select the

check box and click the button next to the Value

field. Then select appropriate materials in the

Select Materials dialog box, and click OK.

Advanced Tab

Define more

criteria

Defines a search condition.

Parameter Select a parameter from the list of category

parameters.

Condition Select a condition operator for the selected

parameter.

For string parameters, choose Contains, Starts

with, Ends by, or In List operator.

Value Defines a value, list of values, or range for the

selected parameter.

Notes:

Enter a value with the unit for numeric values. If

the unit is not specified, centimeters are used as

the default unit.

If you select In List operator, use a semicolon to

separate individual values.

If you select Material as Parameter, click the

button next to the Value field to select materials

from the list.

Add to list Adds the search condition to the list of search

criteria.

Find items that

match these

criteria

Displays the search criteria to use when Search

Now is clicked.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Content Center Consumer

Place or Replace from Content Center, Change Size

Use the Family dialog box to select a family member, and then complete 1 of the

following operations:

Place from Content Center: Places a part into an assembly.

Place Feature: Places a feature into a part or assembly.

Replace from Content Center: Replaces a Content Center component

in an assembly.

Change size: Changes the size of a Content Center component in an

assembly.

Note The available options depend on how the dialog box is accessed

Access: The following commands use the Family dialog box:

Open from Content Center

Place Part from Content Center

Place Feature from Content Center

Replace from Content Center

As

Custom

Places the selected member as a custom part.

As

Standard

Places the selected member as a standard part.

Use

iMates

Places the selected by using the Content Center

component iMates.

Replace

All

Replaces all instances of the selected part in the

assembly. Available only for Content Center parts.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Context menu:

Add to

Favorites

Adds the part or feature with the selected parameters to

the active Favorites group.

Select tab

Table View

Family Information

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

AutoDrop

AutoDrop

Use AutoDrop to automatically size and place standard content.

Access: In an open assembly file:

In the Place from Content Center dialog box:

Select an AutoDrop enabled Family, and

click OK.

Double-click an AutoDrop enabled family.

Note Hold down ALT and double-click an

AutoDrop enabled family to place a member

from the Family dialog box. The Family

dialog box allows selection of specific sizes

and material.

From the Browser Bar Favorites drop-down menu, use

drag and drop or double-click the selected AutoDrop-

enabled family.

Overview of individual cursors:

Select a conical hollow face - used for a countersunk

bolt. The target cone angle and the bolt head cone angle

must be the same.

Select a shaft cylinder - used for bearings, washers,

retaining rings, and so on.

Select an edge on a shaft - used for bearings,

washers, retaining rings, and so on.

Select an edge in a housing - used for bearings.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Select a hollow cylindrical face -used for bolts, pins,

bearings, and so on.

Select a hole edge -used for bolts, nuts, washers, pins,

and so on.

Select a tapped cylindrical face - used for nuts.

Select a normal planar face - used for nuts, bolts,

washers, bearings, pins, and so on. Used as a secondary

target after a cylindrical face was selected.

Select a groove edge

Select an inner groove edge - used for external and

internal retaining rings.

Toolbar commands

Change size inserts the part and opens the Part Family dialog

box where you can edit the component.

Bolted Connection opens the Bolted Connection Generator.

Available for some bolts only.

Apply inserts the component to the assembly. This command

finishes the current insertion and AutoDrop continues with the

given family. You can insert several sizes during one command

call. The subsequent default member is always the last one

dropped.

Done inserts the component to the assembly and stops

AutoDrop.

Follow pattern is for circular patterns. If the target geometry

is in a pattern, the inserted component can follow the pattern.

By default, this option is switched on.

Note The pattern must be on a part, not an assembly.

Follow pattern for rectangular patterns. If the target

geometry is in a pattern, the inserted component can follow the

geometry is in a pattern, the inserted component can follow the

pattern. By default, this option is switched on.

Note The pattern must be on a part, not an assembly.

Insert multiple inserts multiple components. This switch is

available if AutoDrop identifies several available targets like the

selected target. For example, if you select a circular edge of a

hole and in the target component there are several co-planar

circular edges with the same diameter, use this switch to

populate components for all holes.

If the Insert multiple switch is on, AutoDrop highlights the

targets. Use the tooltip of the Insert multiple button to check

how many components are offered for the insertion.

Insert multiple function does not offer targets for insertion that

are already occupied. If there is a component already inserted

to some geometry, Insert multiple function disregards such

target. For example, if a screw is inserted to some of the holes,

such holes are not populated. This behavior happens even if

the screw is invisible or suppressed.

Flip flips the bearing. It changes the bearing side used for

mating (for example for tapered roller bearings).

The bearing is always inserted to mate the adjacent planar

face, regardless of the flip. With some bearings, which look the

same from both sides, the flip has no visible effect. If the

particular bearing family template does not have iMates defined

from both sides of the bearing, the Flip command is not

available.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Refresh Standard Components

Standard Component Refresh

Use Refresh Standard Components to update out-of-date

standard parts in an assembly by using the most current data

from the Content Center library.

Access: Open an assembly file which contains Content Center standard

parts, and click Manage tab Content Center panel Refresh.

Current

Project

Information

Project Name displays the name of the current project.

Content Center Files displays the path to the folder

where Content Center part files are stored. Standard

parts must be saved in the Content Center Files folder

to include them in the Refresh Standard Components

process.

Revised

Standard

Components

Lists all out-of-date Content Center standard parts.

Refresh selects the standard part to refresh. Clear the

selection to skip the standard part during the refreshing.

Component shows the display name of the standard

part. The display name is for example visible in the

assembly browser.

Status displays the status of the standard part. The

status changes after the part is refreshed. For more

details, see Statuses of standard parts before and after

refresh.

Differing Language displays the language of the

standard part when it differs from the current Content

Center language.

Family Folder displays the folder where the standard

part is saved within the Content Center Files folder.

Part File displays the name of the standard part file.

Family Name displays the current Family Name of the

family saved in the library. Use the Family Name to find

the family in Content Center, if appropriate.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Select All Selects all standard parts in the Revised Standard

Components list.

Unselect All Clears the selection for all standard parts in the Revised

Standard Components list.

Refresh Starts the refreshing process.

Click to

Open Log

File

Opens the log file and displays a detailed report of the

refreshing process. For more details, see Warnings and

Failures list and description.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Content Center Editor

Material Guide (Panel 8) - Final Report

Review the process report.

Access: Click Manage tab Content Center panel Editor to open the

Content Center Editor dialog box. Then locate the category,

family, or families to add materials and do one of the following:

Select a category, right-click, and click Material Guide.

Select families (or one family), right-click, and click

Material Guide.

Select a family, right-click, and select Family Table. In

the Family Table dialog box, select family members

(rows) to add material to, right-click, and click

Material Guide.

Stop Terminates the material adding process.

Is available only while the process runs. Adding

materials is always completed for the family in

progress before the process stops.

Save

Report

Saves a detailed report about the material adding

process into a TXT file.

Finish Closes the Material Guide dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Publish parts and features in ContentCenter

Publish feature

Use the Publish Feature to select an Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, or Hole feature

and its parameters and publish to a Content Center library. For hole features with

multiple hole center points, you can publish the hole in two ways. You can publish

either with all center points or publish the hole as a single hole without existing

center points.

Text on a profile sketch is not included in a published feature.

Access: Click Manage tab Content Center panel Publish Feature.

A dialog box to specify parameters and properties for the

selected Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, or Hole feature is displayed.

After specifying parameters and properties, click Next to open

the Publish dialog box.

Parameters tab

Properties tab

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Build structural frames with FrameGenerator

Topics in this section

Frame Generator

Apply or Modify End Treatments

BOMs and Cut Lists

Structural Shape Authoring

Tips for generating frames

Frame Generator browser

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator >

Frame Generator

Resolve errors

Errors can occur when inserting, changing, or updating frame members. Problems

can also occur while you use commands such as Miter or Lengthen/Shorten Frame

Member. While most errors produce a logical error message, an uncommon and

unknown error can result in a message stating the error is unknown.

Error messages are shown in different ways:

If problems occur, Autodesk Inventor displays a message dialog box.

The dialog box explains where the error originated and why the error

occurred.

An icon is displayed next to a node in the browser indicating that the

element is sick. When you pass the cursor over the node for the sick

element, a tooltip explains the reason for the sickness.

You can fix errors when they occur in various operations:

Insert frame member

Change frame member

Miter

Trim to Frame

Trim to Face

Notch

Lengthen

Promote/Demote

Position update sick

End Treatment update sick

Other

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator >

Apply or Modify End Treatments

Remove End Treatments

Returns a frame member to its original creation state.

Access: On the ribbon, click the Design tab. Click the Frame panel

drop-down arrow, and select Remove End Treatments .

Select Frame

Members to

Remove End

Treatments

Select the frame member to return to its

original creation state.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator >

BOMs and Cut Lists

A bill of materials is a table that contains information about the parts within an

assembly. It includes quantities, names, costs, vendors, and other needed

information. Quantities on the bill of materials are updated when a part is added

or removed from the assembly

The Frame Generator is integrated with the bill of materials and drawing

functionality in Autodesk Inventor. Frame members behave like other Autodesk

Inventor parts in Bills of Material (BOMs) and Parts List, and support ballooning

and cut list roll-up.

The BOM functionality in Autodesk’s Inventor software supports three of the most

common structural frame bills of material:

A unique part number for frame members with identical stock, length,

and cut treatments.

A single part number per frame stock type. Often, the part number is

the stock number.

All frame members receive a unique part number.

Assigning Part Numbers

Cut Lists

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator >

Structural Shape Authoring

Structural Shape Authoring

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Structural Shape

Layout

Defines the category and geometry of the part to be published.

Category

Use the pull-down menu to view the list of available publishing categories. When

you select a category, the graphics and selection prompts adjust appropriately to

guide authoring.

Geometry Mapping

In the geometry mapping group box, define the structural shape. Two geometry

types are listed.

Base Extrusion

Select Geometry Parts authored for Frame Generator require a base

extrusion feature. If there is only one extrusion feature in the part, it is

automatically selected. If there is more than one feature, the user has

to manually select the base feature.

Default Base point

This row becomes available after the first selection row is satisfied. The

Selection column contains two selection filters.

Predefined Point is the default, and is selected automatically once a

base extrusion is selected. The default insertion point is the geometric

center of the profile.

Select Geometry defines a base point based on your selection of a

point in the highlighted sketch of the selected extrusion feature. The

selected sketch point is highlighted in red in the graphics window, and is

shown in the Selection Preview.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Selection Preview

A selection preview provides dynamic visual feedback from the sketch of the

extrusion feature you select. The preview is available after you select a category

for authoring and the extrusion feature is selected.

Parameter Mapping

Enables mapping between category parameters, family columns, and template

parameters. Required parameters have a light yellow background, and optional

parameters have a white background. The only required parameter for Frame

Generator authoring is the base length.

Category Parameters and Table Columns

Lists the parameters for the selected category. Enables mapping of table columns

to category parameters.

All steel shape categories provide the same parameters to map to the appropriate

part table column names. Mapping is required for parameters displayed with a

light yellow background.

Publish Now

Available when all geometries are selected and required parameters are mapped.

Completes the authoring of the part and starts the Publish part command.

OK

Available when all of the geometries are selected. Saves the authoring of the part

and then closes the dialog box.

Cancel

Discards authoring input and closes the dialog box.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator >

Tips for generating frames

Frame members

Frame Generator supports assemblies and weldments.

Frame members cannot be inserted on closed curves (like circle, ellipse).

If closed curves are involved, use the standard sweep feature in

Autodesk Inventor to complete the insertion.

Frame Generator does not consider bending practices or bend

deformation according to established manufacturing standards. As a

result, you can create sharp bends that cannot actually be manufactured

due to material or manufacturing process limitations.

Frame Generator support of Positional representations is limited to

changes in the frame only. Individual frame members do not move

relative to one another, although they can move or rotate together.

Setting transformation to a frame member occurrence has no effect in

the parent assembly when the frame document is in Positional

representation.

You can promote and demote frame members in the browser using the

context menu. Ensure that the subassemblies that contain the frame

members are grounded after demoting. Note that the drag function is

not available for promoting or demoting frame members in the browser.

Frames must be encapsulated in an assembly to apply kinematics. A

frame can be placed in a deep-level subassembly. In that case, perform

an in-place edit on its parent assembly before you use any Frame

Generator commands. Only entities inside a parent assembly can be

selected for Frame Generator commands.

Frames are automatically updated while you edit the skeleton model. To

ensure best performance of Frame update, put only skeleton lines for

locating frame members into a skeleton model.

You must keep the reference skeleton model in sync with the Frame

assembly. Each frame member must have a corresponding line in the

reference skeleton part. Consistency between the frame assembly and

the reference skeleton model might be broken if you do one of the

following:

Replace the reference skeleton components

Replace the reference skeleton file on disk

Check out inconsistent skeleton files from the Vault.

Use a frame assembly to organize structural members under an

assembly. A single assembly can have only one frame assembly.

End treatments

Frame end treatments of a rail on a spline are not directly supported in

Frame Generator. If splines or arc segments are involved, either add a

straight segment at the end and use the automated functionality for end

treatments, or use the standard editing commands in Autodesk

Inventorto complete end treatments.

If you create frame members using multiple edges and the Merge

feature, you cannot apply automatic end treatments to them with Frame

Generator commands. Instead, you can apply cuts and trims using

standard modeling commands within Autodesk Inventor to edit the part

directly.

Frame Generator doesn't have multiple end treatment commands. You

can complete multiple end treatments by accumulating basic end

treatments.

Frame Generator in Autodesk Inventor 2010 does not support frame

members created in Autodesk Inventor 2007.

Drawing manager, parts lists, and BOMs

With Frame Generator, you can extract end treatments on individual

structural members in bills of material (BOMs) and parts lists.

Frame members are based on the same standard, family, and size as

Metal Shapes in the Content Center. Frame members created with

Frame Generator have identical Stock Numbers to the numbers found in

Content Center.

Frame Generator leaves the Part Number blank when the frame member

is created.

Note If the Part Number is left blank, Autodesk Inventor populates the

file name for a part number upon creation. You can change this part

number.

The part name follows standard Autodesk Inventor behavior by

defaulting to the file name for each frame member. Once you save file

names that include length, you must use Design Assistant, Vault, or

other manual methods to update them.

Frame Generator provides a mechanism for automatically organizing,

naming, and saving under a file name.

Skeletal frame models default to a Reference state in BOM structure.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator >

Frame Generator browser

Uses the Assembly browser to organize and manage machine frame entities.

When you insert the first frame member, a prompt is displayed with the option to

save the skeletal model as an assembly before you continue. When you save the

skeletal model as an assembly, a folder is created in the project workspace with

the name of the frame assembly, and a second prompt is displayed to specify the

name for the frame assembly. When you click OK to confirm the name of the

frame assembly, an assembly node is added to the browser structure. The frame

is designed in this assembly.

Browser structure of frames

Context menu for frame members

Context menu for end treatments

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Weldments

Topics in this section

Weldments environment

Templates for weldments

Strategies for designing weldments

Weld bead feature types

Weld feature groups

Welding symbols on models

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments >

Weldments environment

Convert to Weldment reference

Converts an existing assembly file to a weldment assembly. You set the standard

to use and the default weld bead material. You also indicate the weld feature

group in which to place any assembly features.

Note Once you convert an assembly to a weldment, it cannot be converted back

to a regular assembly. Although all assembly capabilities are available within a

weldment, back up each assembly before converting it.

Access: Ribbon: Environments tab Convert panel Convert to

Weldment

Standard Sets the standard to use for the weldment file.

Default is the standard set at installation. Click

the desired button to specify a new standard.

Feature

Conversion

Specifies where to place any existing assembly

features. Click the desired button to specify the

weld group to use.

Weld Bead

Material

Sets the weld bead material to use as the

default. Click the arrow to select a material from

the list.

BOM Structure Sets the BOM structure to use in the converted

assembly. Click the arrow to select from the list.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments >

Templates for weldments

Create templates for weldments

All new weldment files are created with a template. When you start a new

weldment, settings from the default weldment template are applied to the

weldment. You can create your own templates, and then add them to the

templates provided by Autodesk Inventor.

1. Create a weldment, using an existing template.

2. Set the default units of measurement.

3. Set the standard to use.

4. Specify the weld bead material type, visibility, and enabled status.

5. If needed, change the sizes of the origin work planes to accommodate

the average weldment size.

6. Set the properties for the file.

7. Save the file in the Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates folder or a

subfolder of Templates. A weldment file automatically becomes a

template when it is saved to the Templates folder.

Note The "weldment.iam" file in the Templates folder is the default assembly

template. To replace the default template, remove "weldment.iam" and replace it

with a template that has the same name.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments >

Strategies for designing weldments

You design your weldments based on how you want to create and maintain

welding symbols and weld bead annotations (caterpillars and end fills) in your

drawings.

You can create and maintain your welding symbols and weld bead annotations

using fully automated, partially automated, or manual methods. You can also

create specialized views of the different weld states in your drawing.

Use of the weldment environment supports the automatic creation and updating

of model welding symbols and weld bead annotations in the drawing environment.

It also supports the creation of specialized weld state views in drawings.

Design weldments for assembly size and performance

Design weldments for automation in drawings

Design weldments for specialized weld state views in drawings

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments >

Weld bead feature types

Cosmetic welds

Creates a cosmetic weld feature in a weldment assembly. A welding symbol may

be created simultaneously with the feature, but may be created in a separate

operation.

The weld bead and the welding symbol are separate features in the welds folder

of the browser. The welding symbol and the weld bead feature are not associated,

so you can specify any welding symbol values for any weld bead feature. When

consumed by a welding symbol, the cosmetic bead is a child node of the welding

symbol.

Cosmetic weld beads are useful when the design does not require interference

analysis or the aesthetic appearance of solid weld beads. Their approximate

physical properties can be included in mass properties.

Access: Right-click the Welds folder in the browser and select Edit. On

the ribbon, click Weld tab Weld panel Cosmetic.

The Bead box specifies the parameters for constructing the cosmetic bead.

Select Mode Sets the selection preference for areas on which to

apply the cosmetic weld bead. Edge is the default.

Chain automatically selects tangent, contiguous edges.

Loop selects a closed loop.

Extents Determines the method for ending a cosmetic weld. A

cosmetic weld can terminate on a work plane or

extend across all selected geometry for a full-length

weld. Click the arrow to select the extent method.

All creates the weld on all features and sketches in

the specified direction.

From-To select beginning and ending faces or planes

on which to terminate the weld feature. In a

weldment, the faces or planes may be on other parts,

but must be parallel.

Area Sets the cross-sectional area for a cosmetic weld bead

so the physical properties of the cosmetic bead can be

calculated.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Select Create Welding Symbol to expand the dialog box to set welding

symbol parameters. Click this link to go to the Model Welding Symbol

Reference .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments >

Weld feature groups

Weldment group properties

Access: In the browser, right-click the Welds group, select iProperties,

and then click the Weld Bead tab.

Controls characteristics for weld bead features in a weldment assembly weld

bead group. Specifies whether solid fillet weld beads and cosmetic welds are

visible and enabled. Also sets color style of the weld bead material.

Except for color style, characteristics may also be set from the context menu.

Visible Specifies whether the weld bead feature is visible in

the graphics window. Default is On (checked). Clear

the check mark to turn visibility Off.

Enabled The default setting is On (checked), which specifies

that the weld bead feature can be selected in the

graphics window. Clear the check mark to change weld

bead features to Not Enabled.

Weld Bead Color

Style

Sets the color style to use for the weld bead material.

Default is As Material.

End Fill Color

Style

Sets the color style to use for end fill. Default is As

Weld Bead.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments >

Welding symbols on models

Model welding symbol

Provides annotation and acts as a grouping mechanism by referencing multiple

beads with a single welding symbol. The beads and welding symbols are grouped

in the welding browser under the Welds folder. When consumed by a welding

symbol, beads are nested under the welding symbol that consumes them. All

weld bead features (consumed and unconsumed) are listed in the Beads folder

under the Welds browser node.

Access: In a weldment assembly, right-click the Welds folder and select

Edit. On the ribbon, click Weld tab Weld panel Symbol.

If creating a welding symbol at the same time as the bead,

select the Create Welding Symbol check box.

Sets the layout and contents of the welding symbol.

Bead Selects one or more cosmetic, fillet, and groove

weld beads to be consumed by a welding symbol.

The welding symbol groups the features into a

composite weld bead, annotated by a single

welding symbol.

The welding symbol leader is attached to one of

the consumed beads. You can drag the leader

point to any of the consumed beads.

Identification

Line

Click the arrow to select no identification line,

identification line above, or identification line

below the reference line. Available for ISO and

DIN only.

Swap Arrow/

Other Symbols

Click to switch the arrow and symbols above or

below the reference line.

Stagger Staggers the welding symbols for fillets. Available

only if fillet welding symbols are set on both

sides of the reference line.

Tail note box Adds description to the selected reference line.

ABC Select check box to enclose note text in a box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Prefix Sets a prefix to precede Leg 2 text.

Leg Specifies text for the leg.

Depth Sets the weld depth.

Symbol Click button to select symbol from palette.

Arrow side symbol selects symbol to display on

arrow side of the reference line.

Other side symbol selects symbol to display on

the other side of the reference line.

Angle Specifies the angle between weldments.

Number Specifies the number of welds.

Length Specifies the length of the weld.

Pitch Specifies the distance between welds.

Contour Specifies the contour finish for the weld. Click the

arrow and choose the contour from the list.

Secondary fillet

type

Specifies the type of weld for secondary fillets.

Click the button to display and choose from the

palette of available weld types. This button is

available only when the active drafting standard

is based on ANSI.

Angle Specifies the angle between weldments.

Brazing Specifies whether the weld is brazed. Select or

clear the check box to add or remove the

brazing symbol.

Clearance Specifies the clearance for the braze.

Depth Specifies the depth of the weld.

Diameter Specifies the diameter of the weld.

Gap Specifies the space between weldments.

Height Specifies the height of the weld.

Length Specifies the length of the weld.

Method Specifies the finish method for the weld. Click the

arrow and choose the method from the list.

Middle Specifies the type of inspection to perform on the

weld.

Number Specifies the number of welds.

Root Specifies the root thickness of the weld.

Root gap Specifies the gap for the weld.

Size Specifies the size of the weld.

Small leg Specifies the thickness of the weld.

Spacing Specifies the space between welds.

Thickness Specifies the thickness of the weld.

Flag Specifies whether to add a flag indicating a field

or site weld to the selected reference line. Click

the button to turn the flag off or on.

All Around

symbol

Specifies whether to use an all-around symbol on

the selected reference line. Click the button to

turn the symbol off or on.

Fillet Weld

Linking

Associatively links values of a single fillet weld

bead with one side of the fillet welding symbol

values and options. Can be linked to one side

(Arrow or Other) or both sides of the parent

welding symbol. Available only when unconsumed

fillet weld beads exist or when creating a new

fillet weld bead.

Click the arrow to select an unconsumed fillet

bead. When the link is established, linked

welding symbol controls are controlled by the

bead and cannot be edited.

When a welding symbol is created with

the fillet bead, the Current Bead option

prefills the symbol values with fillet

bead values.

None is the only option if all no fillet

weld beads exist or all are consumed by

welding symbols. Select None to

remove the association between the

fillet bead and the welding symbol,

allowing access to previously linked

values.

Autodesk Inventor >

Drawings

Topics in this section

Drawings overview

Create drawing views

Drawing annotations

Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD

Exploded views and presentations

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings >

Drawings overview

Topics in this section

Drawing Environment

Drawing Browser

Templates for drawings

Sheet Formats

Create drawings

Deferring automatic updates to drawings

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview >

Drawing Environment

Each new drawing is created from a template. When you install Autodesk

Inventor, your selection of a default drafting standard sets the default template

used to create drawings. Use this template or another predefined template,

modify one of the predefined templates, or create your own templates to enforce

conventions.

Create a template from a drawing, preserving annotations on drawing sheets,

such as custom symbols, notes, and revision tables. Your borders, title blocks,

and view definitions can be retained in the template. View annotations and

general notes are not saved in a template.

A drawing becomes a template when you save it in the Templates folder. For

example, if you have a drawing file that contains the setup you want to use for

other drawings, save a copy of it in the Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates

folder. The next time you create a drawing file, the new template is available.

The location of the Templates folder is by default:

Microsoft Windows XP: Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates.

Microsoft Vista: Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates.

When you create a drawing, it is automatically assigned an active drafting

standard that controls the styles used to format dimensions, text, line weights,

terminators, and other elements that are dictated. You can use the default

standard or select from another named standard (ANSI, BSI, DIN, GB, ISO, or

JIS).

The active standard has a default set of styles. Add or edit styles in the current

document, and if you want other designers to use the custom styles, save them

to the style library. Usually, the style library, which contains a master version of

all styles, is managed by the CAD Administrator.

Autodesk Inventor drawings also include elements that are not part of the named

standard. Copy, edit, or delete the elements as needed to customize them for

your company. Save the changes to sheets and views, for example, in the

drawing template, so they are available to other designers.

If you must supply customers with AutoCAD files, create a DWG template in

Autodesk Inventor using an AutoCAD file that contains the appropriate layers,

blocks, title blocks, and borders you need to deliver to your AutoCAD customers.

Specify the object defaults for these properties in the Styles Editor.

Note Autodesk Inventor needs a valid drawing template file when opening

AutoCAD .dwg files directly. By default, Autodesk Inventor uses the Standard

drawing template files (Standard.idw or Standard.dwg) located in the Templates

folder for the current project or in the Default Templates location. Override this

behavior by specifying a full path and file name to any Autodesk Inventor drawing

(*.idw;*.dwg) in the following registry key:

HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Autodesk\Inventor\RegistryVersion[version]\Applets\DrawingLayout\Preferences\General\Standard

Template Override

Setting the drafting standard

Setting up drawing resources

Setting up sheets in a template

Adding default views

Setting properties

Setting a default drawing template

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview >

Drawing Browser

Drawing browser

Shows the Drawing Resources, sheets, and views in a drawing or template.

Drawing Resources

Sheets

Views

Concept Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview >

Templates for drawings

Customize drawing templates

The following steps get you started quickly with

your company standard for drawing files. These

steps are overview of the main components of a

customized drawing template.

The Drawing Resources folder in the Drawing

browser contains folders for sheet formats, title

blocks, borders, and sketched symbols. Each can

be reused in new sheets and saved in the

template file.

Custom IDW template setup overview

Configure Document Settings

Clean up the browser

Setting the border

Title block basics - Part A: Set up and maintenance tips

Title block basics - Part B: Adding Properties

Title block basics - Part C: Format text tips

Setting Sheet Formats

Updating styles

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview >

Sheet Formats

Edit Drawing Border Parameters

Edits the parameters for a custom zone border inserted in a drawing.

Access: In the drawing browser, expand Drawing Resources and

Borders, and right-click a custom border instance. Select Insert

or Edit Instance from the menu.

Horizontal

Zones

Sets the number and style for the horizontal zones.

Number of Zones sets the number of horizontal

zones. Enter the number in the box.

Label Sets the label style for horizontal zones. Click

to select an option.

Vertical

Zones

Sets the number and style for the vertical zones.

Number of Zones sets the number of vertical

zones. Enter the number in the box.

Label sets the label style for vertical zones. Click to

select an option.

Label Zones

From

Bottom/Right sets the base point for zone labeling

to the bottom right corner of the drawing border.

Top/Left sets the base point for zone labeling to

the top left corner of the drawing border.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview >

Create drawings

Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard

The Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard is a command that copies drawing

resources from a source drawing to a target drawing. Close Autodesk Inventor

before you can use the wizard. Use the Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard to:

Transfer selected title blocks, borders, and sketched symbols to multiple

drawings.

Optionally replace existing resources in the target drawing.

Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor

[version] Tools Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard.

Welcome page Describes the Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard processes.

Select Source Drawing and Resources page Selects the source drawing, shows

a preview image, and lists drawing resources.

Source Drawing selects files to process in a detailed view.

Preview, if available, shows a thumbnail view of the source drawing.

Source Resource shows the drawing resources hierarchy.

Select Target Drawings page Selects the target drawing or multiple drawings.

Navigate to the appropriate folder.

Add drawings opens the Select Target Drawings so you

can browse to the desired folder to select one or more

target drawings.

A target drawing can be listed only once. Click the File or

Path column name to sort files.

Skipped Files dialog box opens if a target file:

Is the same as the source drawing.

Is already listed.

Is read-only.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Has not been migrated to the current version of

Autodesk Inventor.

Next progresses to the next page when one or more target

drawing is specified.

Select Option page Specifies how to handle drawing resources in the target file

that have the same name as drawing resources in the source file.

Yes replaces drawing resources in the target file with the same name as

resources in the source file.

No gives a unique name to target drawing resources that have the same name as

those in the source file. The copied resource is named Copy of ResourceName.

The target drawing version retains its original name.

Begin the Batch Processing page Shows progress of transferred selected

borders, title blocks, and sketched symbols.

Start begins processing of selected files.

Pause temporarily halts transferring resources.

Cancel halts processing.

Results of the processing are shown in a log file.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview >

Deferring automatic updates todrawings

Defer automatic updates to a drawing

When you change part and assembly models, associated drawings are updated

automatically.

You can defer the automatic updates for a drawing, keeping it static until you

change its update status.

To defer automatic updates before opening a drawing

To defer automatic updates in an open drawing

To enable automatic updates in a drawing

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings >

Create drawing views

Topics in this section

Develop assembly drawings

Design view representations in drawing files

Drawing views

Drawing view alignments

Sketches in drawings

Projecting geometry to a drawing sketch

Section views

Detail Views

Overlay Views

Break Operations

Crop Operations

Slice Operations

Create drawing views of surfaces

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Develop assembly drawings

Multi-sheet plot

Plots a collection of drawing sheets of one or more sizes. You can schedule

plotting so that several jobs print in a batch at a specified time.

Access: From the Start menu, click Programs Autodesk Autodesk

Inventor [version] Autodesk Multi-sheet plot.

Page Setup

Select Drawing Files

Select Project

Preview

Print

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Design view representations indrawing files

Create drawings of assemblies using Level of Detail representations

Use a Level of Detail representation when creating a drawing of a top-level

assembly to reduce the number of files loaded in memory. When creating a

drawing view, you can select a Level of Detail representation. Suppressed

components are not used when computing the drawing view.

1. On the ribbon, click Place Views tab Create panel Base.

2. In the Drawing View dialog box, browse to the appropriate assembly.

3. Specify the Design View and Positional representations, orientation,

and other information.

4. Select the Level of Detail to represent in the view.

5. Click the drawing sheet to place the view and close the dialog box.

Note After the view is created, you can edit the drawing view and select a

different Level of Detail representation.

For more information about creating and annotating drawings using Level of Detail

representations, see the following sections:

Guidelines for creating a view

Guidelines for creating and maintaining annotations

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Drawing views

Part, Feature, or Edge properties

Changes the line type, line weight, and color for selected edge, feature or part to

the value specified in the style or for the current document, overrides values set

in the style.

Manages properties for view edges, symbols, feature and component selection

priorities, trails, user-defined symbols, and sketch geometry.

Note You can load and use line types from AutoCAD *.lin files as the line type for

an edge property.

Access: Right-click on the edge of an object, and then select Properties

from the menu.

By Layer Available only when the Select command on the

Quick Access toolbar is set to either Feature

Priority or Part Priority. Select the check box to

show properties specified as By Layer. Clear the

check box to set Line Type, Line Weight, or Color

independently.

Line Type Specifies how a line or type of curve is displayed.

Set to By Layer to inherit the line type specified

for the layer.

Note To load an AutoCAD .lin file, select Other

from the bottom of the Line Type list. For more

information, see Select Line Type (LIN file).

Line Weight Specifies the thickness of the line type. Set to By

Layer to inherit the line weight specified for the

layer.

Scale Available only in a drawing sketch. Changes the

scale of the selected line type. Enter scale size in

the text box.

Color Sets the line color for the line type. Set to By

Layer to inherit the color specified for the layer.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Drawing view alignments

Rotate Drawing Views

Rotates the orientation of an

existing drawing view.

You can rotate a view to make a selected edge vertical or horizontal, or rotate an

edge precisely by specifying an angle. You cannot rotate a view that has a

dependent section or auxiliary view, or an associated sketch.

When you rotate a base view with a dependent detail view, the detail view

maintains its relationship to the base view. Other dependent views do not rotate

with the base view.

Access: Select the view, right-click, and then select Rotate from the

menu.

Note When you rotate views, annotations maintain their associativity to the

views.

Method of Alignment

Direction

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Sketches in drawings

Format Text

Use the Format Text dialog box to set the attributes for a drawing or sketch text.

Access: Ribbon: Sketch tab Draw panel Text

Style

Text attributes

Font attributes

Model, Drawing, and Custom Properties

Parameters

Symbol

Zoom buttons

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Projecting geometry to a drawingsketch

Project geometry in a drawing view to a sketch

You can select geometry in a drawing view and project it to a sketch associated

with the view. You can then use the projected geometry in the sketch.

The following image shows how model geometry can be projected into a sketch.

In this particular example, the projected geometry is used to help define sketched

lines.

Concept Procedure

Projected geometry remains associated to the parent geometry. If you change the

geometry in the model, the projected geometry updates when the drawing is

updated.

1. Create a sketch attached to a drawing view, or open

an existing sketch.

2. On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Draw panel

Project Geometry.

3. Select the geometry to project.

4. Right-click, and then select Done [ESC] to project

the selected geometry to the sketch.

Tip On the Quick Access toolbar, click the arrow next to Select and change the

filter to Select Part to select all geometry in a part in the view.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Section views

Break Out

Removes a defined area of material to

expose obscured parts or features in

an existing drawing view. The parent

view must be associated to a sketch

that contains the profile defining the

breakout boundary

Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Modify panel Break Out, and then

click to select the parent view.

Boundary

Profile

Selects the sketch geometry to define the

breakout boundary. When the Profile command is

selected, click the sketch profile to select it.

Depth Selector Selects the geometry to define the depth of the

breakout area. Click to select the arrow button,

and then click the geometry in the drawing view.

Depth Type Selects the method for defining the depth of the

breakout. Click the arrow next to the box and

select the Depth Type from the list.

From Point sets a numeric value for the depth

of the breakout.

To Sketch uses sketched geometry associated

with another view to define the depth of the

breakout.

To Hole uses the axis of a hole feature in the

view to define the depth of the breakout.

Through Part uses the thickness of a part to

define the depth of the breakout.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

define the depth of the breakout.

Depth Specifies a numeric value for the depth of the

breakout. Available only when the Depth Type is

From Point.

Display Select Show Hidden Edges to display the

hidden edges in the view temporarily. You can

pick a point on the hidden line geometry to

define the depth of the breakout. Clear the check

box to omit hidden lines in the view.

Select Section All Parts to section parts that are

not currently sectioned in the breakout area.

Clear the check box to omit non-sectioned parts

from the view.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Detail Views

Detail View

Creates and places a detailed drawing view of a specified portion of a parent view.

The view is created without an alignment to the parent view. When creating a

detail view of a presentation, trails are visible, but can be turned off if necessary.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Create panel Detail

View/Scale Label

Style

Display

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Overlay Views

Overlay View

Creates an overlay view to show an assembly in multiple positions in a single

view. A base view, projected, or auxiliary view is the parent for an overlay view.

Specifies a positional representation and design view representation for position

and visibility characteristics.

Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Create panel Overlay

And then click the view to use as the parent view.

Positional

Representation

Specifies the positional representation to use for the

overlay view. The Master positional representation can

be used. A positional representation can be used in

multiple overlay views.

View

Representation

Specifies a design view representation to use for an

overlay view. The design view can be different from the

parent view to allow an overlay view that shows only

needed components. Each overlay view can use a

different design view representation.

Select the Associative check box to update the view

when changes are made to the associative design view

representation in the assembly environment.

Label Indicates the label text used for the overlay view.

The Use Positional Rep Name check box sets the

name in the browser and label, if applicable. Clear the

check box to enter a name in the box.

The Toggle Label Visibility controls the visibility of the

overlay view label. Click the command to change the

label visibility.

The Edit View Label edits the view label the Format

Text dialog box.

Display Specifies the appearance of tangent edges and work

features.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

The Tangent Edges sets the visibility of tangent edges

the overlay view. Select the check box to display

tangent edges. Clear the check box to hide them.

Foreshortened sets the display of tangent edges.

Select the check box to shorten the length of tangent

edges to distinguish them from visible edges.

Work Features specifies if work features are visible in

the overlay view. Select the check box to show work

features.

Style Sets the display style for the view. To change the

display style, click a command.

Sets the display to show hidden lines.

Sets the display to remove hidden lines.

Sets the display to a shaded rendering.

Style from Base sets the display style of a

dependent view to be the same as its parent

view. When the check box is selected, the

dependent view uses the same display style as

its parent view. To change the display style, of

a dependent view, clear the check box.

Layer sets the line style for the overlay view.

As Overlay sets all view items to the line type specified

by the Layer style.

As Part sets geometry to standard line styles used in

the part model. All reference models use reference line

styles.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Break Operations

Break

Creates a broken, foreshortened view.

Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Modify panel Break

Style

Orientation

Display

Gap

Symbol

Propagate to parent view

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Crop Operations

Crop Settings

Use to set boundary type and visibility of crop cut lines for crop operations.

Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Modify panel Crop

Default Boundary Type

Display Crop Cut Lines

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Slice Operations

Slice

Creates true zero-depth section views in a drawing.

Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Modify panel Slice

Select Sketch

By default, this command is already activated when the dialog appears. Select an

unconsumed Sketch for defining the Slice sketch geometry. Valid sketches include

the following:

Must contain at least one open profile (only open profiles are used for

the Slice sketch geometry).

Can be located in a Parent, Child, or Sibling View of the Target View.

Cannot be entirely made of reference geometry. Reference geometry

cannot be selected for Slice sketch geometry.

Note An unconsumed Model Sketch (in a part or assembly model) that is

recovered in the Drawing cannot be used for slice sketch geometry. Sketches

which were created in a Draft View cannot be used for slice sketch geometry.

Slice All Parts

Override the browser context menu settings and slice all parts in the view, if they

are crossed by the Slice sketch geometry.

Not checked

The Slice operation obeys the browser context menu settings for each component.

Checked

The browser settings are overridden. All components crossed by the Slice sketch

geometry participate in the Slice. Components that are not crossed by the Slice

sketch geometry do not participate in the Slice operation.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Create drawing views of surfaces

Include or exclude surfaces in a drawing view

The workflow differs according to the combination of bodies and surfaces in a file.

Create views containing both solid bodies and surfaces

Create views containing surfaces but no solid bodies

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings >

Drawing annotations

Topics in this section

Suppressed annotations

Dimensions in drawings

Centerlines and center marks

Symbols and sketched symbols

Tables

Hole notes

Hole tables

Balloons

Parts lists

Text in drawings

Text in drawing sketches

Weld annotations in drawings

Revision tables and revision tags

Sheet metal annotations in drawings

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Suppressed annotations

Annotations in drawings are suppressed when a part feature is suppressed or an

assembly component is made invisible. Components may be made invisible in the

assembly (in a design view) or in the drawing.

Some guidelines to help you understand why an annotation is no longer visible in

a drawing:

If a dimension is attached to multiple features or edges, the dimension

is suppressed if any of its target features or components are suppressed

or made invisible.

If a feature is suppressed or a component is made invisible, the

attached annotation does not appear.

For example, a center mark attached to a hole center becomes

suppressed when the hole feature is suppressed. Any dimension

attached to the center mark is also suppressed.

Some leaders also have secondary leaders that reference other features

or components than the primary leader. If only a primary leader is

present and attached to a suppressed feature or invisible component, it

is suppressed.

If multiple leaders exist, and the primary leader is attached to a

suppressed feature or invisible component, it is not suppressed.

Note If a feature is unsuppressed or an assembly component is made visible,

annotations are also unsuppressed and become visible.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Dimensions in drawings

Copy Dimension Properties

Copies one or more properties from the selected dimension to a target dimension.

Access: Right-click a drawing dimension and select Copy Properties.

Right-click again and select Settings to show the Copy

Dimension Properties dialog box.

You can copy properties for these dimensions:

Linear dimensions (placed and recovered from model)

Angular dimensions (placed and recovered from model)

Radial and Diameter dimensions (placed and recovered from model)

Ordinate dimensions

Ordinate and baseline dimension sets

Note Individual ordinate and baseline dimension set members are valid sources

only, but the entire set is a target.

Style Select the check box to replace the style associated

with the target dimension with the style of the

selected dimension.

Clear the check box to retain the current style of the

target dimension.

Layer Select the check box to replace the layer of the

target dimension with the layer of the selected

dimension.

Clear the check box to retain the current layer of

the target dimension.

Dimension

Overrides

Specifies which of the properties set in the Edit

Dimension dialog box to copy. Those settings

generally override the defaults specified in the

dimension style.

Select the Text check box to copy the text overrides

to the target dimension.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

to the target dimension.

Select the Precision and Tolerance check box to

copy the overrides specified on the Precision and

Tolerance tab of the Edit Dimension dialog box.

Select the Inspection check box to copy the

inspection dimension attributes specified on the

Inspection Dimension tab of the Edit Dimension

dialog box.

Select the Arrowhead Shape check box to copy the

arrowhead shape to the target dimension.

Select the Arrowheads Inside/Outside check box

to copy the arrowhead position from the selected

dimension to the target dimension.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Centerlines and center marks

Automated Centerline Settings

Sets the defaults for adding automated centerlines and center marks to drawing

views or changes the centerline and center mark settings for the selected view.

Defaults are used when a view is created.

Access: When setting up a drawing or template, Click Tools tab

Options panel Document Settings Drawing, click

Automated Centerline Settings.

To add automated centerlines to a view, select the view, right-

click, and then select Automated Centerlines.

Apply to Selects the features to which automated centerlines

are applied. Features can include holes, fillets,

cylindrical features (including the arc of punch

features), revolutions, bends, and sheet metal

punches.

If the features are used in a pattern and a patterned

centerline is used, use the Rectangular Pattern or

Circular Pattern buttons.

To add center marks to a sketch, use the Sketch

Geometry option.

Projection Sets the projection of objects in view for which

automated centerlines or center marks are applied.

Axis Normal creates center marks when the circular

edge is normal to the view plane.

Axis Parallel creates centerlines when the circular

edge is parallel to the view plane.

Work

features

button

Only visible user-defined work features in the top-

level model are recovered. To recover additional

work features, use Include Work Features to recover

work features in the view, or Include to recover a

specific work feature.

Threshold Sets the limits for automated centerlines on fillet,

arc, and circular features. Centerlines are not added

to features that fall outside the specified threshold.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

to features that fall outside the specified threshold.

Fillet sets threshold for applying automated

centerlines to fillet features. Enter the minimum and

maximum radii.

Circular Edges sets the threshold for applying

automated centerlines to arcs and circular features.

Enter the minimum and maximum radii.

Precision sets the rounding precision for comparing

the size of fillets, arcs, and circular features to the

threshold. Click the arrow, and then select the

precision.

Arc Angle

Threshold

Angle Minimum sets the minimum angle for

creating a center mark or centerline on circles, arcs,

or ellipses.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Symbols and sketched symbols

Surface Texture Symbol

Specifies the content of a surface texture symbol.

The options in the dialog box are determined by the

surface texture style.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate tab Symbols panel Surface

Symbols can be created as stand-alone objects, be placed directly on the

geometry in a drawing view, or reside on top of a leader line which points to

the geometry. Surface Texture Symbols can also be used in notes and in the

tolerance block.

Surface Type Click a button to select the desired surface type.

Basic

Material removal required

Material removal prohibited

Miscellaneous Specifies the general attributes of the symbol. Click the

button to add or remove each attribute.

Force tail adds a tail to the symbol.

Majority indicates that this symbol specifies the

standard surface characteristics for the drawing.

All-round adds the all-round indicator to the symbol.

The diameter is specified in the Leader style.

Surface

characteristics

Defines the values for the surface characteristics. Enter

the appropriate values in the boxes.

A specifies the roughness value, roughness value Ra

minimum, minimum roughness value, or grade number.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

minimum, minimum roughness value, or grade number.

Available only when A' has an entered value.

A' specifies the roughness value, roughness value Ra

maximum, maximum roughness value, or grade number.

B specifies the production method, treatment, or coating.

If the active drafting standard is based on ANSI, this

box can be used to enter a note callout.

B' specifies an additional tail for the production method

if the drafting standard is based on ISO or DIN. This

option is available only when B has an entered value.

C for ANSI, specifies the roughness cutoff or sampling

length for roughness average; for ISO or DIN, specifies

the waviness height or sampling length. For JIS, specifies

the cutoff value and evaluation length.

C' for ANSI, specifies the roughness cutoff or sampling

length for additional roughness value. For ISO or DIN,

specifies the sampling length for additional roughness

value; for JIS, specifies the reference length and

evaluation length.

D specifies the direction of lay. Click the arrow and

choose the symbol from the list. This option is not

available when the removal prohibited option is selected.

E Not available when the Machining Removal Prohibited

is selected. Specifies the machining allowance.

F specifies the roughness value other than Ra or the

parameter value other than Ra. For ANSI, can also

specify the waviness height.

F' specifies the surface waviness for JIS. This option is

not used for ANSI, ISO, or DIN standards.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Tables

Table Layout

For tables formatted by a Table style, changes the title, the location of the

heading, row spacing, table wrap preference, and sort order.

Access: Right-click the table, and select Edit. In the Edit Table dialog

box, right-click a column heading, and then select Table Layout

or click the Table Layout command.

Heading and

Table

Settings

Sets the options for naming and formatting tables.

Title specifies the title to display on the table and in

the browser. Enter the title in the box or leave it

blank if you want to use the name of the .xls or .csv

file as the title . Select the Title check box if you

want the title to display.

Text Styles shows the styles associated with the

title, column header, and cell data.

Direction specifies the direction of the item

numbers in the table. Set to ascending or

descending order.

Heading specifies the placement of the heading in

the table. Set top, bottom, or no heading.

Line Spacing sets single, double, or triple spacing

between lines of text.

Heading Gap shows the preset value.

Row Gap shows the preset value.

Table

Wrapping

Direction to Wrap Table sets the wrap to Left or

right,

Select the Enable Automatic Wrap check box and

then specify the maximum rows and number of

sections. Not available if the check box is not

selected.

Note To change the default settings, click Manage tab Styles and Standards

panel Styles Editor. In the Style and Standard Editor dialog box, click Table

and edit values. The changed values are valid for the current document only,

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

unless you select click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Save to

replace the library style. Use caution because the changed setting could affect all

other documents that use the style.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Hole notes

Edit Hole Note

Modifies formatting and note text for a hole note. Overrides settings specified by

the hole note style for the current document.

Access: Right-click a hole note and select Edit Hole Note.

Hole type Displays the hole type.

Edit Field Edits the content of the note. Click a button in the

Values and Symbols section to add the

corresponding property to the note text. Click the

arrow next to the Insert Symbol button to select and

insert a symbol.

You can use a combination of text, inserted symbols,

and variables to configure the annotation text of the

note. For example:

C <DIST1> X <DIST2> would result in C 10 X 10

Note To stack text, type a correct stacking

sequence, select it, right-click and choose Stack.

Options Use Default sets hole note to the default format.

Tap Drill selects the Tap Drill hole note type.

Part Units sets the note to use the measurement

units of the model. Check the box to use model

units. Remove the check mark to use the

measurement units specified by the dimension style.

Precision/Tolerance Settings opens the Precision

and Tolerance dialog box so you can add tolerance

information to values included in the note, or

override the default precision settings.

Edit Quantity Note opens the Quantity Note dialog

box. Allows custom configuration of the quantity note

display in the context of a hole note (represented by

the Quantity Note symbol).

Values

and

Adds values and symbols to the Edit Field. Click a value or

symbol to add it to the hole note. To remove, place the cursor

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

and

Symbols

symbol to add it to the hole note. To remove, place the cursor

after the value or symbol in the Edit Window and backspace.

Hole diameter

Hole depth

Counterbore/Spotface diameter

Counterbore/Spotface depth

Countersink hole diameter

Countersink hole angle

Countersink depth is calculated from model hole

parameters. It is not a part modeling parameter.

Quantity note adds text to indicate quantity. Not displayed

if the hole note is used inside a hole table or if the quantity is

less than two.

Selects a symbol from the list to add to hole note.

Thread designation does not display if the thread has no

thread information in part modeling.

Custom thread designation

Thread pitch

Thread class

Thread depth

Tap drill diameter

Fastener type indicates the fastener type used to define

hole parameters in part modeling. Does not display if the

feature has no fastener information.

Fastener size indicates the fastener size used to define hole

parameters in part modeling. Does not display if the feature

has no fastener information.

Fastener fit represents the fastener fit class used to define

hole parameters in part modeling. Does not display if the

feature has no fastener information.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Hole tables

Format Column - Hole Table

Sets the column format for properties in the hole table.

Note To change the default column format for properties in hole tables, click

Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor, and edit the Hole

Table style.

Access: Right-click a hole table and select Edit Hole Table. On the

Formatting tab of the Edit Hole Table dialog box, right-click a

Property in the Column Settings area, and then select Format

Column.

Select a hole table or punch table style in Style and Standard

Editor. On the Formatting tab of the style panel, right-click a

Property in the Column Settings area, and select Format

Column.

Property Displays the name of the selected column.

Heading Sets the name of the selected column. To change,

enter a different name.

Type Displays the type of data in the column.

Leading/Trailing

Zeros

Controls the display of leading and trailing zeros.

Justification Sets the alignment for the column heading and

respective cells.

Heading sets the alignment for the column heading.

Click a button to select left, center, or right

alignment.

Value sets the alignment for the data in the column.

Click a button to select left, center, or right

alignment.

Units Formatting Available only for numeric columns of the hole table.

Unit Type selects the type of measurement units.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Format selects a fractional or decimal format.

Fractional formats are available only if Length is

selected as Unit Type and inches or feet are selected

as Units.

Precision selects the precision of values displayed in

the selected column.

Fractional Text Scale sets the text scale for

numbers in stacked fractions. Available only if a

fractional format is selected.

Units selects the measurement units. If inches or

feet are selected, fractional format is available in the

Format option.

Decimal Marker selects the marker for the decimal

format. Click the arrow to specify either a period or

comma as the decimal character.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Balloons

Attach Balloon, Custom/Virtual Parts

Use the Attach Balloon dialog box to select parts to be ballooned and the balloons

attached to an existing balloon.

Use the Custom/Virtual Parts dialog box to select custom/virtual parts to be

ballooned.

Access: Right-click a balloon in the drawing and select Attach Balloon

From List to open the Attach Balloon dialog box.

Click Annotate tab Table panel Balloon. Right-click and

select Custom/Virtual. Specify points for the balloon leader line

in the graphic window. Right-click and select Continue. The

Custom/Virtual Part dialog box is displayed.

Filter Filters parts displayed in the table. Click the arrow to

select a filter from the list.

Table Lists parts according to the active selection filter.

Right-click

menu

Select All selects all parts in the list to be

ballooned.

Clear All clears the selection for all parts in the list.

Invert Selection inverts the current selection.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Parts lists

Export Parts List or Table

Saves the parts list or table to an external database, spreadsheet, or text file.

Access: Click Export in the Edit Parts List or Edit Table dialog box .

Save in Browse to select the location for the external file.

File Name Specifies the name of the external file. Enter the file

name or click the File button to select an existing

file.

Note The name for a DBF file cannot be longer than

eight characters.

Save As

Type

Specifies the type of external file to use. Click the

arrow, and then select from the list.

Table Name If the file type is Microsoft Access, specifies the

name of the table.

If the file type is Microsoft Excel, specifies the name

of the worksheet. Not used for other file types.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Text in drawings

Align text

Access: Within a drawing with at least two text boxes selected: right-

mouse click and select Align from the context menu.

Alignment

Vertical

Click to align multiple selections to the left edge of the first

selected text box.

Click to align multiple selections to the right edge of the

first selected text box.

Horizontal

Click to align multiple selections to the top edge of the first

selected text box.

Click tto align multiple selections to the bottom edge of the

first selected text box.

Offset Data entry field. Used to input the offset distance from the

selected edge of the first text box.

Help Click to display this help page.

Apply Click to apply the selected alignment to the selected text

boxes.

Close Click to ignore any input and dismiss the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Text in drawing sketches

Geometry-Text

Use Geometry-Text to create and align text to sketch geometry.

Access: Ribbon: Sketch tab Draw panel Geometry Text

Geometry

Text Orientation and Format

Font attributes

Zoom buttons

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Weld annotations in drawings

Drawing Welding Symbol

In a drawing view, specifies the content of a welding

symbol placed on a selected weld edge.

The dialog box opens when you place a welding

symbol. Available options are determined by the weld

symbol style and the associated drafting standard.

If the model in the drawing view is a weldment that contains fillet welds, the

dialog box displays the available data from the model.

Note Once placed, a welding symbol does not update if the model changes. To

add welding symbols that maintain association to the model, set the weldment

options on the Options tab of the Create View dialog box when you place a view,

or right-click the view, and select Get Model Annotations Get Welding Symbol.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate tab Symbols panel Welding

Sets the layout and content of the welding symbol. Symbols and values change,

depending on the specified weld type and the active drafting standard. Choose

the weld type and secondary fillet type, if applicable, and then specify the

corresponding attributes.

Identification

Line

Click the arrow to select no identification line,

identification line above, or identification line below

the reference line. Available for ISO and DIN only.

Swap Arrow/

Other

Symbols

Click to switch the arrow and symbols above or

below the reference line.

Stagger Staggers the welding symbols for fillets. Available

only if fillet welding symbols are set on both sides of

the reference line.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

the reference line.

Tail note box Adds description to the selected reference line.

ABC Select check box to enclose note text in a box.

Prefix Specifies a prefix to precede the symbol.

Leg Specifies text for the leg.

Depth Sets the weld depth.

Pitch Specifies the distance between welds.

Contour Specifies the contour finish for the weld. Click the

arrow and choose Flush or flat finish, Convex finish,

Concave finish, or Toes blended smooth (DIN only).

Secondary

fillet type

Specifies the type of weld for secondary fillets. Click

the button to display and choose from the palette of

available weld types. This button is available only

when the active drafting standard is based on ANSI.

Angle Specifies the angle between weldments.

Brazing Specifies whether the weld is brazed. Select or clear

the check box to add or remove the brazing symbol.

Clearance Specifies the clearance for the braze.

Depth Specifies the depth of the weld.

Diameter Specifies the diameter of the weld.

Gap Specifies the space between weldments.

Height Specifies the height of the weld.

Length Specifies the length of the weld.

Method Specifies the finish method for the weld. Click the

arrow and choose the method from the list.

Middle Specifies the type of inspection to perform on the

weld.

Number Specifies the number of welds.

Root Specifies the root thickness of the weld.

Root gap Specifies the gap for the weld.

Size Specifies the size of the weld.

Small leg Specifies the thickness of the weld.

Spacing Specifies the space between welds.

Thickness Specifies the thickness of the weld.

Flag Specifies whether to add a flag indicating a field or

site weld to the selected reference line. Click the

button to turn the flag off or on.

All-around

symbol

Specifies whether to use an all-around symbol on

the selected reference line. Click the button to turn

the symbol off or on.

The diameter of the all-round character is specified

in the leader style.

Symbol box Click buttons to add a welding symbol to the current

symbol, delete the current symbol, or activate the

Previous or Next symbol. All edits affect the current

symbol only.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Revision tables and revision tags

Format Column - Tables

Sets the formatting and alignment properties for a column in the table.

Access: To define columns in a Table style: Click Manage tab

Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor. In the Style and

Standard Editor dialog box, click Table. On the Default Column

Settings tab, right-click a column name cell to open the Format

Column dialog box.

To edit a table column: Right-click a table and select Edit. In

the Edit Table dialog box, click the Format Column button.

Property Displays the name of the property displayed in

the selected column.

Heading Sets the name of the selected column. To

change, enter a different name.

Column Width Specifies the width of the column.

Leading/Trailing

Zeros

Controls the display of leading and trailing zeros.

Justification Sets the alignment for the column heading and

respective cells.

Heading Sets the alignment for the column

heading. Click a button to select left, center, or

right alignment.

Value Sets the alignment for the data in the

column. Click a button to select left, center, or

right alignment.

Stacked

Fractional Text

Enables stacking of numeric fractions. All

fractional numerical strings (in 1/2 format) in the

selected column are replaced with a stacked

numeric fraction in the drawing. Available only

when editing a parts list in the drawing and Use

Default Formatting is selected.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Stack Properties

button

Opens the Stack Properties dialog box and sets

the format and text scale for stacked fractions.

Available only when editing a parts list in the

drawing and Use Default Formatting is selected.

Use Default

Formatting

Uses the default settings specified in the

standard.

Apply Units

Formatting

Enables the formatting and units settings for the

selected column. Changes made to these settings

only apply to the selected column.

Unit Type selects the type of measurement units.

Format selects a fractional or decimal format.

Fractional formats are available only if Length is

selected as Unit Type and inches or feet are

selected as Units.

Precision selects the precision of values

displayed in the selected column.

Fractional Text Scale selects the text scale of

numbers in stacked fractions. Available only if a

fractional format is selected.

Units selects the measurement units. If inches

or feet are selected, fractional format is available

in the Format option.

Decimal Marker selects the marker for the

decimal format. Click the arrow to specify either

a period or comma as the decimal character.

Unit String displays the name of the units next

to the value.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Sheet metal annotations in drawings

Edit Hole Table

Modifies formatting and options of a hole table. Overrides settings specified by the

hole table style for the current document.

Access: Right-click a hole table and select Edit Hole Table.

Formatting

Options

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings >

Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD

Topics in this section

Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD Standard

Annotate (ESKD) tab

Sheet Format

Title Block

Drawing Annotations

Parts List

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD >

Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKDStandard

GOST is a set of technical standards published by the Federal Agency on Technical

Regulating and Metrology of the Russian Federation. Inventor 2010 now supports

GOST standards and the ESKD standards subset. ESKD is the Unified System of

Design Documentation, a subset of the GOST standard. This system governs

everything from font type and size to text placement on a page.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD >

Annotate (ESKD) tab

Annotate (ESKD) tab

Used to add GOST compliant annotations, symbols, and more. Gain access to

some options from drop-down in panel bar.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab

Icon Name Definition

Unidentified

Surface Texture

Displays the Unidentified Surface Texture

dialog box. Add surface texture symbol

that applies to all elements.

Surface Texture

Symbol

Displays Surface Texture symbol. Add one

or more surface texture symbols for

certain elements and for all elements that

do not have a surface texture defined.

Welding Symbol Displays the Welding Symbol dialog box.

Add welding symbols to the drawing.

Soldering

Symbol

Displays the Soldering Symbol dialog box.

Add soldering symbols to the drawing.

Gluing Symbol Displays the Gluing Symbol dialog box.

Add gluing symbols to the drawing.

Stitching

Symbol

Displays the Stitching Symbol dialog box.

Add stitching symbols to drawing.

Stitching by

Staples

Displays the Stitching by Staples dialog

box. Add stitching by staples symbols to

drawing.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Feature Control

Frame

Display the Feature Control Frame dialog

box. Add feature control symbols to the

drawing.

Datum

Identifier

Symbol

Displays the Datum Identifier dialog box.

Add datum identifier to the drawing or to

another symbol.

Marking Symbol Displays the Marking Symbol dialog box.

Add a marking symbol to the drawing or

to another symbol.

Stamping

Symbol

Displays the Stamping Symbol dialog box.

Add a stamping symbol to the drawing or

to another symbol.

Surface

Covering

Symbol

Places a surface covering indicator at a

specific place on the drawing. Use with

the Leader Text symbol to add details for

the surface covering symbol.

Leader Text Displays the Leader Text dialog box. Add

text to a leader line.

Technical

Requirements

Displays the Technical Requirements

dialog box. Add new technical

requirements to the drawing sheet or edit

existing technical requirements.

Table Displays the Table dialog box. Select the

number of columns and rows then add a

table to the drawing sheet.

Balloon Displays the Balloon dialog box. Add a

balloon to the drawing or to a symbol.

The balloon can appear in the parts list

when associated with a part.

Auto Balloon Displays the Auto Balloon dialog box. Use

Auto Balloon to create multiple item

balloons for selected components. Select

balloon characteristics.

balloon characteristics.

Parts List Displays the Parts List dialog box with an

automatically generated parts list that you

can edit.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD >

Sheet Format

Sheet Format

Accept default format or change default sheet format. Add custom size, custom

format. Some change options are available from the browser context menus.

Access:

Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Drawing Sheets panel

Sheet Format

Right-click the Sheet, and select Sheet Format from

the context menu.

Name Drawing sheet name.

Size Drawing sheet size. You can select

predefined sizes or create a custom size.

Multiplier Sheet width is multiplied by the selected

number.

Height Drawing sheet height.

Width Drawing sheet width.

Portrait Long side of sheet is vertical.

Landscape Long side of sheet is horizontal.

Show Zones Identify zones on drawing sheet.

Start zone

enumeration from

Type the vertical and horizontal zone

enumeration. Vertical is the first field and

horizontal is the second field.

Form 1 One of three GOST compliant title boxes.

Form 2 One of three GOST compliant title boxes.

Form 2a One of three GOST compliant title boxes.

Extension 1 An additional title box that appears on the

drawing border.

Extension 2 An additional title box that appears on the

drawing border.

Extension 3 An additional title box that appears on the

drawing border.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD >

Title Block

Materials

Select and manage materials. Some default materials are covered in the dialog

box. New materials can be added to the list. Changes to a material display in the

drawing title block while the material is selected.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Drawing Sheets panel Title

Block Favorites

Material column Material name

Shape column Material shape

Assortments

column

Material assortment

New Creates new material row at the end of the table.

Select Closes the dialog box and use specified material

in the dialog.

Close Closes the dialog.

Note Click the column title once to sort, click a second time to reverse the sort

order.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Leader Text

Leader Text

Add one or more lines of leader text to the drawing

with limited text formatting. Attach technical

requirements.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Text panel Leader Text

Align Left Align all text on the left margin.

Center Align all text in the center.

Align Right Align all text on the right margin.

Technical

Requirements

Display the Technical Requirements dialog

box to associate technical notes to the leader

text. A reference to the selected item in

technical requirements is inserted into the

first line.

Insert Symbol Inserts a symbol in the active text field.

Type The Associative Text property type.

Property Property associated with the property type.

Precision Specifies the precision for numerical

properties displayed in the text.

Add Text

Parameter

This field is active when you select the

Associative Text Type property, Physical

Properties - Model. Inserts content from the

Associative Text Property field in the text

fields.

Undo Reverses the most recent action.

Redo Reverses the effects of the previous Undo

command.

Style Sets the style. Click the Bold, Italic, or

Underline buttons to apply the style to the

Procedure Quick Reference

Underline buttons to apply the style to the

text.

Insert Landing

Line below

Inserts landing line under the leader text.

Insert Landing

Line above

Inserts landing line above the leader text.

Text Height Sets the height of the text in sheet units

(inches or millimeters). Enter the size or click

the arrow and select a size from the list.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Unidentified Surface Texture

Unidentified Surface Texture

Add global surface texture information to drawing.

Global surface texture defines the surface texture for

all part surfaces without a specific surface texture

definition. Fields change depending on the GOST

standard you select.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Unidentified

Surface Texture

GOST 2.309-73(chg3) GOST standards updated in 1973.

GOST 2.309-73 GOST standards updated in 1973.

Treatment

Unspecified

Basic surface texture symbol. Type of

surface texture is not specifically

identified.

Removal of Material

Required

Material must be removed from the part

to meet the requirements.

Removal of Material

Prohibited

Material cannot be removed from the

part.

Force Tail Adds a tail to the symbol.

Majority This button is specific to Global Surface

Texture.

All-around Adds the all-around indicator to the

symbol with the diameter specified on the

leader.

Production Method Identifies the appropriate production

method for the texture. You can use a

combination of typing text and selections

from the context menu. This field is

enabled only when you click the Removal

of Material Required button.

Procedure Quick Reference

Surface Texture Value Identifies the surface roughness. You can

use a combination of typing text and

selections from the context menu.

Texture Direction Identifies the surface texture type left by

the cutting instrument.

Add Row Insert a new Surface Texture Value line.

Remove Row Remove a Surface Texture Value line.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Surface Texture Symbol

Surface Texture

Add surface texture information to a drawing.

Surface texture applies to a specific place on a part

and not the entire part. Fields change depending on

the GOST standard you select.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Surface

Surface Texture Value Identifies the type of texture you add to a

specific location. You can use a

combination of typing text and selections

from the context menu.

Full dialog

Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Welding Symbol

Select Standard

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Welding

Symbol. In the Weld Annotation context menu, click Select

Standard.

Click to select the preferred standard used for drawing annotations.

Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Soldering Symbol

Soldering Symbol

Add soldering information to drawing. Add as much

or as little information as required. Expand the

dialog box to add more information. Leader lines

identify the solder location.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Soldering

Symbol

Weld

Index

Specifies the weld index that refers to the full welding

annotation. You can use a combination of typing text

and selections from the context menu.

Full dialog

Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Gluing Symbol

Gluing Symbol

Add gluing information to drawing. Add as much or

as little information as required. Expand the dialog

box to add more information. Leader lines identify

the glued location.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Gluing

Symbol

Weld

Index

Specifies the weld index that refers to the full welding

annotation. You can use a combination of typing text

and selections from the context menu.

Full dialog

Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Stitching Symbol

Stitching Symbol

Add stitching information to drawing. Add as much or as

little information as required. Expand the dialog box to

add more information. Leader lines identify the stitched

location.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Stitching

Symbol

Weld

Index

Specifies the weld index that refers to the full welding

annotation. You can use a combination of typing text

and selections from the context menu.

Full dialog

Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Stitching by Staples

Stitching by Staples

Add stitching by staples information to drawing. Add as

much or as little information as required. Expand the

dialog box to add more information. Leader lines identify

the staple stitched location.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Stitching by

Staples Symbol

Weld

Index

Specifies the weld index that refers to the full welding

annotation. You can use a combination of typing text

and selections from the context menu.

Full dialog

Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Datum Identifier

Datum Identifier

Add datum identifier to drawing.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Datum

Identifier

Datum

Identifier

Type one or more datum identifier symbols in the field.

Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Marking Symbol

Marking Symbol

Add marking symbol annotations to the drawing. The

marking symbol is represented by a reference to

technical requirements. The reference appears in a

circle accompanied by marking content and method

annotation.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Marking

Symbol

Contents and

Technique

Select contents and marking method.

Leader-based Text Edit text that appears on the leader line

summarizing Contents and Methods.

Tech Requirements Add reference to technical requirements.

Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Stamping Symbol

Stamping Symbol

Add stamping symbol annotations to the drawing.

The marking symbol is represented by a reference to

technical requirements. The reference appears in a

triangle accompanied by marking content and

method annotation.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Stamping

Symbol

Content and

Technique

Select contents and marking method.

Leader-based Text Edit text that appears on the leader line

summarizing Contents and Methods.

Tech Requirements Add reference to technical requirements.

Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Surface Covering

The surface covering symbol draws a dashed-dotted offset curve for surfaces that

require a covering. This command is used with the ESKD Leader Text command

to provide detailed information for the surface covering.

To add one or more surface covering symbols, complete the following steps:

1. On the ribbon, click Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols

panel Surface Covering. A plus (+) sign and a box

appear beside the cursor.

2. Place the cursor on the surface where you want to

add the surface covering. The surface color changes

when you hover over the surface.

3. Click the appropriate surface or surfaces.

4. Right-click after making your selections. A context

menu appears.

5. From the context menu, click Continue. A dotted line

appears beside the selected surface and a line is

added under the Sketched Symbols node in the

browser.

6. To complete the action, right-click to display a

context menu.

7. From the context menu, click Done (Esc). The plus

sign is removed from the cursor.

Add Leader Text

Edit Surface Covering Symbol

Delete Surface Covering Symbol

Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Technical Requirements

Technical Requirements Settings

Change text settings in the Technical Requirements dialog box.

Access:

Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Format panel Technical

Requirements Settings

Text Settings

Text Height: H Text height of a requirement line.

Line Spacing Distance between lines in the Technical

Requirements, in terms of H.

Item Spacing Distance between items.

Left Indent Indent distance for first line in item.

Column Width Width of column containing the requirements.

Use period after

numbers

Check to add a period after the item number.

Text Location

Horizontal Offset Horizontal offset from top left corner of the

title block.

Vertical Offset Vertical offset from top left corner of the title

block.

Line Limit Set the number of lines that appear in the

requirement.

Alternate Text

Location

Horizontal Offset Horizontal offset from top left corner of the

title block.

Vertical Offset Vertical offset from drawing sheet bottom

border.

Line Limit (2nd

column)

Defines the number of lines for second

column. If technical requirements contain too

many items, which fill completely the first

and second columns, the remaining items are

allocated in the third column.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

allocated in the third column.

Limit for

Widow/Orphan

lines

Sets the limit for widow/orphan lines. If this

parameter is set to 0, there is no elimination

of widow/orphan lines.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD >

Parts List

Parts List: Print

Identify the printer and printer setting, number of copies to print, and pages to

print.

Access:

Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Table panel Parts List Print

Name Select the printer to use to print the parts

list.

Status Indicates the printer status.

Type Printer name and type.

Where Printer location.

Comment Information about the printer.

Current Page Click to print the currently displayed page

only.

All Click to print all pages.

Pages in Range Click to print the range of pages identified in

the From and To fields.

From Beginning page number in a range of pages

to print.

To Ending page number in a range of pages to

print.

Number of Copies Specify the number of copies you want to

print.

Collate Place the parts list pages in numerical order.

This option is enabled if you elect to print two

or more copies.

Best Fit Place the parts list on the drawing so that it

fits on one page.

Custom Click to identify the number of columns to

place on a page.

Custom field Specify the number of columns to place on

the page.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Preview button View how the parts list looks on a printed

page.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Parts List >

Edit Parts List

Editing the parts list includes changing the content by adding or removing

information, formatting the parts list, and changing the update behavior.

To edit the cell content, complete the following steps:

From the parts list, click twice in the cell you want to change or click

the text in the cell. A cursor appears in the cell.

Type your changes in the cell.

Press enter to accept the change in the cell.

Note Your changes are not permanent until you click OK and close the dialog box

or until you place the parts list on the drawing.

Undo Action

Redo Action

Delete Entry

Add Static Value

Move item to new category

Save item overrides to BOM

Add category

Add custom category

Remove category

Renumber category

Sort category

Sort parts list

Renumber all items

Renumber contiguous rows

Concept Procedure

Insert empty row

Change parts list table settings

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Parts List >

Edit Parts List on Drawing

Before making the changes described, be sure to place the parts list on the

drawing. All of the following procedures are accessed from a context menu.

Procedures for all items on the context menu are not covered in this topic. The

procedures covered include editing the parts list from the drawing, editing the

table style, rotate the parts list, view the bill of materials, and delete the parts

list.

To edit the parts list from the drawing, complete the following steps:

1. From the drawing, right-click the parts list. A context menu appears.

2. From the context menu, click Edit Parts List.... The Parts List dialog

box appears.

3. Make changes in the parts list dialog box.

4. Click OK to save the changes. The Parts List dialog box closes and the

parts list on the drawing is updated.

Edit Table Style

View the BOM

Delete the parts list from the drawing

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Parts List >

Export Parts List

Export information from the parts list to an Excel spreadsheet. You can use the

default spreadsheet, choose another spreadsheet provided with the application, or

add your own spreadsheet.

To export a spreadsheet, complete the following steps:

1. From the Parts List dialog box toolbar, click the Export button. The

Save As dialog box appears.

2. In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to

save the file.

3. In the File name field, type a file name.

4. Click OK to begin the export and save the file. When the export is

complete, the Save As dialog box closes.

Note To view the exported file, either open the file from Excel or from Windows

Explorer.

Preview parts list in excel

Select Excel template

Add custom template

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings >

Exploded views and presentations

Topics in this section

Exploded views and presentations

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Exploded views and presentations >

Exploded views and presentations

Tweak Component

Specifies distance, direction, and other settings for a

selected component or group of components when

adding tweaks to an exploded presentation view.

Access: Ribbon: Presentation tab Create panel Tweak Components

Create Tweak

Transformations

Clear

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor >

Collaboration and Visualization

Topics in this section

Render and animate with Inventor Studio

Translate data

Share data

Design Assistant

Autodesk Inventor Tools

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization >

Render and animate with InventorStudio

Topics in this section

Render and animate overview

Styles for rendering

Rendering Images

Animating in Studio

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio >

Render and animate overview

Studio scene browser

Graphically illustrates assembly hierarchy, without parameters. Provides a set of

folders unique to Studio. Shows and hides selected components, and provides

alternate access to functions from the context menu.

The context menus for browser content in the studio environment is different

from the menus in the assembly environment.

Whenever animation objects are added to lists, browser, and so on, they are

followed by a number in sequence. This is to allow multiple object creation

without name duplication. You can easily change names by slow double-clicking

the name in the browser and then entering the name you want to use.

Access: Enter the Studio environment.

Productions

Animations

Lighting (style)

Cameras

Animation Favorites

Local Lights

Representations

Origin

Model Nodes

Context menu commands

Concept Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio >

Styles for rendering

Lights in Lighting Styles

Create and edit lights in lighting styles.

Access: On the ribbon, click Render tab Scene panel Lighting

Styles . In the Studio browser, double-click the icon in front of

a light style.

or

In the Lighting Styles dialog box, styles list, click a light.

General tab

Illumination tab

Shadows tab

Directional tab

Point tab

Spot tab

Lighting Styles dialog box, Light context menu commands

Lighting Styles, Light browser node context menu commands

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio >

Rendering Images

Render Image

Specifies general settings for rendering images.

Access: Ribbon: Render tab Render panel Render Image

When you select the Realistic or Illustration style, it is applied to the entire image.

Only one style can be applied at one time. Changes to the applied style must be

done as a post process in an image editor.

General tab

Output tab (Render Image only)

Style tab - Realistic

Style tab - Illustration

Rendering Tutorial

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio >

Animating in Studio

Render Animation

Specifies general settings for rendering animations.

Access: Ribbon: Render tab Render panel Render Animation

When you select the Realistic or Illustration style, it is applied to the entire image

or animation. Only one style can be applied at one time. Changes to the applied

style must be done as a post process in an image editor.

General tab

Output tab

Style tab - Realistic

Style tab - Illustration

Rendering Tutorial

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization >

Translate data

Topics in this section

Parts and assemblies from other CAD systems

DWG Translation

Create a template to import DWG data

Export drawing data to AutoCAD

Export parts, assemblies, and more

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data >

Parts and assemblies from other CADsystems

Choose a translator

Choose from the list of potential translators to import the selected file. The

translators listed depend on the type of file selected.

Access: Do one of the following:

Translate to a new Autodesk Inventor file:

Click Open, set Files of type to All Files

(*.*), and click a part (*.prt, *.prt.1) or assembly

(*.asm, *.asm.1) file.

Drag a part (*.prt, *.prt.1) or assembly (*.asm,

*.asm.1) file from Windows Explorer and drop onto

the Autodesk Inventor title bar.

Place into an open Autodesk Inventor assembly:

In an assembly file, click Place, set Files of type to All

Files (*.*), and click a part (*.prt, *.prt.1) or

assembly (*.asm, *.asm.1) file.

Drag a part (*.prt, *.prt.1) or assembly (*.asm,

*.asm.1) file from Windows Explorer and drop into

the graphics window.

Available Translators for (file type). Lists the translators that can be chosen to

import the selected file.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data >

DWG Translation

DWG/DXF File Import Wizard

The DWG/DXF File Wizard imports parts, assemblies, and drawings with

associative relationships with Autodesk Inventor drawing views and annotations.

Note on opening DWG files

Access: Click Open and select the appropriate file. If you are

importing a DWG file, click Options, select Import options, and

then click OK. Click Open to start the DWG File wizard.

DWG File Import Options

Model/Layout Options

Import Destination Options

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data >

Create a template to import DWG data

When you create a Autodesk Inventor file, you use a template to set the

measurement units of the file, specify common file properties, and include

elements or even content that is common between files.

You can develop as many templates as you need and make them available for

creating new files.

When you import AutoCAD or Mechanical Desktop files in Autodesk Inventor, you

can choose templates to use in the Import Destination Options dialog box for

creating the part, assembly, and drawing files that result.

A drawing becomes a template when you save it in the Templates folder. For

example, if you have a drawing file that contains the setup you want to use for

other drawings, save a copy of it in the Autodesk\Inventor [revision]\Templates

folder. The next time you create a drawing file, the new template is available.

Tips for creating templates for imported DWG files

Remove any unwanted content from the templates. It can include sketch

geometry, features, or standard drawing views.

Set the measurement units and other document settings.

Set file properties that are common to the files you import.

In part and assembly templates, set up color, texture, lighting, and

material styles.

In drawing templates, set up drawing resources, dimension styles, text

styles, and drafting standards.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data >

Export drawing data to AutoCAD

Export DWG File Options

Specifies options for exporting Autodesk Inventor drawings or sheet metal flat

patterns to AutoCAD DWG (.dwg) files. You can save the settings as a

configuration for saving other .dwg or .dxf files.

You can export an Autodesk Inventor drawing file in AutoCAD format to translate

the content into AutoCAD objects and to access to the AutoCAD geometric

entities in the view blocks (for example, lines, arcs circles, and so on).

Note on saving drawing files as Autodesk Inventor Drawings (.dwg)

Access: In the Save Copy As dialog box, change the file type to

AutoCAD Drawings (.dwg), and then click Options. When you

finish the settings in each dialog box, click Next to open the

subsequent dialog box.

Click the following choices to display information about the settings in each dialog

box.

DWG File Export Options

AutoCAD Mechanical Export Options

Export Destination

Mapping Options

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data >

Export parts, assemblies, and more

Bitmap Export Options

You can save a snapshot of the graphics window as a bitmap file. The default

creates a bitmap the size of the active graphics view, but you can change X and Y

values.

Access: In the File Save As dialog box, set the file type to BMP, and

then click Options.

Enter an integer.

Resolution

Set X and Y both to 0 to generate an image the same size as the on-

screen image in the current active view.

Set either X or Y to 0 (not both) to have the non-zero dimension value

used as given and the zero dimension set to whatever value preserves

the shape of the on-screen image

Set both X and Y to non-zero values to center the field of view the

same as the on-screen image, but the portion of the scene included in

the view may be different. .

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization >

Share data

Topics in this section

Publish to DWF

DWF markup

Insert objects

AEC exchange

Engineers Notebook

Task Scheduler application

Use i-drop to access parts within Web pages

Communication Center

CAD Manager Control Utility

Subscription Center

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Publish to DWF

DWF Output - Complete

When you Publish a file using the Complete option, the published content varies

based on the file type as described in the following table.

Document

type

Condition DWF output - complete

Part (IPT) General The DWF file represents

the current state of the

model

Sheet Metal If a folded model and flat

pattern exists, the DWF file

includes it

iPart factory The DWF file includes all

members and member

table

iPart member The DWF file represents

the current state of the

model

Stress Analysis The DWF file includes the

current state of the model

with stress\constraint

indicators and stress scale.

Document

type

Condition DWF output - complete

Assembly

(IAM)

General The DWF file includes the

assembly with design

views, positional

representations, and

enabled BOM views.

iAssembly factory The DWF file includes all

members and member

table with design views,

positional representations,

and enabled BOM views..

iAssembly

member

The DWF file includes the

assembly with design

views, positional

representations, and

enabled BOM views.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

enabled BOM views.

Weldment The DWF file includes the

assembly with design

views, positional

representations, enabled

BOM views, weld beads,

and weld symbols.

LOD Master The DWF file includes the

assembly with design

views, positional

representations, and

enabled BOM views.

LOD Non-Master Only the active LOD only

publishes to DWF.

However, all design views,

positional representations,

and enabled BOM views

publish.

Document

type

Condition DWF output - complete

Presentation

(IPN)

General The DWF file includes all

presentation views,

animations, assembly

instructions, and referenced

assembly with complete

contents.

Document

type

Condition DWF output - complete

Drawing

(IDW,

DWG)

General The DWF file includes all

sheets, tables, and

referenced models with

complete contents for the

models.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

DWF markup

Sheet Properties

Displays the sheet properties and a preview of the sheet.

The information is informational only. You cannot edit the edit field.

Access:

Click Open. Select a DWF file containing markups. In

the Markups browser, right-click the sheet, and select

Properties.

Following properties appear with their values:

Sheet Status

Sheet Name

Parent File

File Location

File Size

Modified

Last Save by

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Insert objects

Insert objects into models or drawings

You can link or embed external files (such as spreadsheets or word processing

documents) in an Autodesk Inventor model or drawing. When you insert an

object, a 3rd Party folder is added as the first folder in the browser. All linked or

embedded files are found under the 3rd Party folder.

1. On the ribbon, click Manage tab Insert panel Insert Object.

2. In the Insert Object dialog box, choose the options to achieve the

desired result:

To create a file, select the object type and select Create New.

The application for the object type opens so that you can

create the object. The new object is embedded in the model or

drawing and does not exist as a separate file.

To embed the content of an existing file, select Create from

File then click Browse to find the file. After the file is

embedded, you can make changes that do not affect the

source file.

Note You can link to an embedded file from another Inventor

model or drawing. When you edit the external file from the

linked file and save the edits, only the Inventor file where the

external file was embedded is updated. Close the external file

to update the linked Inventor file.

To link to an existing file, select Create from File, select Link,

and then click Browse to find the file. After the file is added to

the Autodesk Inventor file, any changes you make also change

the source file. Save the edits to show the updates in

Autodesk Inventor.

Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

AEC exchange

Check Design

Contains information related to the model and building components.

Access: Ribbon: AEC Exchange tab Manage panel Check

Design

In the Export Building Components dialog box, click

Check Design.

A check mark next to a node indicates the item is OK. An exclamation next to a

node indicates the item needs attention.

Click Clipboard to copy the data to the operation system clipboard and make it

available to paste in a word processing or spreadsheet application.

Indicates there are no issues with the item.

Indicates that there is a potential problem with the item and it

requires attention. Models can be exported with this icon

showing except for the Component Type node. The Component

Type is a required field.

The Model Complexity it determined by the number of faces and the number of

components in the model as follows:

Low Number of occurrences: < 25

Number of faces: < 500

Medium Number of occurrences: > 24 and < 100

Number of faces: > 499 and < 2000

High Number of occurrences: > 99

Number of faces: > 1999

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Engineers Notebook

Engineer’s Notebook browser

Lists all the notes in a part or assembly. The browser provides options for sorting

and organizing notes.

Note list

Browser menu

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Task Scheduler application

Task Scheduler is a separate application that performs automated tasks and acts

as a batch processor in Autodesk Inventor and other applications.

To open Task Scheduler, click Start Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor

(version) Tools Task Scheduler.

Use the Task Scheduler to organize and define one or more time-consuming tasks

from different types of programs, and execute the tasks in a specified order at a

time that you schedule. Close the Task Scheduler window, and the tasks you

scheduled run at the specified time.

Task Scheduler contains predefined task managers for executing common tasks,

and a custom task manager for defining your own tasks. A Sequential Task

manager is provided to set up multiple predefined and custom tasks. The Migrate

Files task is used to migrate files directly from the Vault.

In addition to Custom and Sequential tasks, the predefined tasks include:

Migrate Files

Update Design

Publish DWF Files

Print Files

Import and Export Files

Check In to Vault

Check Out from Vault

Get Latest Version from Vault

Convert IDW to DWG

Refresh Standard Components in Assemblies

More detailed Help is available in the Task Scheduler.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Use i-drop to access parts within Webpages

Create custom Team Web files

Using i-drop parts requires ActiveX. If you do not have ActiveX installed on your

computer you can download it here:

http://www.autodesk.com/prods/idrop/download/idrop.cab

1. Save the part you want to make available as an iPart to C:\Program

Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Web\.

2. Close Autodesk Inventor.

3. Using a graphics program, create a BMP of the iPart you want to

display on your Web page.

4. Open to edit C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor

[version]\Web\my_template.xml

5. Replace my_image1.bmp with the name of your BMP file.

6. Replace the caption, My Template of i-drop Parts with a caption you

want displayed on this page.

7. Replace my_part1.ipt with the name of the part you want to make

available as an iPart.

Note my_part1.ipt is referenced twice. Replace both instances with the

name of your part

8. Save the file to C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor

[version]\Web\ with a new name, and then close the file.

9. Open to edit C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor

[version]\Web\WebTemplate.htm

10. Replace my_template1.xml with the name you have given your new

XML file.

11. Save C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor

[version]\Web\WebTemplate.htm\WebTemplate.htm as

SampleWeb.htm.

Concept Procedure

Note If you give WebTemplate.htm a name different from

SampleWeb.htm, modify the Team Web address specified in: Tools tab

Options panel Application Options File.

12. Start Autodesk Inventor. On the ribbon, click Tools tab Web panel

Team Web.

Your new TeamWeb page displays.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Communication Center

Communication Center

Until you configure the Communication Center, the only option available is to

select your country and update preference.

Access:

At the right end of the Status bar, click the Live Update icon.

Specify your country and preferred update frequency specifies the country

for which you want the Live Update information to localize.

Connect to the Internet and download available information downloads the

latest updates and announcements.

Specify which information channels you want to view selects the information

channels you want Communication Center to access.

Settings

Channels

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

CAD Manager Control Utility

Install patches using local patch lists

You can use a local patch list to specify the patches you want to receive from

Live Update. To create a local patch list:

1. Download a patch file and the associated patch list text file from the

Autodesk Web site.

2. Review any associated README files.

3. Store the patch file in a location that users can access.

4. Use the CAD Manager Control utility so users can access the

Communication Center.

5. In Live Update Configuration, select Enable Using Local Patch List.

6. Enter the path to your local patch list.

Save changes to your computer

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Subscription Center

Subscription customers can access the Subscription Center, which provides

resources such as e-Learning and Web support. To access these resources, install

the CAD Manager utility. The CAD Manager utility is on the Autodesk Inventor

installation CD.

After you install the CAD Manager, go to the Subscription Center tab on the CAD

Manager Control Utility and select the Subscription Center check box. Go to Start

Programs Autodesk Tools CAD Manager Control Utility Autodesk

Inventor CAD Manager Control Utility.

Selecting the Subscription Center check box gives you access to subscription

resources listed on the Help menu in Autodesk Inventor:

e_Learning Catalog accesses self-paced lessons to give you hands-on

experience.

Create Support Request sets up Web-based technical support for installation,

configuration, and troubleshooting.

View Support Requests lists your support requests. You can update or add

attachments.

Resolved Error Reports lists resolved error reports. You can click a report to

see advice about updates or configuration.

Edit Subscription Center Profile describes information about your system and

its configuration.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization >

Design Assistant

Topics in this section

Use Design Assistant

Package files

Manage links between files

iProperties

Projects and Libraries

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant >

Use Design Assistant

Design Assistant

Design Assistant maintains links between Autodesk Inventor files, locates

referenced files in folders, previews files with a thumbnail sketch, and manages

file properties.

Access: Click Manage Design Assistant, and then click

Properties.

From Microsoft Windows Explorer, select one or more Autodesk

Inventor files or a folder containing Autodesk Inventor files,

right-click, and then select Design Assistant from the menu,

and click Properties.

Note If you drag an Autodesk Inventor file from Microsoft Windows Explorer into

an active Design Assistant session, the file in the active session is replaced with

the new file. Unsaved changes in the current file are lost.

Properties

Preview

Manager

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant >

Package files

Find missing referenced files - Pack and Go

Locates a referenced file that was not found during a Pack and Go packing

process.

Access: Automatically displayed if file is not found during packing

process.

Start Pack and Go using one of the following methods:

From Design Assistant, select an Autodesk Inventor file (.iam, .ipt, .idw,

.dwg (Autodesk Inventor Drawing), .ipn) in the browser, right-click, and

then select Pack and Go.

Look in Shows path of the active directory.

Open Adds the selected file. The packing process

continues.

Cancel Cancels the packing process and displays the Pack

and Go dialog box without referenced files.

Set Project

File

Sets the project file used for file path resolution

during packing process. Automatically restarts

packing process.

Skip Skips the missing referenced file and continues

packing process. Skipped file is not included in

packaged assembly.

Skip All Skips all missing referenced files and continues

packing process. Skipped files are not included in

packaged assembly.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant >

Manage links between files

Design Assistant Manager

The Design Assistant Manager provides options for managing associations

between Autodesk Inventor files. You can:

View relationships between files.

Rename files.

Create a copy of a single file with a different name.

Copy an assembly with a different name to create a new assembly.

When you make changes, Design Assistant Manager updates any references in

associated assembly, part, or drawing files and displays the new relationships.

Use Design Manager only for files in a single-user or a shared project. You cannot

use Design Manager for files in a semi-isolated project

You cannot use Design Manager to work with links to external files such as

Mechanical Desktop parts, word processing, spreadsheet, or text files.

Note Before working with Autodesk Inventor files created in a previous release,

open them in the current release to migrate the data format.

Access: From Microsoft Windows Explorer, select an Autodesk Inventor

file, right-click, and select Design Assistant from the menu.

Click the Manage icon.

Note

If you open Design Assistant from within Autodesk Inventor or from a

folder in Microsoft Windows Explorer, the Design Assistant Manager is

not available.

If you drag an Autodesk Inventor file from Microsoft Windows Explorer

into an active Design Assistant session, the file in the active session is

replaced with the new file. Unsaved changes in the current file are lost.

The Design Assistant Manager browser has two sections:

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Top browser

Lower browser

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant >

iProperties

Properties - iProperties tab

Opens the Autodesk Inventor properties (iProperties) dialog box so you can set

the file properties specific to Autodesk Inventor files.

Access: From Windows Explorer, select an Autodesk Inventor file, right-

click, and then select Properties from the menu. Click the

iProperties tab.

Click the iProperties button to open the dialog box.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant >

Projects and Libraries

Use best practices in projects

Create projects

Edit projects

Change the active project

Set search paths for projects

Find where files are used

Find specific objects in Autodesk Inventor files

Set paths for iPart factories in projects

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and

Libraries >

Learn about Projects

Project Setup

Sets the project file for the active Design Assistant work session. Design Assistant

uses the project file to determine the workspace and search paths available for

the session.

Access: The Projects Setup dialog box is displayed if the default project

location is not defined.

Project Folder:

Specifies the location of the Project Files to use for the active Design Assistant

work session.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and

Libraries >

Project libraries

A library is a collection of related data files that you reference but usually don't

modify, such as a released data set, a set of commonly used components, iPart

factory parts, or standard parts. Libraries are located in a folder with a unique

name separate from other data files. A single library can be used across any

number of projects. You can use some or all files in a library.

In a project file, you right-click the Libraries location, and then use menu options

to browse to a folder. By assigning the folder as a library, you indicate that the

files are no longer editable using Autodesk Inventor. It is a good practice to use

Microsoft Windows Explorer to set your library folders and files as read-only.

References to library files include the library name, as well as the relative path

from the library folder to the referencing file. When resolving library references,

only the named library is searched. It is a good practice to avoid using duplicate

file names whenever possible, even for parts in different folders or different

libraries. If you cannot control where referenced parts originate or how they are

named, files in different libraries might have the same name. Autodesk Inventor

can resolve the reference because it knows which library to search in.

To share libraries across design workgroups

You can eliminate the need for each member of a design workgroup to set the

names and paths manually in their individual projects for the libraries to share.

1. An administrator creates a common project with one or more library

paths.

2. Each team member creates a personal project, using the common

project as a template.

When you create a project using the project editor, select the common

project before you click the New button. By default, the new project

created by the wizard uses the selected project as a template, and has

the same library definitions as the template project.

A project can include several kinds of libraries:

Standard content

iPart Factory

Proxy libraries

Another design set

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and

Libraries >

Collaborative design

Use Autodesk Inventor in workgroups

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and

Libraries > Collaborative design >

Projects for collaborative design

Use Autodesk Inventor in workgroups

If you are working in a design team, the CAD Administrator typically sets up the

working environment and develops the projects for team members. A project

specifies the locations where Autodesk Inventor searches for files.

Before working on a collaborative project, specify the project to use and set

options.

Set Autodesk Inventor project type

To check out files stored in a workgroup location

To check in files to a workgroup location

To copy files to your workspace

To update referenced files

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and

Libraries > Collaborative design >

Tools for working collaboratively

Autodesk Inventor provides tools for concurrent design so that members of a

group can share design data and work in the context of the same assembly

without making conflicting edits.

The tools include:

A project editor that manages projects a designer is working on, defines

the locations of all files associated with a project, provides quick

navigation to key project locations, and simplifies moving and copying

folders associated with a project without breaking cross file references.

A file status browser in the shared and semi-isolated projects shows the

status of all open files in a project, and checks files in and out to avoid

conflicting edits.

The semi-isolated project saves changes to files in a personal

workspace. Changes are not visible to others on the design team until

the edited files are checked in.

Autodesk Vault, when installed, isolates source files from files checked

out to designers. Changes must be checked in to the vault before they

are visible to other designers. Database queries access file properties,

references, and past configurations.

The Engineer's Notebook captures design information and other notes.

The Design Assistant tracks and manages file properties, links between

files, and other important information about Autodesk Inventor files.

Additional tools are provided for extended design teams. Tools for extended

design teams save all types of Autodesk Inventor design data into package

formats. Package formats optimize both 2D and 3D digital CAD data for

distributing outside the design department and viewing in Autodesk Streamline.

Once package files are published to Autodesk Streamline, all members of

extended design teams can view, manipulate, and mark up files in a secure Web-

based environment. It includes team members who may not own Autodesk

Inventor.

See the Autodesk Streamline Web site for additional product information and

purchase options.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and

Libraries >

File versions

Each time you save changes, a new version of the file is created in your

workspace, and the previous version is moved to the OldVersions\ folder. Other

designers who are referencing the file continue to see the earlier version of the

file and do not see the new version until you check the file back in to the

workgroup location in semi-isolated projects, or save the file in shared projects,

and they refresh their view of the assembly.

What happens when you save a file?

How do projects control file versions?

Why would you use old versions of files?

How do file versions integrate with a PDM?

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and

Libraries >

Set search paths

Find String

Specifies a string (such as a referenced file name) and searches for it in all files

listed in the Design Assistant Manager browser.

Access:

Use Microsoft Windows Explorer to select an assembly file,

right-click, and then select Design Assistant.

Click the Manage icon to activate the Design Assistant Manager.

Select Tools Find String from the menu.

Search

String

Enter the string into the box, and then click OK to

initiate the search. When the search is complete, the

file names are highlighted in the Design Assistant

Manager browser.

Note The search on the string is case sensitive.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and

Libraries >

Paths for iPart factory parts

Set paths for iPart factories in projects

In a project file, define a library for both the folder containing the iPart factory

part files and a corresponding proxy folder. After the libraries are added to the

project, you can add the iParts to an assembly.

1. Verify that all Autodesk Inventor files are closed.

2. In the Project Editor, double-click a project to activate it.

3. In the lower pane, right-click the Libraries category, and then click Add

Path. Browse to the folder or enter the name of the library folder to

add a new library path for the iPart factory file.

4. If the folder was created previously, right-click the newly created

library path, and then click Add Proxy Path on the menu. Browse to

the folder location and select it.

For custom iPart factories only, enter a location for the iPart factory

proxy file. A proxy folder is created automatically with the same name

as the iPart factory library, but with a leading underscore (_)

character.

If the proxy folder does not exist, use Microsoft Windows Explorer to create it

before you add the proxy path or use Add Path again and specify the new folder

path. Name the new library the same as the iPart factory library preceded with an

underscore character.

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and

Libraries >

File locations for Mechanical Desktopparts

Link Mechanical Desktop File Options

Sets the units of measurement and template for the Mechanical Desktop file when

you are placing it in as a component in an Autodesk Inventor assembly.

Access:

In an assembly file, click Assemble tab Component panel

Place, and then select a Mechanical Desktop file in the Open

dialog box. The Link Mechanical Desktop File Options dialog box

opens so that you can specify the measurement units for the

file.

Note If the path to the selected file is not specified in the active project, a series

of dialog boxes are displayed so that you can add the path.

Units of

Mechanical

Desktop

part

Specifies the units of measurement that are

assumed in the Mechanical Desktop part. Click the

arrow and select the units type from the list.

Template

File

Specifies the Autodesk Inventor part template to

use. The template controls the display of the part in

the assembly, including the units of measurement,

display color, and any other attributes that are set in

the template.

Note You can use the same standard template that

you use to create parts, or customize a template

that you use for Mechanical Desktop parts.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization >

Autodesk Inventor Tools

Topics in this section

Add-In Manager

Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard

Autodesk Multi-Sheet Plot

Style Library Manager

Style Management Wizard

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools >

Add-In Manager

Add-In Manager

Lists the Autodesk Inventor add-ins that are installed on the system. You can

load or unload any displayed add-in.

Sort the list by name or load behavior by clicking the column header. Press CTRL

+ click to select multiple items on the list.

Access: Ribbon: Tools tab Options panel Add-Ins

Start menu: Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor

[version] Tools Add-In Manager.

Available Add-Ins and Load Behavior

Description

Load Behavior

Note If you change the status of an add-in, the change is not effective until you

click OK.

Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools >

Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard

Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard

The Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard is a command that copies drawing

resources from a source drawing to a target drawing. Close Autodesk Inventor

before you can use the wizard. Use the Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard to:

Transfer selected title blocks, borders, and sketched symbols to multiple

drawings.

Optionally replace existing resources in the target drawing.

Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor

[version] Tools Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard.

Welcome page Describes the Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard processes.

Select Source Drawing and Resources page Selects the source drawing, shows

a preview image, and lists drawing resources.

Source Drawing selects files to process in a detailed view.

Preview, if available, shows a thumbnail view of the source drawing.

Source Resource shows the drawing resources hierarchy.

Select Target Drawings page Selects the target drawing or multiple drawings.

Navigate to the appropriate folder.

Add drawings opens the Select Target Drawings so you

can browse to the desired folder to select one or more

target drawings.

A target drawing can be listed only once. Click the File or

Path column name to sort files.

Skipped Files dialog box opens if a target file:

Is the same as the source drawing.

Is already listed.

Is read-only.

Procedure Quick Reference

Has not been migrated to the current version of

Autodesk Inventor.

Next progresses to the next page when one or more target

drawing is specified.

Select Option page Specifies how to handle drawing resources in the target file

that have the same name as drawing resources in the source file.

Yes replaces drawing resources in the target file with the same name as

resources in the source file.

No gives a unique name to target drawing resources that have the same name as

those in the source file. The copied resource is named Copy of ResourceName.

The target drawing version retains its original name.

Begin the Batch Processing page Shows progress of transferred selected

borders, title blocks, and sketched symbols.

Start begins processing of selected files.

Pause temporarily halts transferring resources.

Cancel halts processing.

Results of the processing are shown in a log file.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools >

Autodesk Multi-Sheet Plot

Multi-sheet plot

Plots a collection of drawing sheets of one or more sizes. You can schedule

plotting so that several jobs print in a batch at a specified time.

Access: From the Start menu, click Programs Autodesk Autodesk

Inventor [version] Autodesk Multi-sheet plot.

Page Setup

Select Drawing Files

Select Project

Preview

Print

Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools >

Style Library Manager

Create New Style Library

Creates a style library by specifying the creation method, the library location, and

the source library.

Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor

Tools Style Library Manager. In the Style Library Manager,

click the Create New Style Library button.

In the Create New Style Library dialog box:

Creation Method selects how you want to create the library. Click the arrow to

choose Copy Existing Style Library, and then modify as appropriate or Create

Empty Style Library, and then select styles from one or more libraries.

New Style Library Location browses to the folder where you want to store the

new library.

Source Style Library to Copy browses to the library you want to copy when the

creation method is Copy. Unavailable when the creation method creates an empty

style library.

Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools >

Style Management Wizard

Style Management Wizard

The Style Management Wizard is a tool for administrators to assist in batch-style

management for Autodesk Inventor files. Using the Style Management Wizard,

you can:

Harvest styles from Autodesk Inventor files and place them in a target

style library.

Purge styles from Autodesk Inventor files. Purging removes unused style

information and can be beneficial in large assemblies by reducing

required memory.

Use the Style Management Wizard when transitioning to using a style library with

your design project.

Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor

Tools Style Management Wizard.

All files must migrate to the latest version of Autodesk Inventor. Files that

are not migrated are skipped during batch processing, including assemblies

that are migrated but contain components that are not migrated.

Welcome page Describes the Harvest Styles and Purge Styles

processes.

Projects to

Manage page

Lists all defined projects by Name and Project Location.

The active project is indicated by a check mark. Its

settings for Style Library and path are summarized

below the window. Double-click to select a project and

make it active. The Style Management Wizard uses the

active project to resolve all file paths during processing.

Files to Process Selects files to process in a detailed view.

Add Specific Files button Browses to the folder that

contains the files to process. Selected files are listed by

file name, file type, and path.

Add All Files in Active Project button Lists all files by

file name, type, and path. Clear the check box to

exclude a file from processing.

Alternate methods of adding files to the list:

Drag and drop files from Microsoft Windows

Explorer. Drop them in the list to add them.

Get all files referenced by a specific file by

right-clicking the file in the process list, and

Procedure Quick Reference

right-clicking the file in the process list, and

then selecting Get Referenced Files. Adds all

files that the selected file is dependent on to

the list.

Get all drawings or presentations that use

a specific file by right-clicking a file in the

process list. Select Drawings and

Presentations, and then Get All. Adds to the

process list all drawings and presentations in

the project search paths that use the specific

file.

Select

Management

Options page

Chooses a harvest or purge operation.

Harvest Styles into Target Style Library specifies the

target style library.

Use Source Project Style Library

Automatically selects the style library specified

in the project. Clear the check box of files you

want to exclude from processing.

Create a New Style Library Opens the New

Style Library dialog box. Specify to copy an

existing style library or create an empty library.

Browse to the folder where the library will be

stored, and if copying, the source style library

you are copying.

Select an Existing Style Library Lists the

Default Style Library and any project that uses

a style library. Use the Browse button to browse

to a specific library.

Purge All Unused Styles from Files automatically

deletes unused styles from selected documents. Styles

not saved to a styles library are permanently lost.

Begin Batch

Processing

Starts batch processing, using previously selected

options.

Press Pause to halt the processing temporarily or Cancel

to stop.

Autodesk Inventor >

Design Optimization

Topics in this section

Find and correct design errors

AutoLimits

Parameters in models

Edit models

Derived parts and assemblies

Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization >

Find and correct design errors

Command message dialog box

Provides information about problems that occur as you design in Autodesk

Inventor. The title of the dialog box identifies the failed operation. To resize the

dialog box, drag a corner of the box.

Access: The command message dialog box is displayed when an

operation cannot be successfully completed. For example, it

appears when a specified fillet radius is larger than the edge to

which it is applied or when an extrusion is specified to act as a

cut does not intersect with another feature.

Tip When command message dialog box is open, you can use the shortcut keys

to change the view in the graphics window.

Press F2 to pan.

Press F3 to zoom.

Press F4 to rotate.

Message list

Copy button

Options

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization >

AutoLimits

AutoLimits Settings

Use AutoLimits Settings to accept or to change defaults. Settings apply to all

AutoLimits created in the future, but do not affect previously created AutoLimits.

Access: Ribbon: Inspect tab AutoLimits panel AutoLimits Settings

Default

Visibility

Sets visibility preferences for OK, Warning, and Serious

Warning levels. Sets boundaries for each AutoLimit type.

Some options may not be available for all AutoLimit types.

The defaults for AutoLimit indicator visibility are displayed

when the dialog box is opened. Select On to display or Off

to turn off display of the indicator.

Green OK (data within normal limits). Default

setting is Off to avoid clutter in the

graphics window.

In individual AutoLimits, the default range

is 90-110%. That is, monitored values that

fall within that range are considered to be

acceptable.

Yellow Warning (data approaching limit of target

range). Default setting is On.

In individual AutoLimits, the default upper

range is 110-130%. The default lower

range is 70-90%. Monitored values that fall

within that range are considered to be out

of the ideal range.

Red Serious Warning (data exceeds target

range). Default setting is On.

In individual AutoLimits, the default range

is less than 60 or greater than 140 or 50-

70 or 130-150 depending on how you set

it.

Boundaries In the AutoLimit Settings browser, expand AutoLimits to

show individual AutoLimit types. Select a type to set

boundary conditions.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

boundary conditions.

Use Model

Tolerances

When selected, applies the model tolerance

to each level (OK, Warning, and Serious

Warning). Select this check box to use the

tolerances already defined for the model.

Clear the check box to use tolerances set

in the boundaries of individual AutoLimits.

For example, if you create all five levels for

a particular AutoLimit, the range between

red levels is three times the model

tolerance.

Precision Selects the level of precision (number of

decimal places) for AutoLimits tolerances.

Method Selects the method to use as a range for

acceptable tolerances:

% As a percentage of a total

specified value.

+/- As numbers below or above

a total specified value.

Lower Defines the left (lower) value of the

boundary range.

Upper Defines the right (upper) value of the

boundary range.

Tool tip In the AutoLimit Settings browser, click the Tool Tip

icon to set AutoLimits Tooltip Feedback options.

Select check boxes for the information to include in a

tooltip for an AutoLimit with defined boundaries.

Once the boundaries are created, place the cursor

over a browser icon of an object to show information

related to the AutoLimit. Clear the check box to turn

off tool tips.

Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization >

Parameters in models

Custom Property Format

Enables the format of exported parameters to set.

Access: In the Parameters dialog box, right-click a parameter that is

designated for export and click Custom Property Format. To

designate a parameter for export, the Export Parameter check

box must be selected.

Property

Type

Export the parameter data type as either text or

number.

Units Select the units for the parameter export.

Format For Text Type parameters defined in inch or feet

units, the parameter can be exported in decimal or

fractional formats.

For Text Type parameters defined in degrees units,

the parameter can be exported in decimal degrees or

degrees-minutes-seconds formats.

Precision Select the precision for the parameter export.

Different choices are available based on the Format

setting.

Apply to

existing

comparable

parameters

Select the check box to apply the designated format

to all exported parameters in the current document.

Only parameters of the same type (Length, Volume,

and so on) are affected.

This option does not link the parameters for future

format changes. This option must be selected each

time a format change is to be made to all exported

parameters of the same type.

Preview Preview the parameter with export format applied.

Units

String

For Text Type parameters, select the check box to

append the units string to the parameter.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Leading

Zeros

Leading zeros are applied to the parameter if the

check box is selected.

Trailing

Zeros

Trailing zeros are applied to the parameter if the

check box is selected.

Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization >

Edit models

Measure command

On the Tools tab, Measure panel, use the Measure commands to measure

distance, angle, loop, or area. Results are displayed in the measurement box.

Access: On the Tools tab, Measure panel, select Measure Distance,

Measure Angle, Measure Loops, or Measure Area.

Or, right-click in the graphics window and select Measure, and

then select the option.

From the measure box, click the arrow to list options.

Reset Clears the measurement from the Measurement box

so that you can make another measurement.

Measure

Distance

Measures length of a line, length of an arc, distance

between points, radius and diameter of a circle,

distance between two components in an assembly

(minimum distance), distance between two faces, or

position of elements relative to the active coordinate

system.

Click arrow at left to change selection priority to

Component, Part, or Edges and Faces.

Measure

UCS drop-

down list

The drop-down list is available only if your active

document contains a UCS. Origin option is listed first

in the drop-down list followed with list of UCSes in

your active document.

Shows measured distance from the origin of the part,

or center point of the selected coordinate system.

Measure

Angle

Measures the angle between two lines, edges, or

points.

Measure

Loop

Measures the length of closed loops defined by face

boundaries, or other geometry.

Measure

Area

Measures the area of contiguous, enclosed regions.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Add to

Accumulate

Adds the measurement in the Measurement box to

accumulate a total measurement.

Clear

Accumulate

Clears all measurements from the accumulate,

resetting the sum to zero.

Display

Accumulate

Displays the sum of all measurements you have

added to the accumulate.

Precision/

All

Decimals

Displays eight formatting values and the option to

display all decimals.

Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization >

Derived parts and assemblies

Export Objects

Enables you to specify which derivable objects to mark for export. Objects must

be marked for export in order for them to be derived. This optimizes the update

process, requesting changes to referencing documents on a per-object, rather

than per-file basis.

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Export Objects

StatusProvides the following command buttons, enabling you to

change the status on multiple selected objects at the same

time.

Marks the selected objects for export.

Excludes the selected objects from export.

Symbols Indicates whether the object is marked for export. Either

click the icon next to an individual object and toggle the

status, or select multiple objects and click a status button at

the top of the dialog box. A hand symbol superimposed on

the item icon identifies an exported object.

Solid Body When exported, the solid body can be derived.

Note It is one object that is, by default and regardless of its

export state, implicitly marked for derive when a derive

feature is created. If you turn off export with the Export

Objects command, any derive that references the solid body

enters the Design Doctor.

Sketches When selected, any unconsumed visible 2D or 3D sketches

in the component are exported and can be derived.

Work

Geometry

When selected, any visible work features in the component

are exported and can be derived.

Surfaces When selected, any visible surfaces in the component are

exported and can be derived.

Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Parameters When selected, any parameters in the source assembly are

exported and can be derived. The Parameters folder includes

a subfolder that contains folders from the Parameters dialog

box. The Parameters and Export Objects dialog boxes share

the same parameter statuses.

iMates When selected, any iMates defined in the source assembly

are exported and can be derived.

Autodesk Inventor >

System Performance

Topics in this section

Network license

Increase performance and capacity

Increase performance in file migration

Autodesk Inventor > System Performance >

Network license

License timeout functionality

Network connectivity requirement

License borrowing

Additional Information

Contact your CAD manager for more information about using Autodesk Inventor

with a network license.

Autodesk Inventor > System Performance >

Increase performance and capacity

Application Options tips

You may find that by implementing LOD's, Shrinkwrap or Derived substitutes, and

using some of the other techniques described previously, you eliminate

performance issues. If not, the next section offers suggestions for adjusting the

Application Options to consume the least amount of resources.

Access: Ribbon: Tools tab Options panel Application Options

The following settings on the tabs listed below can affect performance and/or

capacity:

General

File

Colors

Display

Hardware

Drawing

Sketch

Notebook

Concept Procedure

Autodesk Inventor > System Performance >

Increase performance in file migration

Access:

Start Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor [version]

Tools Task Scheduler.

In the Task Scheduler main menu, click Create Task Migrate

Files.

TIPS

In the Migrate Files dialog box, click Options tab Total Rebuild.

Although this method takes longer than selecting an entire project at a

time for migration, following these steps ultimately increases Autodesk

Inventor performance.

Always make a backup.

Migrate all part (.ipt) files first , next all subassemblies, and finally, the

main assembly.

The following method reduces the time to open an assembly model,

since Autodesk Inventor does not need to migrate files before opening

them.

Although this method may slow down the migration, it ultimately

increases Autodesk Inventor performance.

Note This method is a faster than selecting an entire project at a time

for migration within Autodesk Inventor

To ensure the full benefit of Memory Saving Mode, migrate all your

Autodesk Inventor R10 and earlier files. To facilitate this task, use Task

Scheduler. Access Task Scheduler: Programs Autodesk Autodesk

Inventor [release] Tools Task Scheduler.

1. In the Migrate Files dialog box, click Add. Select Add Folder

to migrate 2 or more part (.ipt) files, and then select From

Local or From Vault.

2. Browse to the appropriate folder and click OK.

3. Click the down-arrow in the File name column, and select .ipt

to display only part files.

4. Once completed, repeat the previous steps for all the

subassemblies (not the main assembly).

5. Repeat the steps for the main assembly.

6. Finally, migrate the drawing (.idw) and the presentation (.ipn)

files.

Note This method is more efficient than

selecting an entire project at a time for

migration. Using this method, Autodesk

Inventor loads each part and subassembly into

memory on a one by one basis before freeing

up the memory for the item.

Migrating just the main assembly, Autodesk

Inventor loads every part and subassembly

separately into memory including reoccurring

parts and patterned assemblies. This

technique can result in "out of memory" and

stability issues with large assemblies since

Windows on a 32-bit operating system can

only allocate a maximum of 2 GB of memory

to each CPU process (this 2-GB limit may be

spread over RAM or the pagefile). With large

assemblies containing Component Patterns, it

can start to be a major issue.

Autodesk Inventor >

Glossary

active part

The part that is being edited. In an open part file, the part is active and

available for edit. In an assembly file, select the part in either the browser

or the graphics window before it can be edited. If a part or subassembly

was previously hidden or designated as background, it must be enabled

before activation. The active part may be edited. See also background,

enabled, and undisplayed parts.

active sketch

The current sketch to edit.

active standard style

In drawing documents, the default styles associated with the active

standard.

adaptive compared to associative

Associative geometry has a one-way parametric relationship between parent

and child geometry. Child geometry projected from a parent part is

dependent on parent geometry. Child geometry updates when the parent is

modified.

Adaptive geometry can have two-way dependencies. One part is designated

as fixed geometry, and its adaptive counterparts update when the fixed

geometry is changed. Whenever a part is reassigned from adaptive to fixed

geometry, then changes made to that part update the remaining adaptive

counterparts.

adaptive feature

A feature that can resize when constrained to other features. Individual part

features may be designated as adaptive using the context menu. Features

are constrained to a specified size, unless they are designated as adaptive.

adaptive part

Underconstrained part geometry can resize when designated as an adaptive

part in an assembly. Assembly constraints position adaptive parts relative to

other parts and adapt the part topology to fully constrained part features.

Features that were underconstrained in the part file can resize according to

assembly constraints and positions of other parts.

adaptive status

The status of a part that is not constrained to a specified size or shape.

Parts are rigid bodies by default, but may be designated as adaptive in the

context menu or the Occurrence tab of the Properties dialog box. Using

assembly constraints to adjust size and shape relative to other parts may

modify adaptive part topology. In assemblies, one occurrence sets the

adaptive status for multiple placements of a component.

adaptive subassembly

In the context of an assembly, designation of a component that contains

underconstrained parts or subassemblies. When an adaptive subassembly is

constrained within its parent assembly, or to a component in another

assembly, underconstrained geometry in an adaptive part resizes. For

example, adaptive piston and rod subassemblies are sized and positioned

when inserted in an air cylinder assembly.

adaptive work features

Construction geometry (such as work points, work planes, and work axes)

within a part that is positioned by the geometry of other parts. For

example, a 3D sweep feature relies on adaptive work points positioned

relative to other components in an assembly to establish its position. The

position of the work features adapts to changes made to the referenced

geometry.

AEC Exchange Connector

A preparation tool that enables Autodesk Inventor content to be used in a

connected system in mechanical, electrical, and plumbing (MEP)

applications.

aligned dimension

A linear dimension parallel to a line spanning the minimum distance

between two measurement points.

all components suppressed

Suppresses all children of the assembly, which results in a fast load of only

the assembly file. Subassemblies are fully suppressed so that their browser

structure is not visible. All Components Suppressed is the lowest-weight

loading of an assembly.

all content center suppressed

Suppresses all components designated as content, and does not load their

occurrences in memory. For example, consider the hundreds of fasteners in

a design. If the content center files are stored in a remote location, reduced

network traffic may also result.

all parts suppressed

Suppresses all parts at all levels of the assembly hierarchy. Subassemblies

are loaded. You can investigate the assembly structure, constraints, and

other attributes without loading part files.

all styles

Styles in the current document and the style library.

all-around symbol

An open circle at the vertex of the welding symbol that indicates the weld is

to go around the entire joint.

alternate unit dimension

A dimension that displays two compatible units of measurement. Also called

alternative dimension or dual dimension.

angle constraint

An assembly constraint that controls the angle between planes on two

components in an assembly.

angle dimension

A dimension that denotes the angle formed by two lines.

arc

Geometry is defined four ways in sketches: center-point arc (specified by a

center point and two points on a curve), three-point arc (specified by two

endpoints and a radius), tangent arc (specified from the endpoint of a curve

to another point), and an arc tangent or perpendicular to a curve (created

by dragging with the line tool).

array

See pattern feature.

arrow side

In weld situations such as a T-shaped joint, there are two potential places

for a weld. The side of the joint to which the arrow points is known as the

arrow side. The arrow side weld is made with the instructions given below

the reference line for an ANSI symbol and above the reference line for all

other standards.

aspect ratio

The proportional relationship of height and width. For example, a bitmap

used in a sketch can be resized but it retains its original aspect ratio. The

proportions of the height to width do not change.

assembly

Two or more components (parts or subassemblies) considered as a single

model. An assembly typically includes multiple components positioned

absolutely and relatively (as required) with constraints that define both size

and position. Assembly components may include features defined in place in

the assembly. Mass and material properties may be inherited from

individual part files.

assembly constraints

Rules that determine how parts in an assembly are placed relative to other

parts in the assembly. Constraints remove degrees of freedom. Assembly

constraints include angle, flush, mate, and tangent. Constraints may be

placed between faces of features, part edges, points, inferred axes, and

part work features such as planes, axes, and points.

assembly features

Features (chamfers, extrude cuts, holes, weld beads) that are created and

saved in the assembly file. The topology is not passed down to the

component files. Used to define specific manufacturing processes such as

match drilling and post-weld machining.

assembly pattern

In an assembly, components arranged in a circular or rectangular pattern.

All elements in the pattern are identical. Assembly patterns are used to

place multiple bolts in holes, or to position any component or components in

a symmetrical arrangement. An assembly pattern can be associative to a

feature pattern, updating when the feature pattern is edited.

assembly presentations

See presentation views.

assembly structure

The hierarchical tree shown in the browser that graphically illustrates

relationships among components in the assembly model. The assembly

structure shows the ownership of constraints and components within a

subassembly. In general, component position in the assembly structure

compares to the sequence of assembly during manufacturing.

associative design view representation

A drawing view that is associated to a design view representation in the

assembly environment that updates automatically when changes are made

to the design view representation in the assembly environment.

associative flat pattern views

In sheet metal design, flat pattern views are associated with the 3D model,

like drawing views. When the model changes, the flat pattern view is

updated. However, flat pattern dimensions do not update 3D models.

associative sketch pattern elements

In sketch patterns, all pattern elements are fully constrained as a group.

Changes to an element update all other elements in the pattern. If

association is removed during pattern creation or editing, constraints are

removed. Pattern geometry becomes copied geometry with no association

to other elements.

associative spline

When creating an offset from an ellipse, an associative spline is created

instead of a true mathematical ellipse if the offset selection point does not

display the parent ellipse axis. The result is a spline equidistant from the

ellipse.

attribute

A data management description of information associated with a part of

subassembly. In an assembly or a bill of materials, an attribute typically

refers to a file-level property to incorporate into a structured bill of

materials.

AutoCAD spline fit method

Creates an Autodesk Inventor spline using the same method used by

AutoCAD.

automatic edge chain

A selection setting used during creation of 3D fillets. When Automatic Edge

Chain is on, selecting an edge automatically selects all edges tangent to it.

axis of revolution

The centerline of a revolved feature.

axonometric projection

A type of orthographic view created by projection lines that are

perpendicular to the viewing surface or plane, where a 3D model appears as

inclined, exposing the X, Y, and Z view planes simultaneously. For example,

an isometric view is axonometric.

base feature

The first feature created in a part. May be an imported base solid (.sat or

.step file format), in which case the base feature is a fixed size. Sketched

or placed features add details to the base feature and are positioned

relative to one another using dimensional or geometric constraints. The

base feature should represent the most basic shape in the part.

base solid

A model in SAT or STEP file format imported in Autodesk Inventor as a base

feature (the first feature in a model). A base solid is fully dimensioned; its

size can be changed only by commands in the Solids environment, but the

solid can be modified by adding features.

beam

Typically a horizontal structural member of a frame often analyzed for load

bearing capacity.

bend

In sheet metal design, a corner seam can be converted to a bend. A bend is

the small radius between faces that represents the fabrication process in

which bends are applied to a flat pattern to form a 3D part.

bend allowance

In sheet metal design, a factor applied when converting a bend to an

unfolded condition. Material thickness, material type, and bend radius are

used to calculate the amount of distortion.

bend lines

In sheet metal design, bend lines can be displayed in the flat pattern

drawing view to show the start, center, and end of the bend zone.

bend relief

In sheet metal design, a small notch cut at the end of a bend to prevent

material from tearing.

bend zone

In sheet metal design, the area where material deformation takes place,

often referred to in the flat pattern as the area between bend lines.

bill of materials

For an assembly, a document that describes components details such as

component name, material, and quantity. Bills of materials can be single or

multiple levels (exploded).

bottom-up design

A sequential assembly design technique that adds previously designed

components to an assembly model and positions the components using

assembly constraints.

bounding rectangle

A virtual rectangle that represents the extents of an image in Autodesk

Inventor. When an image is placed in a sketch, constraints and dimensions

can be applied to the bounding rectangle to position the image.

broken view

A drawing view that was divided with cosmetic break lines and

foreshortened. It allows a component view and its critical annotation areas,

which in an unbroken view are prohibitively small, to display at a legible

scale.

browser

The graphical hierarchy showing relationships among geometric elements in

parts, assemblies, and drawings. Icons represent sketches, features,

constraints, or attributes for each model. Objects are shown in the browser

in the order in which they were created. Objects can also be edited,

renamed, added, deleted, copied, and moved to a different location in the

browser.

cached data

In the computer memory, the last used solution that yielded usable sketch

or system data. For example, when a part containing an iSketch is edited

outside of the parent assembly, the assembly displays a message warning

that changes may not be reflected in the part because the last-known

(cached) data is used to represent the part in the assembly.

catalog

Microsoft Windows folder hierarchy. Catalog folders are used to manage

iFeatures in a user-defined hierarchy.

center point

A work point placed at the intersection of the default reference planes in a

part or assembly file.

centerline

The axis about which a profile is revolved (revolve feature) or swept (sweep

feature). To automate centerline selection, right-click a curve, and then

change the linetype to a centerline.

chamfer

A placed feature that bevels a part edge and is defined by its placement,

size, and angle.

child

In a hierarchical design relationship, a child element is dependent on

another (parent) element. A typical example is a feature, such as a cut, that

depends on a base feature. In the browser, the child, or dependent feature,

is indented under its parent. A child feature can be a parent to other

features. In most cases, deleting the child feature has no effect on the

parent feature.

circle

Geometry defined two ways in sketches: a center-point circle (defined by a

center point and a point on its circumference) and a tangent circle (defined

as tangent to three lines on its circumference).

coincident constraint

A geometric constraint that constrains two points together or constrains one

point to a curve. When this constraint is applied to the center points of two

circles, arcs, or ellipses, the result is the same as the concentric constraint.

collinear constraint

A geometric constraint that causes two or more line segments or ellipse

axes to lie along the same line. In an assembly, a collinear constraint is

achieved with a mate constraint between two lines, edges, or axes.

combine

Performs a cut, join, or intersect operation on selected solid bodies.

component

A part or subassembly placed into another assembly. Assembly components

can be single parts or combined parts that operate as a unit (or

subassembly). Components can be treated as parts within other assemblies.

composite iMate

A group of individual iMates, selected and named in the browser, that are to

be used as a unit. In an assembly, when a component with a composite

iMate is matched with another component with a composite iMate of the

same name, all constraints in the iMate collection solve at once.

concentric constraint

A geometric constraint that causes two circles, arcs, or ellipses to have the

same center point. The result is the same as that of a coincident constraint

applied to the centers of the curves.

configuration file

A file that specifies the options for opening AutoCAD or Mechanical Desktop

files, or saving files in DWG or DXF format.

connection point

A point that you can define for use in inferencing or snapping to other

geometry. You can add connection points and use them to position

sketched symbols, title blocks, and other drawing objects.

constant-radius fillet

A fillet that has the same radius along its entire length. Use the Constant

tab on the Fillet feature dialog box to select the edges and specify the

radius for a constant-radius fillet feature.

constraints

Rules that govern the position, slope, tangency, dimensions, and

relationships among sketch geometry or the relative position between parts

in an assembly. Geometric constraints control the shapes and relationships

among sketch elements or assembly components. Dimensional constraints

control size. Applying constraints removes degrees of freedom.

construction environment

Imported data resides in the construction environment until it is promoted

to the part environment. For example, when importing data in IGES or SAT

format, a Construction icon is placed in the browser, with data groups

nested below it. In the active construction environment, tools modify the

geometry, such as repairing errors in imported data.

construction geometry

Geometry used to assist in the creation of sketches or features, but not

used to define profiles or paths. The line style designates a curve as

construction geometry.

consumed sketch

A sketch incorporated into a feature, such as a sketch used in an extrusion.

By definition, the sketch is consumed by the feature.

containing selection window

Dragging your cursor from right to left creates a crossing selection. Objects

that are fully within the containing window are selected.

context menu

The menu that appears when the right mouse button is clicked. Displays

commands and Help for the current operation.

coordinate system

The set of magnitudes (visually represented by the X, Y, and Z axes) that

determine the position of points, lines, curves, and planes in part and

assembly files. By default, a grid displays on the active sketch plane of the

coordinate system.

corner break

In sheet metal design, a corner break applies either a radius or chamfer

edge to the end of a flange.

corner relief

In sheet metal design, a small notch that prevents material from tearing is

placed where two bends join.

corner seam

In sheet metal design, a corner seam mates edges where two bends join,

including the alignment or overlap of edges, miter of angled flanges, and

inserts corner relief.

cosmetic welds

In a weldment model, cosmetic welds are graphic elements that indicate

welded edges. Cosmetic welds represent a wide range of weld types. They

do not add mass to the assembly and cannot be used in interference

checking. Cosmetic welds always reside in the Welds feature group.

curves

Geometric objects in a sketch, including lines, arcs, circles, splines, and

ellipses.

custom iPart

An iPart factory generates iParts, each of which has a unique instance with

parameters, properties, and other values that are maintained in an

embedded spreadsheet. Each row in the spreadsheet represents an

individual iPart with a unique instance. When a custom iPart is used in an

assembly, specific values specified during the iPart definition can be

modified (such as length, width, or thickness).

cut

In sheet metal design, cuts are sketched shapes that define material to

remove from a single face, a specified depth, or an entire 3D part.

cut length

For frames, the overall length of the raw stock required to create a

structural member (including enough material to accommodate end

treatments on either end).

cut list

A cut list is a table listing components with dimensions and cut treatment

information for fabrication and accounting purposes. Each treatment on a

frame member produces a custom property called CUTDETAIL(n), which you

can add as manufacturing notes in the cut list.

cut operation

One of 3 Boolean operations (cut, join, and intersect) that define the

relationship between a sketched feature and an existing feature. A cut

operation removes the volume of a sketched feature from an existing

feature. Not available for base features.

cutting plane

Used to display an assembly section temporarily for defining new features.

A cutting plane is an existing plane defined by default work planes within

the assembly or within one of the component parts of the assembly.

deck

The walking surface of a platform, typically constructed of diamond plate or

expanded metal.

degrees of freedom

The variables by which an object can move. In assemblies, a body floating

free in space with no constraints to another grounded body can be moved

along three axes of translation and around three axes of rotation. Such a

body is said to have six degrees of freedom. Constraints remove degrees of

freedom by restricting the ways sketch geometry can change or a free-

floating body can move.

demote

In the browser hierarchy, dragging a feature or component farther from the

top level.

dependent features

Features that are geometrically dependent on another feature, such as

chamfers and fillets.

derived part

A new part that uses an existing Autodesk Inventor part as its base feature.

A part can be scaled or mirrored when inserted into a file, and additional

features can further modify the body. A derived part is linked to the original

part and can be updated to reflect changes to the original part.

derived part feature

A base feature in a new part that is derived from an existing Autodesk

Inventor part. When creating a derived part, you import a part as the base

feature. The base feature is listed as a derived part feature in the browser.

Part modeling features can further modify the derived part feature.

design elements

See iFeatures

design layout

A 2D master drawing or sketch that is drawn to scale with minimal detail to

capture the known design parameters of a problem or project. The design

layout is a dynamic document that becomes less useful as a project nears

completion. It is superseded by detailed part and assembly designs.

design properties

The file properties that can be used to find and manage Autodesk Inventor

files. Design properties are also used to maintain and update information

automatically in title blocks, parts lists, bills of material, and sketched

symbols. See also iProperties

design view representation

A named and saved assembly view where components have characteristics

selectively designated, usually to present an uncluttered working

environment. A design view captures characteristics such as selection status

(enabled or not enabled), visibility status, color and style, zoom

magnification, and viewing angle. The design view representation can be

named, and when recalled, components are shown with the designated

display characteristics.

diameter dimension

A dimension that controls the size of a circle or arc in a sketch or drawing

view. Can be stated as a numeric constant, as a variable in an equation, or

in a link to a parameter file. In drawing views, can be designated as a

driving dimension (resizes the model) or reference dimension (does not

resize the model).

dimension style

A group of settings that control the default format for dimensional

annotations in drawings. You set up dimension styles in a template or

drawing before you place dimensions, hole notes, and other annotations.

dimensional constraints

Parametric dimensions that control sketch size. When dimensions are

changed, the sketch resizes. Dimensional constraints can be expressed as

numeric constants, as variables in equations, or in parameter files.

downstream process

An operation that follows the selected operation in an order-dependent

process. For example, post-weld machining operations are downstream from

the weld bead and weld preparation operations.

draft

See face draft.

draft angle

A taper applied to part faces, for example, to allow extraction from a mold.

Draft angle can be applied when a sketch is extruded or can be applied to

selected faces.

draft plane

A planar face used to determine the direction of the draft angle.

draft view

A special view in a drawing that does not contain a representation of a 3D

model. A draft view has one or more associated sketches. Place a draft view

and construct a drawing without an associated model, or use a draft view to

provide detail that is missing in a model.

When you import an AutoCAD file to an Autodesk Inventor drawing, the

data is placed in a draft view. Dimensions, text, and other annotations are

placed on the drawing sheet and geometry is placed in the associated

sketch

drafting standards

Specific guidelines for drawing views, dimensions, notes, and annotations

that ensure uniform presentation of information. Drafting standards facilitate

the exchange of information among several users, vendors, and

manufacturers.

drawing resources

The sheet formats, title block formats, border templates, and sketched

symbols defined in a drawing or drawing template. Design resources are

listed in the Drawing Resources folder in the browser. You can define new

drawing resources and add them to the folder.

Use drawing resources to add new sheets, title blocks, or borders to a

drawing, or to add custom annotations to a drawing sheet or drawing view.

driven dimension

A nonparametric dimension enclosed in parentheses that shows the current

value of geometry. Its value updates when the geometry changes size, but

it does not resize geometry.

driving dimension

A parametric dimension that determines the size of sketch geometry and

resizes the sketch when its value changes.

duplicated feature

A feature that has been copied and arrayed in a rectangular or circular

pattern or mirrored.

edge

The curve joining two model faces.

edge chain

In a fillet feature, chains together all edges that are tangent to the edges

you select to fillet.

edge set

A group of edges selected during the creation of a 3D fillet feature. The

fillet radius and all fillet options are the same for all edges in a single edge

set.

edit in place

A component is activated (the edit target) and edited in the assembly

context. Except for the active component, all components are shown in

wireframe and cannot be selected. Edits are saved to the part or

subassembly file. Double-click the top-level assembly in the browser to

reactivate the assembly.

edit target

The file to which edits are saved when constraints are applied or when

assembly components are created or edited in place. The edit target can be

a part file, subassembly, or top-level assembly that is activated in place.

ellipse

Geometry created from the intersection of a cylinder and an angled plane.

enabled part

In an open assembly file, a part that is fully loaded in memory and can be

activated in place for editing. Placed parts are enabled automatically.

end treatment

The geometry of a structural member where it joins another structural

member of a frame. End treatments can include miters, coping, butt, and

others.

endpoint

An implicit point on the ends of curves. Endpoints can be included in

constraints, dimensions, and as snap points.

engineering notes

Notes attached to a feature, part, assembly, assembly constraint, or other

object to document the design process and decisions. Using Autodesk

Inventor, you can capture, edit, and manage engineering notes.

equal constraint

A geometric constraint that causes selected arcs and circles to have the

same radius or selected lines to have the same length.

equations

Mathematical expressions that range from simple numbers to complex

algebraic and trigonometric expressions that use parameters as variables.

Each parameter has a unique equation. You can enter an equation as the

value of a dimension, feature, offset, or parameter.

Autodesk Inventor equations support most common mathematic operators

but do not support addition or subtraction in exponents. Use the expression

ul/units to create a negative exponent (for example, ul/min equals min-1).

exploded view

A view in which parts of an assembly are separated for unobstructed

viewing. The direction and distance that parts can be moved are dependent

on the settings that you specify when setting up the view. Exploded views

are defined in an assembly presentation file and then used to add exploded

views to a drawing.

expression

A mathematical expression relates one set of terms to a syntactical

collection of other terms through mathematical operations, functions, and

Boolean logical operators. Unlike an equation (whose sides are equal), an

expression can include inequalities of greater than, greater than or equal to,

less than, less than or equal to, and other relationships.

external frame

Frames often required for platforms, access ways, and stairwells used to

operate and maintain complex machinery. You can build external frames

either at the time machines or equipment are installed, or concurrently with

the machinery.

extract

The process of copying a feature out of a part model and storing it in a

feature file. An extracted feature can be retrieved from a Windows folder

(catalog) and placed in a part file.

extruded feature

A feature created by adding depth to a sketched profile. Feature shape is

controlled by profile shape, extrusion extent, and taper angle. Unless the

extruded feature is the first feature, its relationship to an existing feature or

body is defined by selecting a Boolean operation (join, cut, or intersect) and

the participating bodies for the operation if multiple bodies exist. Optionally,

can create a new body.

face

A bounded surface that defines part of an object, such as a part face or a

face in a quilt.

face draft

A taper applied to part faces to cant a surface or allow a part to be

extracted from a mold. Draft is defined by specified faces, pull direction,

angle, and fixed edge or tangent surface.

feature

Parametric geometry that creates or modifies parts or assemblies.

Relationships among features are defined by geometric and dimensional

constraints. Types include sketched, placed, and duplicated features, work

(construction) features, and assembly features. Features combine to build

up a complex part or assembly model. Individual features can be modified

as needed.

feature constraints

See constraints.

feature file

A file created when you extract a feature, sketch, or subassembly to be

used as an iFeature. The iFeature is stored in a feature file (.ide) and can

be retrieved by name and placed in a part or assembly file.

feature participant

See participant components.

feature sketch edit

The Edit Sketch command modifies a feature by changing its sketch

dimensions. When Edit Sketch is selected in either the graphics window or

the browser, the feature (and all features created after it) is temporarily

hidden and its original sketch appears. After the sketch is modified, the

feature updates to incorporate the changes and all subsequent features

reappear.

fillet curve

An arc of a specified radius placed at the corner or intersection of 2 lines

using the Fillet sketch tool.

fillet feature

A placed feature applied to edges and corners of a 3D model. A fillet feature

is defined by its type, radius, and placement.

fillet weld

See solid welds and cosmetic welds.

first-level component

A component linked directly to the top-level assembly icon in the assembly

browser. A first-level component can be an individual part or a subassembly

that contains multiple parts or other subassemblies.

fit point

A definition point that does not move when a spline is solved. Beginning and

endpoints, and internal points constrained to other geometry, are fit points.

flag

A symbol extending out of the vertex of the welding symbol which indicates

that to make the weld onsite. Welding symbols with no flag indicate to

apply the weld in the shop.

flexible assembly

A subassembly that can be positioned in a top-level assembly while allowing

its underconstrained positions to be driven or dragged from its parent level.

The capability is useful for kinematic mechanism design.

flush constraint

An assembly constraint that points the surface normals of selected faces in

the same direction. Placing a flush constraint removes three degrees of

freedom (two rotational and two translational). In the Mechanical Desktop,

a flush constraint is achieved using an assembly mate constraint and

selecting a surface normal solution.

fly through

A motion-oriented view of a part or assembly model. In Perspective Camera

mode, you can use the mouse and key commands to navigate internal

portions of a model with full range of motion between X, Y, and Z axes.

foreign component

Parts and assembly models created in another CAD system.

frame

A mechanical component typically composed of welded structural members

which serves as the foundation component of a machine or as an external

access platform. Frames are typically a single item within a bill of materials.

frame skeleton

A 2D/3D wireframe or solid body representation of the frame that consists

of straight line segments.

Gaussian curvature

The Gaussian curvature of a surface at a point is the product of the

principal curvatures at that point. The tangent plane of any point with

positive Gaussian curvature touches the surface at a single point, whereas

the tangent plane of any point with negative Gaussian curvature cuts the

surface. Any point with zero mean curvature has negative or zero Gaussian

curvature.

geometric constraints

Rules that define the geometric relationships of sketch elements and control

how a sketch can change shape or size. Some constraints are inferred

according to sketched shape and others may be manually applied to remove

degrees of freedom. Geometric constraints are coincident, collinear,

concentric, equal, fix, horizontal, parallel, perpendicular, tangent, and

vertical.

global parameters

Called global variables in the Mechanical Desktop.

graphics window

The active modeling area in which sketches, constraints, features, parts,

and assemblies are created and edited. In the graphics window, models can

be rotated, zoomed in and out, and view characteristics such as color,

material, and light defined.

ground shadow

Shadow cast below a visible model is updated dynamically as the model

rotates or moves. The effect is similar to a shadow cast on the ground

beneath a model.

grounded component

A part or subassembly for which all six degrees of freedom were removed

relative to the assembly origin. You can position the part or subassembly

without reference to other parts. It is fixed in space. The first part or

subassembly placed in an assembly file is grounded automatically, although

the ground can later be deleted and relocated, if needed.

grounded work point

A work point created in a part or assembly to represent a point fixed in

space. A grounded work point is indicated in the browser by a push pin

symbol. In a part file, the 3D Move/Rotate tool displays when point is

created and provides specified transforms from the fixed point. 3D

Move/Rotate tool is not available in assemblies.

heal

Autodesk Inventor can extend adjacent faces until they intersect, or heal,

when a face such as a fillet face is deleted. Healing is not possible if, for

example, a cube face is deleted.

hidden folder

A folder displayed in the browser for each sequence in an assembly

presentation. You can drag components into the hidden folder for a

sequence to hide them for the duration of that sequence in the animation.

hole

A geometric feature defined by hole type, placement, size, and dimensions.

A hole requires a center point sketch for its origin and placement.

hole tag

An alphanumeric identifier added to each hole included in a hole table.

horizontal constraint

A geometric constraint that positions selected lines, ellipse axes, or pairs of

points parallel to the X axis of the sketch coordinate system or positions 2

selected points (curve endpoint, center, midpoint, or sketch point) the same

distance from the primary axis (same Y coordinate).

horizontal dimension

A dimension that controls the size of curves that are parallel to the X-axis

in sketches and drawing views. Can be stated as a numeric constant, as a

variable in an equation, or in a link to a parameter file. In drawing views,

can be designated as a driving dimension (resizes the model) or a reference

dimension (does not resize the model).

iFeatures

Features, sketches, or subassemblies that can be used in more than one

design are designated as iFeatures and saved in a file with an .ide

extension. To add an iFeature to a part, use Windows Explorer to drag the

file name and drop it in the active part file. To change the size of an

iFeature, edit its sketch or feature definition or link it to parameters that

define its size. You can precisely position an iFeature using geometric

constraints and dimensions.

iMate

One half of a constraint defined in a component file. Used to position the

component automatically in an assembly when matched to an iMate with

the same name on another part. Can be given a unique name to describe

its use.

iMate definition

Created when you create or infer iMates on geometry. When matched in an

assembly, the solution is an iMate result.

iMate result

Assembly constraints that consume one or more iMate definitions.

in-line work feature

A work feature created during the creation of another work feature. For

example, when creating a work point, right-click and choose to create either

a work plane or a work axis. You can continue to select and create in-line

work features until the requirements for the work point, in this case, are

satisfied. In-line work features are dependent on the active work feature

command in which they were created.

in-place activation

The context switch from a parent-level assembly to a child of that

assembly, such as a subassembly or an individual part. The activated

subassembly or part may be edited, moved, constrained, or otherwise

modified. Activating a part, subassembly, or assembly in place changes the

edit target to the active object.

included geometry

Model edges, vertices, 2D lines and arcs inserted from existing parts into a

3D sketch using the Include tool. Included geometry is converted to 3D

geometry and can be used in a path sketch for a 3D sweep feature.

included path file

A secondary project file specified in a project. When an included path file is

used, Autodesk Inventor searches the locations specified in both projects to

resolve links and references between files. An included path file is often

used to specify work group locations on a network.

inconsistent constraint

A constraint that conflicts with a constraint already placed and, thus, cannot

be solved. In assemblies, examples of inconsistent constraints include a

requested mate constraint when a flush constraint is required (inverted face

normals), a rigid body topology conflict, or the Adaptive status not set.

infer iMates

A process by which assembly constraints are converted to iMate definitions

stored with the part.

insert point

A user-defined point at which the cursor is attached when a sketched

symbol is inserted into a drawing. If you do not specify an insert point for a

sketched symbol, the cursor is attached to the center of the symbol

geometry.

interference

The volume created when portions of multiple components occupy a

common space. The volume shared by the intersecting components is

displayed; individual components can be modified to eliminate interference.

intermittent weld

A weld that is not continuous along its length. Two or three values are

required depending on the standard. Possible values are length, pitch or

spacing, and number.

internal frame

A frame you can use as the base upon which to build a machine. You can

weld frames together, machine and then paint or otherwise finish them, or

bolt them together using materials left unfinished, such as stainless steel or

aluminum.

intersect operation

One of 3 Boolean operations (cut, join, and intersect) that define the

relationship between a sketched feature and an existing feature. An

intersect operation creates a feature from the shared volume of a sketched

feature and an existing feature. Material not included in the shared volume

is deleted. Not available for base features.

invisible part

See undisplayed part.

iPart

A part generated from an iPart Factory, whose multiple configurations are

each maintained in a row in an embedded spreadsheet defined in the iPart

Factory. The designer of the iPart Factory specifies parameters, properties,

features, iMates, and other values to include or exclude from individual

iParts. Standard iParts cannot be modified; Custom iParts contain some

values that may be modified when the part is used.

iProperties

File properties that can be used to find and manage Autodesk Inventor files.

iProperties are also used to maintain and update information automatically

in title blocks, parts lists, bills of material, and sketched symbols. See also

design properties.

isolated environment

A collaborative work environment in which designers copy all files from the

server into a personal workspace before working on them. The project file

for an isolated environment specifies the personal workspace and any

additional local paths.

isometric

A type of orthographic projection where a 3D model is situated so that each

of the three fundamental model planes (X, Y, and Z) has an equal degree of

exposure relative to the view angle of the observer.

joggle

In sheet metal design, a means to offset material so that material can be

overlapped.

join operation

One of three Boolean operations (cut, join, and intersect) that define the

relationship between a sketched feature and an existing feature. A join

operation adds the volume of a sketched feature to the existing feature. Not

available for base features.

joint

The location where one structural member becomes coincident with a second

structural member. In many frames, these locations are define welded

conditions. Joints are most common at either end of a structural member.

key values

A value used to define an iPart or a table-driven iFeature instance when

used in a model. An iPart or table-driven iFeature must have at least one

primary key and as many as eight secondary keys. Keys are numbered

when defined in the iPart factory and control available values when the iPart

is used. For example, selecting a primary key value filters available

secondary key values.

keyframe animation

An animation created by arranging objects and taking snapshots of them at

key moments during a sequence of movement or change. These key

moments or keyframes become the fixed points in time through which the

animation passes.

ladder

Platform frames often exist on multiple levels surrounding large equipment,

and these levels often require ladder access. Ladders can consist of several

parallel vertical structural members connected with various types of rungs.

leaf part

A single component in the assembly tree or a component in an assembly.

library feature

See iFeatures.

library search paths

The locations of files not edited. Libraries can include purchased or standard

parts, Mechanical Desktop parts used in Autodesk Inventor assemblies, iPart

factories and members, or other internally developed standard parts. A

library is often referenced by multiple projects. Each project specifies the

locations of its libraries.

line

Straight curve bounded by two endpoints. The line tool on the Sketch

toolbar chains line segments together and creates arcs tangent or

perpendicular to existing curves. Segments and arcs are automatically

joined by coincident constraints at their endpoints.

local style

A style cached in the current document. By default, the styles associated

with a selected drafting standard are available in a document.

loft feature

A sketched feature specified by tangency condition, termination, and order

of sketches. Loft features blend 2 or more dissimilar sketch shapes on

nonintersecting sketch planes. Optionally, can create a new solid body.

loop

A closed sketch shape that can include sketched curves, edges, and planar

faces as boundaries.

lump

A group of faces that may contain some or no void. A part or surface body

should have at least one lump. For example, if you draw two separate

rectangles in a sketch and extrude both of them, the resulting part has two

lumps. If you create two separate lines (not connected) and extrude them,

the resulting surface has two lumps.

machining features

Assembly features added to the Machining folder in a weldment assembly.

Machining features are added after weld beads are applied to the weldment

assembly, often affecting multiple assembly components. Holes and extrude

cuts are typical post-weld machining features.

machining features group

A folder in the weldment environment representing metal removal

operations performed after welding. Machining operations often affect

multiple assembly components. Holes and extrude cuts are typical post-

weld machining features.

mask

A property that describes the transparency of an image inserted in a sketch.

When a mask is applied to an image, the mask color is determined by the

bottom right pixel of the image.

mass properties

See physical properties.

mate constraint

An assembly constraint that joins elements together with a surface normal

orientation and an optional offset. A planar mate constraint usually moves

two external part faces so that their surface normals point in opposite

directions. Mate constraints can be used to join points, lines, edges, or axes

together and to adapt diameters of unconstrained cylinders.

material properties

Properties defined by the material definition stored in individual part files.

Properties include Young's modulus, Poisson's ratio, specific heat, density,

yield strength, ultimate strength, linear expansion, and thermal conductivity.

Mechanical Desktop part

Component models created using the Mechanical Desktop.

middle-out design

An assembly design technique that combines aspects of both top-down and

bottom-up techniques. Assemblies designed with the middle-out technique

usually have some fixed equipment or requirements, but also require

custom design solutions.

midpoint

The center of a line segment.

minimum energy spline fit method

Generates a smooth curve with high visual appeal and better curvature

distribution. Because splines contain more data, surfaces generated from

the minimum energy splines compute slower than other spline curvature

types.

missing geometry

A constraint error that occurs in an assembly when a component is

constrained in position, but subsequent modifications are made to one of

the constrained parts. The geometry involved in the constraint is no longer

available. It can happen if the geometry was consumed by a subsequent

feature operation or if the feature containing the geometry was deleted or

suppressed.

missing tooth

In features or components arranged in a pattern, a position within the

logical definition that denotes a skipped or suppressed occurrence.

motion constraint

Specifies intended motion ratios between assembly components, either by

rotation (such as gears and pulleys) or rotation and translation (such as a

rack and pinion). The first selected component moves relative to the second

selected component.

multi-body part

A part file that contains more than one solid body. Each body can contain

an independent collection of features or shared features. Each solid can be

exported as a separate part file at the end of the design process.

multiview projection

A set of single plane orthographic views used to display an object through

one view plane per projection. For example, a first angle projection is one

view in a multiview projection set.

native component

A part or assembly created using Autodesk Inventor. A native component

can be created in a part file or in place in an assembly file.

nested profile

A profile enclosed within the boundary of another profile. Nested profiles can

be selected and extruded in a single command operation. For example,

concentric circles can be selected and extruded to form a tube.

new solid

An operation in a part file that creates a new body. The solid body can

contain a unique set of features separate from other bodies in a multi-body

part file. Features can also be shared with other bodies.

not enabled part

A part not required for editing in the current design session but that is

provided for context. Often, parts that are not enabled are completely

positioned and were placed early in the assembly design process. In an

open assembly file, parts are designated as not enabled in both the

graphics window and the browser and may not be selected.

numeric constant

A quantity taken to have a fixed value in a specific mathematical context.

Examples of numeric constants include pi, English and metric conversion

factors, and the freezing point of water.

occurrence

Placement of a component, usually in multiple-level assemblies, where a

component is replicated as a result of multiple placements of a single part

or subassembly.

offset geometry

Duplicates and positions selected sketch geometry a specific distance from

the original. By default, offset geometry is constrained equidistant from the

original geometry.

OLE object

A linked or embedded object that originates in an application external to

Autodesk Inventor.

origin indicator

A marker in a drawing view that sets the origin datum point for ordinate

dimensions or a hole table. The origin indicator for a view is placed when

the first ordinate dimension or hole table is added. A view can have only

one origin indicator.

orthographic camera mode

A display mode where all points of a model are projected along parallel lines

to the screen.

other side

In weld situations such as a T-shaped joint, there are 2 potential places for

a weld. The side of the joint opposite the side to which the arrow points is

known as the other side. The other side weld is made with the instructions

given above the reference line for an ANSI symbol and below the reference

line for all other standards.

pad

Typically a piece of flat stock added to the end of a structural member to

provide stability where the member is bolted to another. Often, pads are

added along the length of a structural member to provide additional

material to be machined to close tolerances where additional components of

an assembly are attached.

parallel constraint

A geometric constraint that causes two or more lines or ellipse axes to have

the same slope and orientation.

parallel dimension

Linear dimension that shows the distance between two lines and has the

same slope as the lines.

parameters

Used to define the size and shape of features and to control the relative

positioning of components within assemblies. Can be expressed as

equations to define the relationships between geometric elements relative to

one another. Changes to one element update the other. You can link a

spreadsheet to a part or assembly and drive the parameters from cells in

the spreadsheet.

Can be defined to relate dimensions to functional requirements. For

example, the cross-sectional area of a part can be defined with specific

proportions and able to withstand a certain load (Area =

Load/Material_Strength*Factor_of_Safety).

parametric dimension

Dimensions are constraints that control sketch size. The sketch geometry

resizes when you change the dimension value. Together, geometric

constraints and dimensional constraints control the size and shape of

sketches used to create features. See also geometric constraint and

dimensional constraint.

parent and child relationships

In a hierarchical system, a parent object owns dependent child objects.

Deleting a parent deletes dependent children objects. For example, deleting

a plate also deletes the pattern of holes on the plate. Deleting a child has

no effect on its parent object. A child object usually has a single parent

object and may be a parent to other child objects. In the browser, a child

object is indented under its parent.

part

A group of faces that define a closed volume.

part constraints

Geometric constraints that control the shapes and relationships among

sketch curves. See also geometric constraints.

part features

Parametric building blocks that are combined to create a part. Features can

be sketched, placed, and duplicated. Relationships between features are

maintained by geometric and dimensional constraints.

part model

A collection of geometrically and dimensionally related features that

represent a physical object. A part file contains a single part. If the part

was created in another CAD system, the part is a single solid with no

parametric relationships among its geometric elements. Parts may originate

as .SAT files, Mechanical Desktop parts, OLE objects, design (catalog)

elements, or custom parts. Custom parts can be created in part files, or in

place in assembly files. Parts are combined to form assemblies. In an

assembly, parts can be created in relation to the geometry and topology of

parts already in place.

participant component

An assembly component that is affected by an assembly feature. Participant

components are listed under the related assembly feature in the assembly

browser.

parting line

A work plane or sketched line, arc, or spline that shows where to split a

face or part.

parts list

In an assembly, a listing of components. Usually, a parts list is single-level

and consists of an item number or other designation, part name and

quantity. In some cases, parts list is a term used interchangeably with bill

of materials, although large organizations usually make a distinction.

path

The trajectory of a sweep feature. A path can be an open or closed loop

consisting of lines, arcs, ellipses, or circles, with a specified start point.

path file

See project file.

pattern element

In an assembly pattern, symmetrically arranged components. Each element

contains one or more instances (individual parts). In the assembly browser,

pattern elements are listed in a numbered sequence below the assembly

pattern object. Each element can be expanded to show the instances in the

element.

pattern feature

Multiple instances of a placed or sketched feature arrayed in a specified

pattern. Patterns are defined by type (rectangular or circular), orientation,

number of features, and spacing between features.

pattern instance

In an assembly pattern, the part or parts selected as an element. The

elements (one or more parts) are repeated in a symmetrical pattern, each

containing the same part instances. In the assembly browser, instances are

nested below each pattern element.

perpendicular constraint

A geometric constraint that causes two lines or ellipse axes to lie at right

angles to one another.

perspective camera mode

A display mode in which a model is displayed in three-point perspective, like

the way objects in the real world are perceived by the human eye.

physical properties

Physical properties of a part, including mass, radii of gyration, volume,

principal moments, products, center of gravity, and principal axes. Mass

properties are calculated with respect to the sketch coordinate system and

the density assigned to an object through a material property attribute.

placed component

A part or subassembly created in a separate file, then selected and placed

in an assembly. One or more copies (occurrences) of the component can be

placed from one part or assembly.

placed feature

A feature that consists of a defined mechanical shape that serves a known

engineering function in a part or assembly. Examples are holes, chamfers,

fillets, shells, face drafts, and plane cuts.

planar face

A 2-dimensional (flat) part face.

point

A persistent sketch point, work point, curve endpoint, midpoint, or center

point.

post-weld machining

In weldment design, a machining operation that is performed after welds

were applied to the weldment. Machining operations often affect multiple

assembly components. Holes and extrude cuts are typical post-weld

machining features.

See also machining features and machining features group.

preparation features

Assembly features added to the Preparations folder in a weldment assembly.

Preparation features contribute to an optional metal removal process often

called a weld prep. They are added before welding to ensure adequate weld

strength. Chamfers are typical weld preparations. See also weld-prep.

preparations feature group

A folder in the weldment environment representing an optional metal

removal process. This process is done before welding to ensure adequate

weld strength. The removed metal is typically filled back in with the weld

bead. Chamfers are typical weld preparations. See also weld prep.

presentation view

A specialized assembly view. You develop the specialized views, such as

exploded views, in a presentation file and then use them to create drawing

views or other presentations.

primary entity

Any line or arc with both of its endpoints in the selection set.

principal curvatures

The principal curvatures of a surface at a point are the minimum and

maximum of the normal curvatures at that point. (Normal curvatures are

the curvatures of curves on the surface that are lying in planes, including

the tangent vector at the given point.) The principal curvatures are used to

compute the Gaussian and Mean curvatures of the surface.

profile

A closed loop defined by sketched or reference geometry that represents a

cross section of a feature. An open profile defined by sketched segments,

arcs, or splines can define a surface shape or extend to boundaries to close

a region. A profile can enclose islands.

project

A means to organize Autodesk Inventor files and maintain valid links

logically between files. A project consists of a home folder, a project file

that specifies the paths to the locations of the files in the project, and the

local and network folders containing Autodesk Inventor files.

You can have as many projects as needed to manage your work. The

project file for each project must be maintained in the project home folder.

project file

A file that specifies the locations of files in a project. A project file is a text

file with an .ipj extension. We recommend that the file is maintained in the

home folder for the project. Specify the paths to all files to manage the

links and references between the Autodesk Inventor files in the project.

There are four types of locations that can be specified in the project file:

workspace, local search paths, work group paths, and libraries.

For most projects, a single work group location is sufficient.

Library folders are for any released or read-only parts referenced by the

project, but not created or edited by it. A project can reference documents

from several different library folders.

Workspaces are used where the Multi-user mode is set to Semi-isolated.

Creating a project file with the work group and library locations set to

reference shared folders using UNC paths is recommended.

If you work on collaborative projects, the project files can specify many file

locations and even reference a secondary project file.

projected geometry

Geometry (model edges, vertices, work axes, work points, or other sketch

geometry) projected onto the active sketch plane as reference geometry.

Can include edges of a selected assembly component that intersects the

sketch plane when it was cut in an assembly cross section.

promote

In the browser hierarchy, dragging a feature or component closer to the top

level.

promote surfaces

Imported surfaces are placed in the construction environment where tools

correct modeling defects such as gaps between surfaces. When corrected,

surfaces are promoted to the part environment where they can be edited

with feature tools.

property

A characteristic of a Microsoft Windows file that can be manipulated from an

application or Microsoft Windows Explorer. Properties include author or

designer and creation date and can also be unique properties assigned by

applications or users. Specifying properties can be useful when searching for

part or assembly files.

pull direction

The direction a mold is pulled from a molded or cast part. The definition of

draft for part faces includes the pull direction.

quilt

A group of connected faces that do not define a volume.

radial dimension

A dimension that controls the distance from the center point of a circle and

arc to a point on its circumference. Can be stated as a numeric constant, as

a variable in an equation, or in a link to a parameter file. In drawing views,

can be designated as a driving dimension (resizes the model) or reference

dimension (does not resize model).

radius

Distance from the center point of an arc or circle to a point on its

circumference.

rail

A structural member typically of round tube stock that often is placed

around platforms for safety reasons. Typical rail frames include hand rails,

vertical rail posts, and one or more intermediate/horizontal safety rails.

range

A limit placed on a variable. When a range is specified, the value of the

variable must lie between the minimum and maximum of the range.

reattach sketch

Moves a sketch and attaches it to a different sketch plane than the one on

which it originated. Use constraints and dimensions to position it and

modify sketch size as needed.

redundant constraint

Constraints placed on fixed topologies that do not remove degrees of

freedom, but do not conflict with previously placed constraints. It is marked

in the browser with a warning icon, but is allowed to exist because it

causes no harm.

reference dimension

In drawing views, a dimension that does not control the model size and is

not intended for inspection.

reference edge

A sketch curve created by projecting a model edge onto the sketch plane.

The curve can be a line, arc, circle, elliptical arc, or spline.

reference geometry

Sketch geometry created by projecting the edges, vertices, or work features

of another sketch onto the active sketch plane or onto the edges of a face

used to define the sketch plane. Reference geometry can be used to

constrain sketch geometry or included in a profile or path. Curves that

represent the boundary edges of a face used to create the sketch plane

cannot be deleted or trimmed, but projected curves can be deleted or

trimmed.

reference part

A simplified part that cannot be edited in Autodesk Inventor. An example is

a part imported from another CAD system in .sat or .stp format.

reference sketch

In an assembly, geometry that exists on one part can be projected onto the

sketch plane of a new part. The resulting cross-part sketch geometry is a

reference sketch. The size and position of the reference sketch is based on

the parent part. A reference sketch can be used like any other sketch

geometry to create a feature in the new part.

reference sketch geometry

Geometry derived from and associated with sketch geometry from other

unconsumed sketches.

reference vertex

A sketch point generated by projecting a model vertex onto the sketch

plane.

reference work axis

An unbounded sketch line generated by projecting a work axis onto the

sketch plane.

reference work point

A sketch point generated by projecting a work point onto the sketch plane.

refresh

A file menu command. Replaces any file in session that has outdated edits

compared to the saved version of the file on disk. All components and their

dependents are reloaded without closing the current assembly. If any

pending edits exist for a file needing refresh, a prompt appears enabling

Save Copy As to preserve the changes before conducting the refresh

operation.

region

A closed profile on a face or plane defined by sketched curves, edges, or

planes. An extruded region results in a solid body.

restored pattern element

A new pattern element associated with a previously created pattern. A

restored pattern element replaces a pattern element whose link to the

pattern was severed (made independent). In the browser, the restored

element pattern is listed below other pattern elements and has a numeric

reference to the previously severed element.

restructure assembly hierarchy

In the assembly browser, components promoted or demoted in the

hierarchy or moved from one assembly to another assembly. Components

do not move relative to other components in the graphics window when

position is changed in the assembly browser. Constraints between

components are retained.

revolved feature

A solid feature created by revolving a profile around an axis. Unless the

revolved feature is the first feature, its relationship to an existing feature or

body is defined by selecting a Boolean operation (join, cut, or intersect),

and the participating bodies for the operation if multiple bodies exist.

Optionally, can create a new body.

rigid body

A component that cannot change shape or size and acts as a single unit

when moved, constrained, or rotated. For example, a subassembly is a rigid

body because its shape and size cannot change. Although it contains

multiple parts, a subassembly behaves as a single component when placed

in an assembly.

rotation constraint

A motion constraint that specifies rotation of one part relative to another

part using a specified ratio. Used to specify motion of gears and pulleys, for

example.

rotation-translation constraint

A motion constraint that specifies rotation of one part relative to translation

of a second part. Used to specify motion of a rack and pinion, for example.

rounds

Fillets created on convex edges.

same X coordinate

A Mechanical Desktop constraint replaced by the vertical constraint in

Autodesk Inventor.

same Y coordinate

A Mechanical Desktop constraint replaced by the horizontal constraint in

Autodesk Inventor.

SAT file

The native file format (ASCII) produced by the ACIS geometry-modeling

kernel.

scene

A complete definition of components, such as geometry, materials for that

geometry, lighting, a studio, and a viewpoint to create a realistic image.

search paths

The file locations specified in a project. When you open a file, Autodesk

Inventor searches all the paths specified in the active project to find any

referenced files.

secondary entity

Any line or arc that has only one of its endpoints in the selection set.

section

In an assembly, a view of the model defined by temporarily hiding portions

of components or features on one side of a specified cutting plane.

section plane

In a base body, a cross section that defines the plane about which the body

is extended or contracted.

selection window

Using the Select tool to size a window, selects geometry partially or

enclosed in the window.

sequence

A group of tweaks in the animation of an exploded assembly. Each task in

an animation consists of one or more sequences, which in turn consists of

one or more tweaks.

shape point

An internal point that defines the shape of a spline. Shape points can move

when a spline is solved. By constraining a shape point to other geometry, it

changes to a fit point.

shared sketch

A sketch used by more than one feature; for example, a sketch containing

hole centers for different hole features.

sheet metal bend plate

In sheet metal design, that portion of the (flat or folded) model that

contains the material that deforms during a bend or fold.

sheet metal design environment

Entered by converting a part to sheet metal or specifying sheet metal

material for a new part. Modeling and flat pattern operations are specific to

sheet metal design.

sheet metal edge

In sheet metal design, the thin face (material thickness) at the edge of a

part. In part modeling, edges are the boundary between faces on the solid

model.See also: sheet metal plate detail face.

sheet metal face

In sheet metal design, faces (the sketched outline of material added to a

part) are planar and have a uniform thickness defined by the reserved

sheet metal parameter Thickness. In part modeling, faces have no

thickness and are bounded by edges.

sheet metal plate

In sheet metal design, plate can be used synonymously with face.

sheet metal plate detail face

In sheet metal design, the plate detail face is defined as the face of the

edge of the sheet. For rectangular detail faces, one of the side lengths will

equal the reserved sheet metal parameter Thickness. The plate detail face

is referred to during the definition of unfold equations.

sheet sketch

A sheet sketch is associated to the underlying sheet and is created if no

drawing view is selected when entering the Sketch environment.

Note: If a drawing view is selected when entering Sketch environment, the

sketch and sketch geometry are associated to the view. It is referred to as

a view sketch.

sheets

Corresponds to a page that contains drawing views. Each sheet can contain

a sketch overlay that contains customized sketches that correspond to the

drawing views.

shell

A parametric feature used most frequently for cast or molded parts. From a

specified face, material is removed from the part, leaving a cavity with walls

of a specified thickness. Shells usually have walls of uniform thickness, but

individual faces can be selected and their thickness is specified. Shell walls

can be offset to the inside, outside, or both sides of the part, relative to the

original part surfaces.

single plane projection

A view angle where only one of the three fundamental model planes (X, Y,

or Z) is visible and parallel to the view plane. Only model surfaces that are

exposed in this view state are visible.

skeleton

In Autodesk Inventor, one or more parts, contained in an *.ipt or *.iam file,

that are based on solids, 2D sketches, 3D sketches, or surfaces, and

represent the structure of a design. Edits to a skeleton produce design

changes on all associated geometry and designs.

skeleton part

In Frame Generator, a model which collects references in an *.ipt or *.iam

file that are used to build a structural frame. References can include solids,

2D or 3D sketches, and work geometry. Edits to a skeleton part produce

design changes on all associated geometry and designs.

sketch

A sketch consists of the sketch plane, a coordinate system, 2D curves, and

the dimensions and constraints applied to the curves. A sketch can also

incorporate construction geometry or reference geometry. Sketches are

used to define feature profiles and paths.

sketch constraints

See constraints.

sketch geometry

Curves that occur in sketches. Can include lines, points, rectangles, splines,

fillets, arcs, circles, and ellipses.

sketch geometry in drawings

A drawing sketch is an overlay that can contain text and 2D geometry, such

as lines and arcs.

sketch plane

A planar face or work plane on which the current sketch is created.

sketched feature

A feature that originates from a 2D sketch. Extruding, sweeping, revolving,

or lofting a sketched profile creates feature volume. The volume created by

the sketched feature can be joined with, cut from, or defined where it

intersects with the volume of an existing feature.

sketched part

Originates from a custom sketch rather than from an imported solid or

predefined shape.

sketched symbol

A custom symbol you create and save as a Drawing Resource in a drawing

or drawing template. A sketched symbol can include sketched geometry,

linked or embedded bitmaps, and text. It can also contain data translated

from DWG files.

You can add a sketched symbol to a drawing sheet as an annotation.

slice graphics

Reveals hidden plane or face by temporarily slicing away a specified portion

of a model. The revealed plane can be used as a sketch plane.

solid body

An enclosed 3D body that has volume.

solid model

A model in SAT or STEP file format imported in Autodesk Inventor as a base

feature (the first feature in a model). A base solid is fully dimensioned. Its

size can be changed only by commands in the Solids environment, but the

solid can be modified by adding features.

solid weld bead

In a weldment model, an assembly feature that creates the actual weld

bead geometry. A solid weld bead adds mass to the assembly and can be

used in interference checking. Solid weld beads reside only in the Welds

feature group. Solid welds are not shown as participant components in

assembly feature participation lists.

spline

A smooth curve fitted to a sequence of points within a specified tolerance.

split

Split Face divides one or more faces at a specified parting line. Resulting

faces can have individual face draft applied. Trim Solid removes a section of

the part. Split Solid creates a multi-body part by dividing a solid object into

two separate bodies. Resulting bodies can have unique features that are not

shared with other bodies.

stairway

Platform frames often exist on multiple levels surrounding large equipment,

these levels often require stairway access. Stairways typically consist of C

channel structural members in parallel on an incline with one or more stair

treads depending on the rise required.

standard iParts

An iPart factory generates iParts, each of which has a unique configuration

whose parameters, properties, and other values are maintained in an

embedded spreadsheet. Each row in the spreadsheet represents an

individual iPart with a unique configuration. When a standard iPart is used in

an assembly, its values cannot be modified.

standard spline fit method

Generates a curve with smoother continuity than the spline-fitting method in

AutoCAD.

static drawing

A drawing file on which updates are deferred. A static drawing does not

update when the model changes and you cannot place views or make other

changes to the drawing data. The defer updates setting is on Drawing tab of

the Document Settings dialog box.

STEP file

An international format developed to overcome some of the limitations of

current data conversion standards. Files created in other CAD systems can

be converted to STEP format and imported in Autodesk Inventor.

stretchy feature

See adaptive feature.

structural member

A single piece of material used in the construction of a frame, typically

purchased in stock lengths and sizes. Common structural members include

steel angle iron, round/square/rectangular steel tubing, C channel, I beams,

and so on.

style

In assemblies, a style is the set of information that describes component

appearance. A style includes descriptors such as color diffusion, specular

color, ambient color, emissive color, opacity, shine, and material.

style library

Defined styles reside in the style library and are referenced in documents.

Styles in documents (local styles) can be modified as needed, but the

original style definition in the library is not affected.

subassembly

An assembly file used in another assembly. The subassembly behaves as a

single unit, such as a motor with a gear reducer. Parts can originate in part

files, as OLE objects, or as iFeatures, or can be imported from the

Mechanical Desktop or other CAD system.

suppressed assembly pattern element

A member of an assembly pattern whose geometry no longer appears in

the graphics window. You can suppress an assembly pattern element if it

would interfere with other components such as a rod, notch, fastener, or

other geometry that would interrupt the pattern. In the browser, a

suppressed element is indicated by a shaded symbol and strike-through

text. A suppressed assembly pattern element can be unsuppressed.

suppressed feature

A feature whose geometry no longer appears in the graphics window. Any

features dependent on a suppressed feature are also suppressed.

Suppressed features are indicated in the browser by a shaded icon. A

feature can be unsuppressed. It and its dependent features are visible in

the graphics window and can be selected for editing.

suppressed sketch pattern element

A member of a sketch pattern whose geometry is no longer available in a

profile and does not appear in drawing sketches. In the graphics window, a

suppressed pattern element is shown in a dashed line. You can suppress a

sketch pattern element if the pattern would interfere with other model

geometry that would interrupt the pattern.

surface

A 2-dimensional definition of forms and shapes or an object in 3-

dimensional space that defines area without volume.

surface normal

Solid bodies are bounded by surfaces. The surface normal is the outward-

pointing vector perpendicular to a particular point on a surface. When

assembly constraints are being placed, a surface normal vector appears. In

most cases, it can be flipped in the opposite direction.

sweep feature

A feature created by moving a profile along a path. A sweep feature usually

requires two sketches, a profile, and a path on intersecting planes. An

optional guide rail for scaling can be included in a third sketch. Unless the

sweep feature is the first feature, its relationship to an existing feature or

body is defined by selecting a Boolean operation (join, cut, or intersect),

and the participating bodies for the operation if multiple bodies exist.

Optionally, can create a new solid body.

tangent constraint

A geometric constraint that causes two curves to have the same slope at

the point where they intersect. For example, a line can be tangent to an

arc, circle, or ellipse, but two lines cannot be tangent to one another.

In assemblies, a tangent constraint can be applied between cylindrical,

conical, and toroidal faces or circular arc edges. On selected components,

one component moves toward another, and contacts at the point of

tangency. In assemblies, tangency can be inside or outside a curve,

depending on the direction of the selected surface normal.

taper

Sets positive or negative taper angle for sweeps, extrusions, and coils

normal to the sketch plane.

target point

A point in space that your line of sight passes through. In orthographic

camera mode, the point can be located on the X and Y axes. In perspective

camera mode, the point can be located on the X, Y, and Z axes. The target

point also serves as a center point for the Rotate tool.

task

An assembly or disassembly action in the animation of an assembly

explosion. Each task in an animation consists of one or more sequences.

template

An assembly, part, or drawing file that contains predefined file properties.

To create a file based on a template, you open a template file, create the

content, and then save it with a unique file name. Pre-defined properties

can include visible default reference planes, customized grid settings, color

scheme, drafting standards, and so on.

termination

The method selected to end an extruded, swept, revolved, or lofted feature.

Examples are fixed length or angle, extension through all faces or to the

next face, or equal extension from a selected plane.

title block

The area on a drawing sheet that identifies the owner, includes a description

of the drawing, and provides other relevant information.

toolbody

An intermediate volume produced when a swept, extruded, or revolved

feature is created.

top-down design

An assembly technique in which parts are designed in place within an

incomplete assembly, taking advantage of existing part placement and using

part features and positional information as the basis for the design or

modification of new parts. Parts designed in the assembly context are

designed relative to features on parts already in the assembly.

top-level assembly

The root of an assembly, under which all components are arranged in a

hierarchical structure, is automatically created when you create an assembly

file. In the browser, the top level of the assembly is represented by an icon

and by default, the file name. In an assembly file, double-click the top level

of the assembly to switch from part creation or editing (the part

environment) to assembly tasks (the assembly environment).

trails

Lines in an exploded view that show the relationship of a component to the

assembly. Trails indicate the direction and distance that a component was

moved to create the view.

transform

Change in position or direction or orientation, such as move or rotate.

tweaking

The process of moving a component in an assembly presentation to create

an exploded view.

tweaks

Adjustments made to assembly components in an exploded view. You

specify the distance and direction of movement to provide better visibility of

the components and their relationships.

type of draft

Face draft may be shadow and edge draft. Shadow draft selects continuous

tangent faces and drafts all edges in one operation. Edge draft is draft

applied to a single face that is not tangent to another face. Face draft is

shown in the browser as TaperShadow or TaperEdge.

unavailable geometry

See missing geometry.

unconsumed sketch

A sketch in a part or assembly model that was not used in a feature. An

unconsumed sketch can be used to show assembly layout and develop

design concepts. You can display unconsumed sketches in drawing views.

undefined geometry

See missing geometry.

underconstrained geometry

Features or parts with unsolved degrees of freedom are underconstrained.

Features and parts designated as adaptive have underconstrained geometry

that resizes when it is constrained to fixed geometry (all degrees of freedom

removed).

undisplayed part

A part or subassembly whose visibility was turned off in the assembly

context. Such parts are not opened or loaded into memory. Parts or

subassemblies are turned off when they are not needed for the current

modeling tasks.

update

A part or assembly is recalculated after significant changes. Update can be

triggered automatically or manually, allowing work to continue before a part

or assembly is updated. An update incorporates changes held in memory

from the current editing session and updates the display in the graphics

window and browser. Unlike Refresh, Update incorporates only edits made

to the active component, but does not retrieve the saved version from disk.

update all

Recalculates all components to incorporate changes held in memory,

including the top-level assembly. Update All can be triggered automatically

or manually, allowing work to continue before a part or assembly is

updated. Unlike Refresh, Update All incorporates only edits made locally,

but does not retrieve the saved version from disk.

upstream process

An operation that precedes the selected operation in an order-dependent

process. For example, weldment preparations are upstream from the weld

bead and post-weld machining operations.

variable-radius fillet

A fillet that has a radius that varies along its length. You set a different

radius for the start point and endpoint. The transition type determines the

shape of the fillet. Use the Variable tab on the Fillet feature dialog box to

select the edges and specify the radii for a variable-radius fillet feature.

vertex

The bounding point of two or more curves or model edges.

vertical constraint

A geometric constraint that positions selected lines, ellipse axes, or pairs of

points parallel to the Y-axis of the sketch coordinate system (same X

coordinate).

vertical dimension

A dimension that controls the size of curves that are parallel to the Y axis in

sketches and drawing views. Can be stated as a numeric constant, as a

variable in an equation, or in a link to a parameter file. In drawing views,

can be designated as a driving dimension (resizes the model) or reference

dimension (does not resize the model).

view sketch

If a drawing view is selected when entering Sketch environment, the sketch

and sketch geometry are associated to the view. It is referred to as a view

sketch.

Note: A sheet sketch is associated to the underlying sheet and is created

when no drawing view is selected when entering the Sketch environment.

visibility

A characteristic of an assembly component that determines whether it

appears in the graphics window. In large assemblies, it is useful to turn off

the visibility of components not needed in the current design.

void

A group of faces that define an internal hollow space. For example, when a

cube is shelled without removing a face, the result is a void inside the cube.

weld bead feature

A weldment assembly feature type used to create complete weld

specifications in the model. Weld bead features, whether cosmetic or solid,

reside only in the Welds feature group folder. Weld bead features are not

shown as participants in assembly feature participation lists. See also

cosmetic welds and solid welds.

weld feature groups

Folders in the weldment browser used to organize assembly features that

combine to create a weldment. Three weld feature groups exist for

weldments: Preparations, Welds, and Machining. Each group represents a

particular task in the manufacturing process and is represented in the

browser with a different icon.

weld prep

An optional metal removal process done before welding to ensure adequate

weld strength. The metal removed is typically filled back in with the weld

bead. Chamfers are typical weld preps. See also preparation features group

and preparation features.

weldment design environment

A specialized assembly environment that is accessed by converting an

assembly to a weldment or by selecting a weldment template for a new

assembly. The weldment environment provides all the design tools used in

the assembly environment along with unique tools for defining weldments.

welds feature group

A group in the weldment browser that represents the process of adding

weld bead features to a design. Welds are applied after optional weld

preparations and before post-weld machining operations. Weld features

include cosmetic or solid fillet weld beads.

work axis

A construction feature that defines an axis in 3D space. A work axis is

useful when no geometry exists to use as an axis. Work axes can be

projected onto a sketch and incorporated into dimension and constraint

schemes.

work feature

Plane, axis, or point that can be projected onto a sketch as a reference

feature and used to construct new features. A work feature can be

incorporated into dimension and constraint schemes, but is not model

geometry.

work plane

A construction feature that defines the parametric location of a sketch plane

in 3D space. A work plane is useful when no planar face exists to use as a

sketch plane, for example, when sketching on curved or toroidal faces. A

work plane can be incorporated into dimension and constraint schemes.

work point

A construction feature that defines a point in 3D space. A work point can be

projected onto a sketch and incorporated into dimension and constraint

schemes.

workgroup search paths

The shared network locations that contain the Autodesk Inventor files for

your design team. Each project specifies the locations of workgroup search

paths.

workspace

The path to the work area on your local machine. Your workspace is

specified in the active project.

x-ray ground shadow

Shadow cast below a visible model is updated dynamically as the model

rotates or moves. Details of internal geometry are distinguishable. Effect is

like a shadow cast on the ground beneath a model.